| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | ||||||||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 |
|
CRN 10069 Q2 HP CRVSA 02T1 75 user manual | Users Manual | 1.38 MiB | / May 08 2003 | |||
| 1 2 3 |
|
CRN 10069 Q2 HP PP2180 user manual 1 of 2 | Users Manual | 3.88 MiB | / May 08 2003 | |||
| 1 2 3 |
|
CRN 10069 Q2 HP PP2180 user manual 2 of 2 | Users Manual | 3.89 MiB | / May 08 2003 | |||
| 1 2 3 |
|
CRN 10069 Q2 HP PP2180 user manual Regulatory statement | Users Manual | 1.41 MiB | / May 08 2003 | |||
| 1 2 3 |
|
CRN 10072 Q3 Wireless regulatory info | Users Manual | 669.78 KiB | / September 10 2003 | |||
| 1 2 3 |
|
CRN 10072 Q3 notebook user manual | Users Manual | 3.79 MiB | / September 10 2003 | |||
| 1 2 3 |
|
CRN 10072 Q3 regulatory info | Users Manual | 793.99 KiB | / September 10 2003 | |||
| 1 2 3 |
|
CRN 9475 Q1 notebook user manual | Users Manual | 1.38 MiB | ||||
| 1 2 3 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 1.18 MiB | May 08 2003 | |||
| 1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | September 10 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | September 10 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | September 10 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | External Photos | September 10 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Test Report | September 10 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | September 10 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | July 05 2004 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | July 05 2004 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | External Photos | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | / May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | / May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | / May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | / May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | External Photos | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | External Photos | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | External Photos | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | External Photos | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Test Report | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Test Report | May 08 2003 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 | Internal Photos | May 08 2003 |
| 1 2 3 | CRN 10069 Q2 HP CRVSA 02T1 75 user manual | Users Manual | 1.38 MiB | / May 08 2003 |
HP Notebook PC Reference Guide Notice This manual and any examples contained herein are provided as is and are subject to change without notice. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard Co. shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or the examples herein. Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 2003. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation of this manual is prohibited without prior written permission of Hewlett-Packard Company, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The programs that control this product are copyrighted and all rights are reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation of those programs without prior written permission of Hewlett-Packard Co. is also prohibited. Portions of the programs that control this product may also be copyrighted by Microsoft Corporation, Phoenix Technologies, Ltd., ATI Technologies Inc., Intel Corporation, and Adobe Systems Incorporated. See the individual programs for additional copyright notices. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Pentium and the Intel Inside logo are U.S. registered trademarks and Celeron and SpeedStep are U.S. trademarks of Intel Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Reference Guide Second Edition (March 2003) Part Number: 311074-002 ii Reference Guide Important Safety Information CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunications line cord to connect a modem to the telephone wall jack. In Australia, the computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. When using your notebook computer with a telephone connection, always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, and injury to persons:
Do not use this product with a telephone connection near water (for example, near a bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a wet basement). Avoid using a telephone connection (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning. Do not use a telephone connection to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this guide. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. Disconnect the modem cable before opening the computer case or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. Do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into the network (LAN) receptacle. Reference Guide iii HP Software Product License Agreement Your HP product contains software programs. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE PROCEEDING TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT. RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT THE CUSTOMER AGREES TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PROCEEDING TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT, YOU MUST NOW EITHER REMOVE THE SOFTWARE FROM YOUR HARD DRIVE AND DESTROY THE MASTER DISKETTES, OR RETURN THE COMPLETE HP PRODUCT AND SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND. PROCEEDING WITH CONFIGURATION SIGNIFIES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE LICENSE TERMS. UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED BELOW, THIS HP SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL GOVERN THE USE OF ALL SOFTWARE THAT IS PROVIDED TO YOU AS PART OF THE HP PRODUCT AND SHALL SUPERSEDE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE WARRANTY STATEMENT THAT MAY BE INCLUDED IN THIS HP PRODUCT OR MAY BE FOUND ONLINE. Operating system and software applications by Microsoft are licensed to you under the Microsoft License Agreement contained in the Microsoft documentation or displayed on your screen when Microsoft Software Products are launched. For a PC supplied with a Microsoft operating system: When you start the PC and accept the Microsoft End-user License Agreement (EULA), your license rights are valid only if a Certificate of Authenticity (COA) label corresponding to your Microsoft operating system is provided with your PC. The COA label can usually be found on the bottom of the computer. If the COA label does not correspond to your Microsoft operating system or is missing, contact your HP reseller for details. Other non-HP Software and Operating Systems are covered by the appropriate vendor license. The following License Terms govern the use of the HP software:
USE. Customer may use the software on any one HP product. Customer may not network the software or otherwise use it on more than one HP product. Customer may not reverse assemble or decompile the software unless authorized by law. COPIES AND ADAPTATIONS. Customer may make copies or adaptations of the software (a) for archival purposes or (b) when copying or adaptation is an essential step in the use of the software with an HP product so long as the copies and adaptations are used in no other manner. iv Reference Guide OWNERSHIP. Customer agrees that he/she does not have any title or ownership of the software, other than ownership of the physical media. Customer acknowledges and agrees that the software is copyrighted and protected under the copyright laws. Customer acknowledges and agrees that the software may have been developed by a third party software supplier named in the copyright notices included with the software, who shall be authorized to hold the Customer responsible for any copyright infringement or violation of this Agreement. PRODUCT RECOVERY CD-ROM OR DVD. If your HP product was shipped with a product recovery CD-ROM or DVD: (i) The product recovery CD-ROM or DVD and/or support utility software may only be used for restoring the hard disk of the HP product with which the product recovery CD-ROM or DVD was originally provided.
(ii) The use of any operating system software by Microsoft contained in any such product recovery CD-ROM or DVD shall be governed by the Microsoft License Agreement. TRANSFER OF RIGHTS IN SOFTWARE. Customer may transfer rights in the software to a third party only as part of the transfer of all rights and only if Customer obtains the prior agreement of the third party to be bound by the terms of this License Agreement. Upon such a transfer, Customer agrees that his/her rights in the software are terminated and that he/she will either destroy his/her copies and adaptations or deliver them to the third party. SUBLICENSING AND DISTRIBUTION. Customer may not lease, sublicense the software, or distribute copies or adaptations of the software to the public in physical media or by telecommunication without the prior written consent of Hewlett-
Packard. TERMINATION. Hewlett-Packard may terminate this software license for failure to comply with any of these terms provided Hewlett-Packard has requested Customer to cure the failure and Customer has failed to do so within thirty (30) days of such notice. UPDATES AND UPGRADES. Customer agrees that the software does not include updates and upgrades which may be available from Hewlett-Packard under a separate support agreement. EXPORT CLAUSE. Customer agrees not to export or re-export the software or any copy or adaptation in violation of the U.S. Export Administration regulations or other applicable regulation. Reference Guide v U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure is subject to HP standard commercial license terms and for non-DOD Departments and Agencies of the U.S. Government, the restrictions set forth in FAR 52.227-19(c)(1-2)
(June 1987) Hewlett-Packard Company, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304 U.S.A. Copyright (c) 2000 Hewlett-Packard Company. All Rights Reserved. Customer further agrees that Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252-227-7014 (June 1995) or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101(a), or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. The Customer agrees that it has only those rights provided for such Software by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved. SUPPORT POLICY FOR MICROSOFT OPERATING SYSTEMS SERVICE PACK. HP will provide end user support for HP PCs that use Microsoft Operating Systems, including its latest service packs. This support will be available 30 days after the service pack being released by Microsoft. vi Reference Guide Contents Getting Started with Your Notebook .......................................................................1 Identifying Parts of the Notebook ..........................................................................2 Front panel and right panel components...........................................................2 Left panel and back panel components.............................................................4 Bottom panel components ................................................................................6 Status lights.......................................................................................................8 Setting Up Your Notebook...................................................................................10 Step 1: Insert the battery.................................................................................10 Step 2: Connect AC power .............................................................................11 Step 3: Connect a phone line ..........................................................................12 Step 4: Turn on the notebook .........................................................................13 Step 5: Set up Windows..................................................................................13 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................15 Operating Your Notebook ....................................................................................16 Default power settings ....................................................................................16 To reset the notebook......................................................................................17 To change the boot device ..............................................................................17 To use the TouchPad ......................................................................................18 To use the function hot keys...........................................................................19 To use the One-Touch buttons........................................................................20 To use the Windows and Applications keys...................................................21 To use the ALT GR key .................................................................................21 Using CDs or DVDs.............................................................................................22 To insert or remove a CD or DVD .................................................................22 To play DVD movies......................................................................................23 To create or copy CDs ....................................................................................23 Securing Your Notebook......................................................................................24 To set up password protection ........................................................................24 To lock your notebook....................................................................................24 To attach a security cable ...............................................................................25 To protect against viruses ...............................................................................25 To lock the hard drive.....................................................................................26 Reference Guide vii Taking Care of Your Notebook............................................................................27 To protect your hard drive ..............................................................................27 To maintain your notebook.............................................................................27 To safeguard your data ...................................................................................28 To extend the life of the display .....................................................................28 To clean your notebook ..................................................................................28 Batteries and Power Management..........................................................................29 Managing Power Consumption ............................................................................30 How the notebook manages power automatically..........................................30 Using Battery Power.............................................................................................32 To check battery status ...................................................................................32 To respond to a low-battery warning..............................................................33 To recharge the battery ...................................................................................33 To get the most from your batteries................................................................34 Modem and Network Connections .........................................................................35 Using the Modem .................................................................................................36 To connect the modem....................................................................................37 To change your modem settings.....................................................................38 Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN).......................................................39 Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only).............................40 To prepare for connections .............................................................................40 To turn wireless communication on and off...................................................42 Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) ...........................44 To turn Bluetooth communication on and off ................................................44 To prepare for Bluetooth connections ............................................................45 To send or receive files using Bluetooth ........................................................46 Add-On Devices ........................................................................................................47 Connecting PC Cards ...........................................................................................48 To insert or remove a PC Card .......................................................................48 Connecting External Devices ...............................................................................50 To connect an audio device ............................................................................50 To use an external monitor .............................................................................52 To connect an IEEE 1394 device (select models only)..................................53 To connect an infrared device (select models only).......................................54 To use a port replicator (select models only) .................................................55 Installing Additional RAM (Memory) .................................................................58 To install a RAM expansion module..............................................................58 To remove a RAM expansion module............................................................60 viii Reference Guide Replacing the Hard Drive.....................................................................................62 To replace the hard drive ................................................................................62 To replace the hard drive holder.....................................................................63 To prepare a new hard drive ...........................................................................64 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.........................................................................65 Troubleshooting Your Notebook..........................................................................66 Audio problems ..............................................................................................66 CD-ROM and DVD problems........................................................................67 Display problems ............................................................................................68 Hard drive problems .......................................................................................69 Heat problems.................................................................................................70 Infrared problems............................................................................................70 Keyboard and pointing device problems ........................................................71 Local area network (LAN) problems..............................................................72 Memory problems...........................................................................................73 Modem problems ............................................................................................73 PC Card problems...........................................................................................76 Performance problems ....................................................................................76 Power and battery problems ...........................................................................77 Printing problems............................................................................................79 Serial, parallel, and USB problems ................................................................80 Startup problems.............................................................................................81 Wireless problems ..........................................................................................82 Configuring Your Notebook ................................................................................84 To run the BIOS Setup utility.........................................................................84 To change video memory settings using BIOS Setup utility .........................87 Reinstalling and Updating Software.....................................................................88 To replace a damaged QuickRestore System Recovery CD............................88 Reference Information.............................................................................................89 Modem Reference Information ............................................................................90 Modem Reference (Conexant)........................................................................90 Safety Information................................................................................................97 Power cords ....................................................................................................97 Battery safety ..................................................................................................98 Laser safety.....................................................................................................98 LED safety ......................................................................................................99 Mercury safety ................................................................................................99 Exposure to radio frequency radiation..........................................................100 Reference Guide ix Regulatory Information ......................................................................................101 U.S.A. ..........................................................................................................101 Canada ..........................................................................................................103 European Union ............................................................................................104 Japan .............................................................................................................106 New Zealand.................................................................................................107 Russia............................................................................................................108 International..................................................................................................108 Index ........................................................................................................................111 x Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Reference Guide 1 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Components included with the notebook vary by geographical region and features selected. The following illustrations identify the standard external components included with most notebook models. Find the illustrations that match your notebook to identify your components. Front panel and right panel components Hard drive Infrared port (select models only) 7 8 9 Wireless on-off button and indicator light
(select models only) 10 Battery 11 CD-ROM, DVD, or other drive 12 PS/2 port 1 Notebook open/close latch 2 One-Touch buttons 3 Keyboard status lights 4 Power button: turns the notebook on and off 5 TouchPad, scroll pad, Click buttons, and an on-off button 6 Main status lights (left to right): power mode, hard drive activity, and battery 2 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notebook open/close latch One-Touch buttons Keyboard status lights Power button: turns the notebook on and off TouchPad, scroll pad, Click buttons, plus on-off button Main status lights (left to right): power mode, hard drive activity, and battery Infrared port (select models only) 8 Wireless on-off button and indicator light
(select models only) Battery 9 10 Audio mute button, audio mute light, and volume control 11 Audio jacks (left to right): audio out
(headphones), external microphone 12 CD-ROM, DVD, or other drive 13 Universal serial bus port (USB) Reference Guide 3 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Left panel and back panel components 8 Cable lock slot (security connector) 9 RJ-11 jack: connects the modem cable 10 PC Card and CardBus slot and button 11 12 Audio jacks (left to right): external microphone, IEEE 1394 port (select models only) audio out (headphones) 13 Volume control 14 Audio mute button and audio mute light 15 Diskette drive (select models only) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AC adapter jack Universal serial bus ports (USB) RJ-45 jack: connects a network cable S-Video out jack Parallel port (LPT1): use this port for a parallel printer or other parallel device Serial port (COM1): use this port for a serial mouse, modem, printer, or other serial device External monitor port 4 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook 1 2 3 4 5 AC adapter jack Two USB ports RJ-45 network jack: connects a network cable PS/2 port Parallel port (LPT1): use this port for a parallel printer or other parallel device External monitor port S-Video out jack Cable lock slot (security connector) RJ-11 jack: connects a modem cable IEEE 1394 port (select models only) 6 7 8 9 10 11 PC Card and CardBus slot and buttons 12 Diskette drive (select models only) Reference Guide 5 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Bottom panel components 1 2 3 Hard drive Battery latch RAM (memory) cover 4 5 6 Reset button Docking port (select models only) Mini PCI cover (no user parts inside) 6 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook 1 2 3 Hard drive Battery latch Mini PCI cover (no user parts inside) 4 5 6 RAM (memory) cover Docking port (select models only) Reset button Reference Guide 7 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Status lights The notebook includes a number of status lights that report power and battery status, drive activity, and keyboard functions such as Caps Lock and Num Lock. The following diagram shows the main status lights on the front of the notebook. 1 Power mode Onnotebook is on (even if the display is off) Blinkingnotebook is in Standby Offnotebook is off or in Hibernation 2 Hard drive activity Onnotebook is accessing the hard drive 3 Battery status GreenAC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged AmberAC adapter is connected and the battery is charging BlinkingAC adapter is connected and the battery is missing or has a fault OffAC adapter is not connected 8 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook The keyboard status lights, located above the keyboard, indicate the states of the keyboard locks. 1 Caps Lock On. Caps Lock is active. 2 Num Lock On. Num Lock is active. (The Keypad Lock must also be on to use the embedded keypad.) 3 Keypad Lock On. The embedded keypad is active (Fn+F8). Num Lock must also be for the numeric keys. Otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). Reference Guide 9 Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook WARNING Improper use of keyboards and other input devices has been associated with ergonomic injury. If you are using your notebook as your primary computer, or using it for extended periods, you should use it with a full-sized keyboard, monitor, and mouse. Docking accessories offer quick, easy connections to these devices. This can reduce the risk of ergonomic injury. For information about reducing your risk, see the Safety & Comfort Guide on this CD included with your notebook. When you set up your notebook for the first time, you will charge the battery, connect the AC adapter, turn on the notebook, and run the Windows setup program. Step 1: Insert the battery WARNING Do not mutilate or puncture batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in fire, or they can burst or explode, releasing hazardous chemicals. Rechargeable batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly. Your notebook is shipped with the battery installed. If the battery has been removed, you should install it:
1. Turn the notebook upside down. 2. Insert the connector end of the battery into the battery compartment, then slide the battery in until it latches. 10 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Step 2: Connect AC power CAUTION Use only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Using the wrong AC adapter could damage the notebook or adapter or cause data loss and may void your warranty. 1. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. 2. Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 3. Plug the power cord into a wall outlet. The notebook battery starts charging. Important When unplugging the power cord, unplug it from the wall outlet before unplugging it from the AC adapter. While the battery is charging, you can continue with the Step 3: Connect a phone line section. Reference Guide 11 Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Step 3: Connect a phone line 1. Make sure the telephone line is an analog line, sometimes called a data line.
(Do not use a digital line.) 2. Connect the telephone cord (RJ-11) into a telephone jack. 3. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the RJ-11 modem jack on the notebook. For details about using the modem, see Using the Modem later in this guide. 12 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Step 4: Turn on the notebook Press the power button above the left side of the keyboard. The notebook boots up and Windows starts automatically. Hint If your notebook does not turn on when operating on battery power, the battery may be out of power. Plug in the AC adapter, then press the power button again. Leave the AC adapter plugged in for several hours to fully charge the battery. Charge times will vary. Step 5: Set up Windows Your notebook has the Microsoft Windows operating system preinstalled on its hard drive. The first time you turn on your notebook, the Windows Setup program runs automatically so you can customize your setup. 1. Follow the Setup program instructions on the screen. If the program prompts you to enter the Product ID code, locate the code on the bottom of the notebook. 2. Check the modem country or region settings. Select Start > Control Panel >
Printers and Other Hardware > Phone and Modem Options, then choose your country or region. Reference Guide 13 Basic Operation Reference Guide 15 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook Operating Your Notebook You can start and stop your notebook using its power button. However, at certain times you may want to use other methods to start or stop the notebookdepending on power considerations, types of active connections, and startup time. Power mode ONPower status light will turn on. OFFPower status light will turn off. StandbyPower status light will blink. Default power settings To enter this mode Briefly press the power button. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Stand By. or Allow the system to time out. Hibernation Power status light will turn off. If the unit is already on, briefly press the power button. or Press Fn+F12. or Allow the system to time out. Function Powers on the notebook. Powers off the notebook. Saves significant power. Turns off the display and other components. Maintains current session in RAM. Restarts quickly. Restores network connections. Saves maximum power. Saves current session to disk, then shuts down. Restores network connections. You can also customize the way these power modes work. See the Batteries and Power Management chapter in this guide. 16 Reference Guide Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To reset the notebook Occasionally, you may find that Windows or the notebook has stopped responding and will not let you turn the notebook off. If this happens, try the following procedures in this order:
If possible, shut down Windows. Press CTRL+ALT+DEL, then select Shut Down, Restart. or Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds until the display shuts down. Any unsaved data will be lost. Then press the power button again to restart. or Insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook, then press the power button to restart. To reset the notebook while it is docked in a port replicator, you can press the reset button on the left side of the port replicator. To change the boot device The notebook normally boots from its internal hard drive. You can also boot the notebook from a diskette drive, a CD-ROM drive, or an internal network interface card. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press ESC to display the Boot menu. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the boot device, then press ENTER. If you want to boot from a specific device whenever it is present, change the boot order using the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance chapter in this guide. Reference Guide 17 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the TouchPad The TouchPad includes an on-off button so you can turn off the TouchPad to avoid moving the pointer accidentally, such as by touching the pad while typing. The indicator light turns off when you turn off the TouchPad. 1 Click buttons. The Click buttons work like the left and right buttons on a standard mouse. 2 TouchPad (touch-sensitive pointing device). 3 TouchPad on-off button and indicator light. 4 Scroll pad. The scroll pad scrolls vertically to display the contents of the active window. 18 Reference Guide Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the function hot keys The combination of the Fn key plus another key creates a hot keya shortcut key sequencefor various system controls. To use a hot key, press and hold Fn, press the appropriate second key, then release both keys. This hot key Fn+F1 Fn+F2 Fn+F8 Fn+F12 Fn+NumLock Fn+Page Up Fn+Page Down Fn+Backspace Does this Decreases the display brightness. Increases the display brightness. Toggles the built-in keypad on and off. Does not affect an external keyboard. If Num Lock is on, then the numeric functions are active. Otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). Enters Hibernation. Toggles Scroll Lock on and off. Increases the audio volume and cancels the mute setting. Decreases the audio volume. Mutes/unmutes the audio output. Reference Guide 19 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the One-Touch buttons Your notebook includes five One-Touch buttons that can start any application or open a document or Web site with a single press. Press a One-Touch button to open the corresponding application, document, or Web site. To program a One-Touch button 1. Select Start > All Programs > Utilities > One Touch. 2. On the One-Touch tab, select the button you want to reprogram. 3. Type a label for the button, then select the application, document, folder, or Web site you want the button to open. 4. If you want a label to appear onscreen when you press a One-Touch button, select that option on the Onscreen Display tab. 20 Reference Guide Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the Windows and Applications keys The Windows key brings up the Windows Start menu. This is the same as selecting the Start button on the taskbar. The Applications key brings up the shortcut menu for the selected item. This is the same menu that appears when you right-click while pointing at the selected item. This key combination Windows key+E Windows key+F1 Windows key+F Windows key+M Shift+Windows key+M Windows key+R Does this Runs Windows Explorer Runs Windows Help Runs Windows Find: Search Minimizes all displayed windows Returns all minimized windows to original size Runs the Windows Run dialog box To use the ALT GR key Non-U.S. keyboards have an ALT GR key to the right of the spacebar. This is a shift key that provides access to certain special keyboard characters. For a character in the lower-left corner of a key, press and hold ALT GR to type the character. 1 Shifted 2 Unshifted 3 ALT GR Reference Guide 21 Basic Operation Using CDs or DVDs Using CDs or DVDs To insert or remove a CD or DVD CAUTION Do not remove a CD or DVD while the notebook is reading it. Otherwise, the notebook could stop responding and you could lose data. Press the CD or DVD gently, but firmly, onto the spindle to avoid damage to the disk or drive. 1. Press the button on the face of the CD or DVD drive. If you are using this drive for the first time, be sure to remove the cardboard packing insert if present. 2. Place the CD or DVD into the drive (label facing up), then gently press down to seat it on the spindle. or Remove the CD or DVD. 3. Slide the tray back into the module to close it. If your notebook loses power, you can manually open the drive to remove a CD. Insert a straightened paper clip into the recessed hole on the front of the drive to open it. The location of the CD or DVD drive varies by model. 22 Reference Guide Hint Important Basic Operation Using CDs or DVDs To play DVD movies If your notebook is equipped with a DVD or other DVD readable drive, it also includes a DVD player software that lets you play DVD movies. Select Start > All Programs > Multimedia > DVD Player > InterVideo WinDVD. For best performance while playing movies on battery power, set the Control Panel power scheme to Portable/Laptop. DVDs can have regional codes embedded in the disc data. These codes prevent DVD movies from being played outside the region of the world in which they are sold. If you get a region code error, you are trying to play a DVD intended for a different region. Most DVD drives let you change the region code only a limited number of times
(usually no more than four). When you reach this limit, your last change to the region code will be hard-coded on the DVD drive, and will be permanent. Your warranty does not cover the expense of correcting this situation. Refer to the Help for your DVD player software for details about setting region codes. To create or copy CDs If your notebook is equipped with a DVD/CD-RW combo drive, it also includes software such as Roxio Easy CD Creator that lets you copy or create CDs. Follow the instructions that are included with the software. Read and write quality may vary by media. Reference Guide 23 Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook Securing Your Notebook To set up password protection You can protect your notebook from access by another user when you set up password protection, which is available through Windows and through the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance chapter. For complete protection, set passwords in Windows as well as through BIOS Setup. To cancel password protection, set an empty password. Windows 1. Select Start > Control Panel > User Accounts, then select your account. 2. Select Create a Password, then set the password. 3. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 4. On the Advanced tab, select the option to prompt for a password when the notebook leaves Standby. To lock your notebook To protect against unauthorized access while your notebook is running, lock the notebook before leaving it unattended, or set up a screen saver with a Windows password. You can lock the notebook these ways:
If a One-Touch button is assigned to Quick Lock, press that button. or Press CTRL+ALT+DEL, then select Lock Computer. To unlock the notebook, follow your normal logon steps. 24 Reference Guide Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook To attach a security cable Your notebook includes a built-in connector to secure the notebook with a cable and a lock (such as the Kensington MicroSaver lock system, available at many computer stores). 1 Wrap the cable around a secure object, such as a table leg. 2 3 Insert the cable into the security cable slot on the notebook. Lock it with the cable lock key, then store the key in a safe place away from the notebook. To protect against viruses Virus-protection software can help protect the integrity of your data. This is especially important if you use the Web. Your notebook comes equipped with the Norton AntiVirus software. You can get detailed instructions from the Norton online Help. Because new viruses appear frequently, you will also want to update the program virus definitions periodically. Norton AntiVirus updates are on the Web at www.symantec.com. Reference Guide 25 Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook To lock the hard drive The notebook enables you to lock its internal hard drive to help keep your information secure. Hard drive lock does not protect a second hard drive installed in the module bay. CAUTION When you enable hard drive lock, the current BIOS user password (or administrator password if that is the only password set) is encoded on the hard drive. If you move the hard drive to another computer, you cant access the drive until you set the user (or administrator) password to match the drive password. After you match the drive password, you can change the computer (and drive) password. If you forget the password, you cannot recover your data. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press F2 to enter the BIOS Setup utility. 3. From the Security menu, enable Password Required to Boot. 4. From the Security menu, enable Internal hard drive lock. 5. Press F10 to save and exit BIOS Setup. 26 Reference Guide Taking Care of Your Notebook Basic Operation Taking Care of Your Notebook Use the following recommendations to maintain your notebook during everyday use and prevent potential physical damage or data loss. To protect your hard drive Hard drives, as well as other internal components, are not indestructible and can be damaged by inappropriate handling and operation. Avoid bumps or jolts. Do not operate the notebook while traveling over bumpy terrain. Put the notebook in standby or shut it down before transporting it. This turns off the hard drive. A drop of a few inches onto a rigid surface while the hard drive is operating could destroy data or damage the drive. Carry the notebook in a padded case to protect against bumps and jolts. Set down the notebook gently. To maintain your notebook Provide adequate ventilation around the notebook. Always set the notebook on a flat surface, so that air can flow freely around and underneath it. Always shut down the notebook or put it in Hibernation before putting it in a carrying case or other enclosed space. Do not pick up or carry the notebook by its display. Do not use the notebook outside in the rain or snow (inclement weather). If the notebook is cold, warm it gradually to avoid condensation. Maintain your battery for best performance. See the Batteries and Power Management chapter. Reference Guide 27 Basic Operation Taking Care of Your Notebook To safeguard your data Do not use a pointing device or activate any other device that interrupts operation while the system is starting or stopping. Back up your work regularly. Copy files to diskettes, CDs, DVDs, and other media or network drives. Use a virus-scanning program (such as the Norton AntiVirus program included with your notebook) to check the integrity of your files and operating system. Check your disk using the Tools tab in the disk Properties window. To extend the life of the display Set the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level (Fn+F1). When working at your desk, connect an external monitor and turn off the internal display (press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of the keyboard). If you are not using an external monitor, set the Turn off monitor timeouts (for both AC and battery operation) to the shortest comfortable interval. Avoid using a screen saver or other software that prevents the notebook from changing to Display-off or Standby after a timeout period. If you use a screen saver, enable the option to shut off the display after a time delay. Do not disable Display-off or Standby timeouts. If you are using AC power and have no external monitor attached, put the notebook in Standby when not in use. To clean your notebook You can clean the notebook with a soft cloth dampened with clean water or with water containing a mild detergent. Do not use an excessively wet cloth, and take care to keep water out of the case. Do not use abrasive cleaners, especially on the display. Do not apply any cleaner directly to the display. Instead, apply the cleaner to a soft cloth, then gently wipe the display. 28 Reference Guide Batteries and Power Management Reference Guide 29 Batteries and Power Management Managing Power Consumption Managing Power Consumption When you are running your notebook on battery power, you can maximize operating time without compromising performance. Your notebook is designed to help you reduce power consumption and extend battery life. During idle periods, the notebook automatically enters power-saving modes after specified timeout periods. You can adjust these timeouts to suit your working habits. How the notebook manages power automatically Your notebook enters Hibernation and Standby automatically, and turns off the hard drive and display based on values set in Windows. When this occurs No keyboard, pointing device, or other input activity occurs for the specified interval The hard drive is not accessed for a specified interval No pointing devices are used, no disk drive is accessed, and no port (serial, parallel, or infrared) is active for the specified interval The notebook stays in Standby for the specified interval The result is Display turns off. Turns off the display to conserve battery power and extend the life of the display. Hard drive turns off. This is usually set to occur shortly after the display is turned off. Standby is initiated. Maintains your current session in RAM, and turns off the display and other components to conserve battery power. Hibernation is initiated. Saves your current session to the hard drive, and turns off the notebook. To resume Briefly press any key or move a pointing device to turn on the display. Begin using the notebook, and the hard drive turns on. Briefly press the power button to return to your current session. Press the power button to return to your previous session. CAUTION Make a habit of saving your work before allowing your notebook to enter Standby. If power is interrupted while the notebook is in Standby, any information that was not saved will be lost. 30 Reference Guide Batteries and Power Management Managing Power Consumption The notebook can also enter Hibernation if battery power reaches a critically low level. If this happens, you will find on resuming that all your data has been saved, but some functions may be disabled. To resume normal operation, restore power by connecting an AC adapter or installing a charged battery, then shut the notebook off and restart it. Changing timeout settings and creating power schemes You can adjust the length of timeouts after which your notebook automatically shuts down components or enters a power-saving mode. You can also save these settings as a power scheme. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Select the Power Schemes tab, then enter the settings you want. If you do not want a particular timeout to occur, set the value to Never. See Windows Help for details. If you want to save the settings as a power scheme, select Save As and enter a name for the scheme. CAUTION Do not disable Hibernate support in the Power Options settings, or you will lose any unsaved data if the notebook battery runs down completely. Reference Guide 31 Batteries and Power Management Using Battery Power Using Battery Power To check battery status From the battery status light Check your notebook battery status light. From the Windows taskbar The Windows taskbar can display a power icon that provides detailed battery status information (see Windows Help for details). The icon resembles a battery when AC power is not connected. Place the pointer over the power icon to display the remaining battery charge. This value is shown as either a percentage of charge remaining, or as time remaining. Select the power icon to open the Battery Meter window. From the Windows Control Panel Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options, then select the Power Meter tab to see the battery status. The Alarms and Advanced tabs provide additional Windows power-information options. On the battery 1. Remove the battery from the notebook. See the Getting Started with Your Notebook chapter in this guide. 2. Press the contact pad on the side of the battery. The number of lights that turn on indicates the remaining charge (each light represents 20 percent of a full charge). 32 Reference Guide Batteries and Power Management Using Battery Power To respond to a low-battery warning The notebook automatically alerts you when the battery power drops to a critically low level. The notebook first emits a high-pitched beep or displays a warning message. Then, if you do not restore power within a short time, the notebook enters Hibernation. After the notebook enters Hibernation in this way, you will not be able to turn it on again until you restore power by doing one of the following procedures:
Replace the battery with a charged one. Plug in the AC adapter. Note If you plug in the AC adapter, you can continue to work while your battery recharges. To recharge the battery CAUTION The AC adapter is normally warm whenever plugged into an AC outlet. The notebook is normally warm while recharging. Do not recharge the notebook in a briefcase or other confined space, or the battery could overheat. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. To get the longest operating time, wait until the battery charge is below 50 percent before recharging, then charge it fully (100 percent). Charging can take up to several hours. If you continue working while the battery charges, the charging time may increase. The operating time for a fully charged battery depends on the notebook model, power management settings, and level of use. Reference Guide 33 Batteries and Power Management Using Battery Power To get the most from your batteries Follow these suggestions to make your battery power last as long as possible:
Plug in the AC adapter, especially when using a CD-ROM or DVD drive, or any external connections such as a PC Card or a modem. Set the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level (Fn+F1). Put the notebook in Standby whenever you are not using it for a short while. Put the notebook in Hibernation whenever you want to save your current session, but will not be using the notebook for a day or more. Set the automatic timeout settings to emphasize saving power. If your notebook has a multispeed processor, use the lower speed on battery power (the default settings conserve battery power). If your notebook has a wireless on-off button, turn off the wireless function when you are not using it. Press the wireless on-off button so that the light turns off. If you have a PC Card such as a network card, remove it when you are not using it. Some PC Cards use significant power even while they are inactive. If you work with an application that uses the serial port or a PC Card, exit the application when you finish using it. Do not leave batteries unused for long periods. If you have more than one, rotate them. If you normally use AC power, make a practice of using the battery as your power source at least once a week. Unplug the AC adapter when the notebook is not in use. To preserve the life of a battery, be sure to charge it regularly. For long-term storage, the battery must be charged 20 percent to 50 percent to minimize capacity loss by self-discharge and to avoid deterioration of battery performance. Avoid using or charging batteries at high temperatures. 34 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Reference Guide 35 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem Using the Modem Internet Explorer, for browsing the World Wide Web You can connect your modem to a telephone line and communicate with other computers throughout the world. You can explore the Internet, send and receive e-mail messages, and use your notebook to send and receive faxes. Your notebook contains several software programs that work with your modem:
Outlook Express, for sending and receiving e-mail messages Windows Fax Console software for sending and receiving faxes For best performance, you can connect to any Internet Service Provider (ISP) or modem network that has V.90 or V.92 interoperable modems. Check with your ISP for a list of telephone numbers that support V.90 or V.92. (V.92 enables modem on-hold technology that allows an Internet session to be interrupted to answer a phone call, then resumes the Internet session once the call is complete.) The maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 Kbps, even though the modem is capable of downloading at higher speeds. 36 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem To connect the modem CAUTION Your built-in modem may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX), cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and does not work with party lines. Some of these connections may result in excess electrical voltage and could cause a malfunction in the internal modem. Check your telephone line type prior to connecting your phone line. Special restrictions in certain countries Many countries impose a blackout period after a modem repeatedly fails to connect to a service provider. The number of failed attempts and the period you must wait before trying again differ from country to country. Check with your telephone company. For example, if you are dialing from Italy and fail to connect to your server or cancel the connection, you must wait one minute before dialing that number again. If you dial before then, you will get an error message that says delay. After the fourth failed connection, you must wait one hour before trying the number again. If you dial before the hour is up, you will get a message that says black list. When using a modem, an external surge protector can prevent damage to your notebook from lightning or other electrical surges. Connect any approved surge protector to the modem cable when you are using the modem. Reference Guide 37 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem To change your modem settings The modem is already set up to be compatible with telephone systems and modems in most areas. However, in some situations, you may have to change modem settings to match local conditions. If you have questions about local requirements, contact your telephone company. Control Panel. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel to change many modem settings. On the Modems tab, select Properties to set connection speeds, or on the Dialing Rules tab select Edit to set dialing options. Communications software. Many communications applications provide options for controlling modem settings. See the Help for your software. AT commands. You can control many aspects of modem operation using modem AT commands. AT commands are special strings of characters sent to the modem to set up specific conditions. Those command strings normally start with AT. For a list of AT commands for the built-in modem, see the Reference Information chapter. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel. On the Modems tab, select Properties. You can type AT commands on the Advanced tab in the space for extra settings. 38 Reference Guide Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN) Modem and Network Connections Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN) LANs give you access to network resources, such as printers and file servers on your corporate network, and possibly to the Internet. To connect to a LAN:
1. Check that the existing LAN supports Ethernet 10Base-T (10 Mbps) or 100Base-TX (100 Mbps) connections. 2. Plug the LAN cable (not supplied) into the built-in LAN port. The cable must have an RJ-45 connector. 3. Windows automatically detects and sets up a LAN connection. To edit settings, open Network and Dial-up Connections in Control Panel. See Windows Help for information about setting up and using LAN connections. Select Start > Help and Support. Contact your network administrator for network information. Two lights next to the LAN port indicate the status of the connection:
The yellow light indicates network activity. The green light indicates a 100 Mbps link. Reference Guide 39 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) If your notebook includes a wireless on-off button, you can connect by radio to an 802.11 wireless local area network (LAN) and access computers and other resources on the network. A wireless network provides all the functions of a typical wired network, but also provides for roaming. Since your notebook connects to the network by radio rather than through cables, you can move from place to place within the networkfrom your office to a conference room, for exampleand remain on the network the entire time. To prepare for connections Before you can connect your notebook to a particular 802.11 wireless network, you have to configure the notebook for the specific wireless connection. Connecting to an existing wireless network You can connect to an access point that gives you access to a local area network, or you can connect directly to other computers in an ad hoc network. 1. Right-click the wireless network connection icon in the taskbar, then select View Available Wireless Networks from the pop-up menu. 40 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) 2. A list of available networks appears. Select the network you want, enter the encryption key if required, then select Connect. If the network you want is not on the list, select Advanced > Configure, and enter the required network parameters. If the network is not using 802.1x authentication protocol, clear the automatic key option. 3. On the General tab, edit network settings as needed for your local network. See your network administrator. You can also display an icon in the taskbar when connected to a network. 4. On the Wireless Networks tab, view the wireless networks available within range. Each network SSID is listed. Select the network you want, then select Configure. 5. If the wireless network uses standard encrypted communication, uncheck the automatic key option, then select the following parameters:
Key: ASCII passphrase or hexadecimal key string. Key format: ASCII for passphrase, hexadecimal for key string. Key length: smaller number for 64-bit encryption, larger number for 128-bit. See your network administrator for the required settings. 6. Select OK to save the configuration. This network is added to your list of preferred networks. The notebook automatically connects to the first preferred network within range if wireless communication is turned on. Creating a New Computer-to-Computer Network (Ad Hoc) You can set up a new network available to other local computers. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections. 2. Select the wireless connection to show its status, then select Properties. 3. On the Wireless Networks tab, select Add to create a new network. 4. Type a name for the new network. Reference Guide 41 Important Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) 5. If you want to use encrypted communication, uncheck the automatic key option, then select the following parameters:
Key: ASCII passphrase or hexadecimal key string Key format: ASCII for passphrase, hexadecimal for key string Key length: smaller number for 64-bit encryption, larger number for 128-bit 6. Mark the option to make this a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network. 7. Select OK to save the configuration. This network is added to your list of preferred networks and becomes available to other computers. To turn wireless communication on and off Wireless networks and cellular modems are examples of devices that use wireless communication. Such devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as when traveling in an airplane. If in doubt, be sure to ask for authorization before turning on your notebook wireless networking. In Italy, Singapore, and possibly other countries, you may be required to purchase a license before using the wireless function. Turning on communication and making a connection If your notebook has both wireless 802.11 and Bluetooth capabilities, the wireless indicator light on the front of the notebook turns on when Bluetooth or 802.11 communication is turned on, but it does not show whether Bluetooth, 802.11, or both functions are active. You must use the Wireless Configuration software to control the individual wireless functions. 1. If the notebook is not on, turn it on. 2. If you normally press the wireless on-off button on the front of the notebook to turn wireless 802.11 communication on and off, press the button so the indicator light turns on. This restores your previous wireless configuration. or Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections, then select the wireless network connection icon. If you are within range of your wireless network, your notebook automatically connects. To check the status of your wireless connection, open Network Connections in Control Panel, then select the connection. 42 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) Turning off communication and ending a connection 1. Important: close any files that reside on other network computers. 2. To turn off the wireless 802.11 communication without turning off the notebook, press the wireless on-off button. This also turns off Bluetooth communication if it was enabled. or Right-click the wireless network connection icon in the taskbar, then select Disable. Putting the notebook in Standby or shutting it down also turns off the wireless function. Reference Guide 43 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections
(select models only) If your notebook includes Bluetooth wireless capabilities, you can use it to make short-range radio connections to a wireless personal area network (PAN) and access other Bluetooth-compatible devices, such as other computers, cell phones, and printers. Since the Bluetooth function connects your notebook by radio rather than through cables, you can move around and remain connected, and you can detect new Bluetooth devices automatically when they enter your area. To turn Bluetooth communication on and off Important Wireless communication may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as when traveling in an airplane. If in doubt, be sure to ask for authorization before turning on your notebook wireless networking. In Italy, Singapore, and possibly other countries, you may be required to purchase a license from the responsible authority before using the wireless function. Turning on Bluetooth communication The wireless indicator light on the front of the notebook turns on when Bluetooth or 802.11 communication is turned on, but it doesnt show whether Bluetooth, 802.11, or both functions are active. You must use the Wireless Configuration software to control the individual wireless functions. If your notebook isnt on, turn it on. 1. 2. If you normally press the wireless on-off button on the front of the notebook to turn Bluetooth communication on and off, press the button so the indicator light turns on. This restores your previous wireless configuration. or If the Wireless Configuration icon is present in the taskbar, select the icon, then select the Bluetooth button to turn on Bluetooth communication. 44 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) Turning off Bluetooth communication Turning off communication ends any connection you have open. 1. Important: close any files that reside on other network computers. 2. To turn off Bluetooth communication without turning off your notebook, press the wireless on-off button. This also turns off 802.11 communication if it was enabled. or If the Wireless Configuration icon is present in the taskbar, select the icon, then select the Bluetooth button to turn off Bluetooth communication, without affecting 802.11 communication. Turning off the notebook or putting it into Hibernation also turns off the Bluetooth function. To prepare for Bluetooth connections Before you use your notebook to access other Bluetooth devices, you should configure some basic settings. 1. Make sure Bluetooth communication is turned on. 2. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. 3. In the menu bar, select Bluetooth > Device Configuration. (This menu is available only while Bluetooth folders are selected.) 4. On the General tab, check the following settings:
Give your notebook a unique name that will identify it to other Bluetooth users. Set the computer type to Laptop. Select the security mode you want to use. 5. On the Information Exchange tab, check the following settings:
Check the directory you want to make available to other Bluetooth users for sharing files, both sent and received. Check the directory where you want to store your business card file so you can easily send it to other Bluetooth users. Check the inbox directory where you want delivered files from other Bluetooth users to be stored automatically. Detailed information about these and other advanced settings are included in the online help. Reference Guide 45 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) To create your business card, you can open Microsoft Outlook, then open the address book and create a new contact. After entering your personal information, select File, Export To vCard File and store the file in your business card directory. To send or receive files using Bluetooth If your notebook includes Bluetooth wireless capabilities, it supports the following common protocols for transferring data. To use either protocol, both computers must support that protocol. Check the other computers Bluetooth documentation. FTP: files can be copied into and out of shared directories (folders) by both computers. This service is equivalent to common network file sharing. OPP (object push profile): both computers can send certain types of Microsoft Outlook data to the other computers Bluetooth inbox, but cannot retrieve files from the other computer. Sharing files with another Bluetooth device (FTP) 1. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. 2. In My Bluetooth Places, select and open the other device to view files in its shared directory. 3. Use Windows Explorer or other software to copy or move files between your notebook and the other device. Sending Outlook data to another Bluetooth device (OPP) 1. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. 2. In My Bluetooth Places, select and open the other device. 3. To send a calendar item, note, or message, select the device inbox, select the option you want, then select the file to send. The file arrives in the device inbox directory. or To send your business card, select the device inbox, then select the option to send your business card. 46 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Reference Guide 47 Add-On Devices Connecting PC Cards Connecting PC Cards The notebook PC Card slot is available for storing data and expanding the communication capabilities of the notebook. The notebook supports standard Type II and III PC Cards (PCMCIA and CardBus). To insert or remove a PC Card Note The location and number of the PC Card slots vary by model series. Inserting a PC Card 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with its connectors facing the card slot. 2. Slide the PC Card all the way into the bottom of the slot. Most cards are properly seated when the outer edge is flush with the casing of the notebook, but some cards are designed to protrude from the case. 48 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting PC Cards Removing a PC Card CAUTION Before removing a PC Card, you must use the Eject Hardware or Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar, or shut down the notebook. Otherwise, you could lose data. 1. Before removing the card, select the Eject Hardware or Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar, then select the card you want to remove. This protects your data and helps avoid unexpected problems. If needed, you can restart the card by removing and then reinserting it. 2. Press the eject button to pop the button out, then press it in to eject the PC Card. Reference Guide 49 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices Connecting External Devices To connect an audio device You can plug in an external microphone, external speakers, or headphones. In addition, if you connect your notebook to the port replicator, you can plug in a stereo source (such as a CD player) or a device that accepts digital audio (such as a digital audio recorder). CAUTION The headphone and line-in jacks are three-terminal stereo jacks. They are not compatible with two-terminal mono plugs. Connecting a mono plug into either of these jacks may damage the notebook. Attach the audio cable to the corresponding audio port on the notebook or port replicator. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations to locate the audio connectors on your notebook. 1 2 External microphone connector (pink) Audio out (headphones) connector (green) 50 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices 1 2 Audio out (headphones) connector (green) External microphone connector (pink) Note When you plug a device into the headphone port, the built-in speakers automatically turn off. When you plug a device into either audio port on the notebook, any device connected to the corresponding port on the port replicator is ignored. Reference Guide 51 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To use an external monitor Connecting an external monitor 1. Plug a standard 4-pin S-Video cable to the S-Video out jack on your notebook
(yellow connector on the back panel) to the S-Video in jack on your television. Restart your notebook. Note Although your notebook has a 7-pin S-Video out jack, the notebook accepts either a 7-pin or 4-pin cable connection. 2. Using your mouse, right-click in an empty area of the desktop. 3. Select Properties, select the Settings tab, then select the Advanced button.
-or-
Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. Then, select the Settings tab, select the Advanced button, and select the Displays tab. 4. To enable the TV, select the red button next to TV. Note If the S-Video cable is not plugged into your notebook and TV, the red button will not be displayed. 5. Select Apply to accept the changes. 6. If you are prompted to restart Windows, select Yes. Switching the display to the external monitor Press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of your keyboard to switch the display to the external monitor. With the default display settings, the external monitor uses the same settings as the internal display. The external monitor displays the same image as the internal display, regardless of the screen area, colors, and other settings, and the refresh rate is the same as the internal display (60 Hz). If you use only the external monitor, you can select different settings that arent limited by the internal display. 52 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices Adjusting monitor resolution and other settings 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. 2. On the Settings tab, adjust the Screen area. Other settings are also available. If you need to increase the refresh rate on the external monitor, you can switch to only the external monitor. An alternative is to make one display a secondary display so you can select independent refresh rates:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. 2. On the Settings tab, select the Advanced button, then the Displays or Monitor tab. Set the refresh rate on the Monitor tab. Using dual display mode You can extend your desktop by connecting an external monitor to your notebook. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. 2. Select the Settings tab. 3. Select the second display, then select the option to extend the desktop. You can set different resolutions and numbers of colors for each display. However, using the Extended Desktop requires video memory for each display. For this reason, higher resolutions and higher numbers of colors may cause unexpected behavior on the displays. Try starting with 1024 768 resolution on the external display and 64 K colors (16-bit) on both displays. You can then try higher settings to see whether they work for your applications. In addition, certain operations such as playing DVDs and running 3D graphics require extra video memory, so you may have to adjust display settings. If youre playing a DVD movie, the movie will show only on the primary display. To change the primary display, go to the Settings tab of Display Properties (see the steps above), right-click the display you want, and select Primary. To connect an IEEE 1394 device (select models only) If your notebook has an IEEE 1394 port, you can use it to connect devices such as audio and video equipment, disk drives, printers, and other notebooks. Attach the device cable to the IEEE 1394 port. Windows automatically recognizes the device. Reference Guide 53 Note Note Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices The IEEE 1394 port is a 4-wire port. If you want to connect a device that has a 6-wire plug, you can purchase a simple adapter if the device is unpowered, or a hub if the device requires power. If you have problems making this connection, contact the device manufacturer Web site for the latest version of the driver for the device. To connect an infrared device (select models only) Select models include an infrared port. By default, the infrared port is not enabled, so you must first enable it before you can use it. If your model has an infrared port (a small, rectangular lens located on the front of the notebook), then your notebook has wireless, serial communication capability. That is, your notebook and other infrared devices, such as printers or other notebooks, can communicate wirelessly using this port. Using the infrared port Make sure the infrared port of your notebook and the infrared port of the device with which you want to communicate lie in a straight line facing each other. The two ports should be no more than one meter apart with no obstructions in between. Noise from nearby equipment can cause transmission errors. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select the Hardware tab. 3. Select the Device Manager button. 4. Select the ALI fast infrared controller, then the Enable Device button. 5. Select Next > Finish > Close. Then close all open dialog boxes. To check the status of communications, open Wireless Link by selecting Start >
Control Panel > Printers & Other Hardware > Wireless Link. Printing to an infrared printer Install your printer and assign it to the notebook infrared port. You can then print from your applications as you would to any other printer. Transferring files through an infrared connection You can use your notebook infrared port to transfer files by using Wireless Link. See the Windows online Help for instructions on using Wireless Link. 54 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To use a port replicator (select models only) A port replicator provides your notebook with external connections that you can leave in place whenever you remove the notebook from your desk. Instead of disconnecting and reconnecting peripheral devices, you can simply undock and dock the notebook. CAUTION Use only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Do not use a 60-watt, 3.16-amp adapter, and do not use DC adapter accessories F1455A and F2297A. Using the wrong AC adapter could damage the notebook or adapter and cause data loss, and may void your warranty. You can dock or undock the notebook in any power state: on, off, Standby, or Hibernation. Make sure, however, that the notebook is not entering into or resuming from Standby or Hibernation when you dock or undock, or the notebook could lock up. Hint Before docking or undocking your notebook, save your data and close any applications associated with external connections that might be affected. Do this as a precaution against an unlikely docking problem. Reference Guide 55 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To dock to the port replicator 1. Plug in the AC adapter, then connect it to the back of the port replicator. You can also operate the port replicator using power from the notebook battery. 2. Remove the rubber cover from the docking connector on the bottom of the notebook. 3. Align the notebook with the locator posts on the port replicator. 4. Press the notebook down until both sides snap into place. 5. If the notebook is off, open it and press the power button to turn it on. The lights on the port replicator turn on. When the notebook is docked, you can use its security connector to secure it. To secure both the notebook and port replicator, install the cable lock in the security connector next to the undock button. This will also lock the undock button. Note If a device is connected to an audio port on the notebook, any device connected to the corresponding port on the port replicator is ignored. 56 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To undock from the port replicator 1. Press down the undock button on the right side of the port replicator. 2. Lift the notebook out of the port replicator. Reference Guide 57 Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) Installing Additional RAM (Memory) The notebook has two slots that hold two RAM modules. At least one slot contains a RAM module installed at the factory. You can use both slots to expand your RAM. To install a RAM expansion module Use PC2100 DDR-266 MHz or higher RAM only. Youll need a small Phillips screwdriver for these steps. CAUTION The internal components of your notebook are extremely sensitive to static electricity and can be permanently damaged by it. Handle the RAM module only by its edges. Before installing the memory module, discharge your bodys static electricity by touching the metal shielding around the connectors on the back of the notebook. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. 2. Important: unplug the AC adapter, if present, and remove the battery. 3. Turn the unit bottom-side up, loosen the screws holding the RAM cover, and remove the cover. 58 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) 4. Insert the RAM board into the connector at about a 30 degree angle until it is fully inserted. Then press down at both sides until both latches snap closed. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations. 5. Replace the cover. 6. Insert the battery. To remove the RAM module, release the two latches at the sides of the module. Reference Guide 59 Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) To remove a RAM expansion module You may want to remove a RAM module so you can install a larger one. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for these steps. CAUTION The internal components of your notebook are extremely sensitive to static electricity and can be permanently damaged by it. Handle the RAM module only by its edges. Before installing the memory module, discharge your bodys static electricity by touching the metal shielding around the connectors on the back of the notebook. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. 2. Important: unplug the AC adapter, if present, and remove the battery. 3. Turn the unit bottom-side up, loosen the screws holding the RAM cover, and remove the cover. 60 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) 4. Release the two latches at the sides of the RAM board, so the free edge of the board pops up. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations. 5. Pull the board out of the connector. 6. Replace the cover. 7. Insert the battery. Reference Guide 61 Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive Replacing the Hard Drive To replace the hard drive You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this procedure. 1. Unplug the AC adapter, if connected. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Turn the unit bottom side up. 4. Use a pointed tool to remove the plugs from the two screw holes, then remove the two screws. 5. Gently pull the hard drive out of the notebook. 6. Gently slide the new drive into the hard drive compartment. Press firmly to make sure the connector seats properly. 7. Reinstall the hard drive screws and plugs. Important If you are installing a new hard drive, you should create a Utility partition on the drive before loading any software. 62 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive To replace the hard drive holder If you are installing a new hard drive that does not have a holder, you can remove the holder parts from the old hard drive. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this procedure. 1. Remove the four screws from the sides of the holder and drive case, then slide the drive out of the holder. 2. Notice that the hard drive has a pin connector attachment at one end. Carefully remove this connector from the end of the drive. Work alternately at each end so that the connector slides off evenly without bending the connector pins. 3. Carefully put the pin connector attachment back onto the pins on the end of the new hard drive. Work alternately at each end so that the connector slides on evenly without bending the connector pins. 4. Insert the drive into the holder. 5. Reinstall the screws into the holder and drive case. Reference Guide 63 Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive To prepare a new hard drive When you install a new hard drive, you also need to prepare it to be able to work with your notebook. If you want to restore the Windows software and operating system that were originally installed on your notebook, use the QuickRestore System Recovery CD included with your notebook. 64 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Reference Guide 65 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Troubleshooting Your Notebook This chapter contains solutions to many types of problems you might have with your notebook. Try the solutions one at a time, in the order in which they are presented. Here are some other sources of information for troubleshooting:
Use the Windows troubleshooters. Select Start > Help and Support. See the Microsoft Windows manual shipped with the notebook. Select the question mark on the One-Touch key located at the top of the keyboard. Refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet to contact a Customer Care Center for help and support. Audio problems If no sound is audible Select the speaker icon on the taskbar (if present), then clear the Mute All If your model has a volume control, press the + (plus) button to increase volume. checkbox if selected. If your model has an audio mute button, press it so the indicator light goes off. When you are operating your notebook in MS-DOS mode (for example, when running MS-DOS games), you may find that the sound does not operate properly. Use Windows applications for full use of sound capabilities. If sound does not record Plug in an external microphone. The notebook does not have a built-in microphone. Check the software controls for recording sound. Select Start > All Programs >
Accessories > Multimedia (or Entertainment) > Sound Recorder. In Volume Control, select Options > Properties, then make sure the microphone is enabled in the recording controls. 66 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If you hear loud, high-pitched feedback from the speakers In the Volume Control, try reducing the Master volume by selecting the speaker icon in the taskbar. In Volume Control, select Options > Properties, then select the microphone option for the playback settings. Also in Volume Control, make sure the microphone is muted. CD-ROM and DVD problems If you cant boot from a CD or DVD Make sure the CD or DVD is bootable, such as the QuickRestore System Recovery CD included with your notebook. Make sure the CD-ROM/DVD drive is selected as the boot device. See the Basic Operation chapter for directions. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If a DVD plays erratically Dirt or smudges can cause a disc to skip. Clean the disc with a soft cloth. If the disc is badly scratched, it will probably have to be replaced. If you are playing the DVD on battery power, try changing the power scheme. If you get a Region Code error when playing a DVD movie DVDs can have regional codes embedded in the disc data. These codes prevent DVD movies from being played outside the region of the world in which they are sold. If you get a Region Code error, you are trying to play a DVD intended for a different region. If the notebook cannot read a CD or DVD For a single-sided CD or DVD, make sure the disc is placed in the drive with the label facing up. Clean the disc. Wait 5 to 10 seconds after closing the tray to give the notebook time to recognize the disc. Reference Guide 67 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Restart the system. Remove the disc from the drive, then select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If you created the CD on a CD/DVD RW combo drive, try using a different media brand. Read and write quality may vary by media. If a DVD movie doesnt fill the screen Each side of a double-sided DVD has a different format (standard or widescreen). In widescreen format, black bands appear at the top and bottom of the screen. To view the standard format, flip the disc over and play the other side. If a DVD doesnt play with two displays If you are using the Extended Desktop (dual displays), move the player window to the display selected as primary. If youre not using Extended Desktop and both displays are active, press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of the keyboard to switch to one display. If the notebook cant find Wordpad.exe after inserting a CD The system is trying to open a .doc file in WordPad, but cannot find the Wordpad.exe program file. Type C:\Program Files\Accessories in the error message box. Display problems If the notebook is on, but the screen is blank Move the mouse or tap the TouchPad. This will wake the display if it is off. If the notebook is cold, allow it to warm up. If the screen is difficult to read Try setting the display resolution to its default setting of 1024 768 or higher, depending on your model: select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. Try adjusting the size of the desktop icons and labels. 68 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If an external display does not work Check the connections. The external monitor may not be detected. In the BIOS Setup utility, try setting Video Display Device to Both in the System Devices menu. Hard drive problems If the notebook hard drive doesnt spin Make sure the notebook has power. If necessary, connect the AC adapter, then make sure it is fully plugged into a power source and into the back of the notebook. Remove and reinsert the hard drive. If the hard drive makes a buzzing or whining noise Back up the drive immediately. See whether the noise is coming from elsewhere, such as from the fan or a PC Card drive. If files are corrupted Open My Computer, select the disk you want to scan, then select File >
Properties. Select the Check Now box under the Error-checking section of the Tools Tab. Run the virus-scanning program. If necessary, you can format the hard disk and reinstall the original factory software using the QuickRestore System Recovery CD included with your notebook. Reference Guide 69 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Heat problems Your notebook normally gets warm during routine operation. If the notebook gets abnormally hot Always set the notebook on a flat surface, so that air can flow freely around and underneath it. Make sure the air vents on the bottom and sides of the notebook are clear. Keep in mind that games and other programs that drive CPU usage toward 100 percent can increase the notebook temperature. Infrared problems By default, the infrared port is not enabled, so you must enable it before you can use it. If you have problems with infrared communications Make sure the line between the two infrared ports is not blocked, and that the ports face each other as squarely as possible. (The notebook infrared port is located on the front of the notebook.) The ports should be no more than 1 meter apart. Check settings in the Device Manager:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. On the Hardware tab, select Device Manager and expand the infrared devices. Select the infrared port and make sure that the device is enabled. Make sure only one application is using the infrared port. 70 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Keyboard and pointing device problems Use these suggestions for built-in or external devices. If the pointer is difficult to control Adjust the pointer controls. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. If the TouchPad doesnt work Press the TouchPad on-off button to turn on the light. Dont touch the TouchPad while the notebook is rebooting or resuming from Standby mode. If this happens, try the following: press a key on the keyboard to restore normal operation. If an external mouse is connected, the built-in pointing devices are normally disabled. You can change this setting with the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in this chapter. Restart the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If the TouchPad moves the pointer or cursor while you type Press the TouchPad on-off button to turn off the TouchPad while you type. If a PS/2 scroll mouse doesnt work The TouchPad must be disabled for the mouse scroll feature to work. In the BIOS Setup utility, make sure the External Pointing Devices option in the System Devices menu is set to Auto. See Configuring Your Notebook in this chapter. Put the notebook into Standby or shut it down before you attach the scroll mouse, so that it will be detected properly. If you want to use the TouchPad again, you must put the notebook into Standby or shut it down before you detach the scroll mouse. Reference Guide 71 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Local area network (LAN) problems If the built-in network adapter doesnt connect to the LAN Check all cables and connections. Try connecting at a different network station, if available. If the yellow light next to the LAN port does not light, the LAN cable may not be connected to the network or the network may be down. Try connecting a different computer to the cable. Make sure the LAN cable is Category 3, 4, or 5 for 10Base-T operation, or Category 5 for 100Base-TX operation. Maximum cable length is 100 meters
(330 feet). Select Start > Help and Support, then use the Networking troubleshooter. Open the hardware Device Manager. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. If the network interface is disabled, try to enable it. If it has a conflict, try disabling another device. If you cant browse the Network Neighborhood or My Network Places Select Start > Search > Computers or People to look for a computer. If you cant log in to Netware servers If a Netware server is using IPX/SPX protocol, you may need to force your frame type to match the server frame type. Check with your network administrator. If a network connection responds slowly If your network connection uses a proxy server, try enabling the option for bypassing the proxy server for local addresses. You can do this in Control Panel under your network connection properties. 72 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Memory problems If a message says you are out of memory Make sure drive C is not running low on free space. If you are having memory problems while running MS-DOS programs, use the MS-DOS or Application and Software troubleshooter in Windows Help: select Start > Help and Support. The full amount of RAM in your notebook is not available for running applications. A certain amount of RAM is used for display memory. The amount of display memory is shown in the BIOS Setup utility. If memory doesnt increase after adding RAM Make sure your notebook is using only PC2100 DDR-266 or higher memory (RAM) modules. If the notebook beeps but doesnt start after adding RAM You installed an incompatible type of RAM. Remove the module. Modem problems If the modem seems slow Excess static or noise on a line reduces the overall transmission speed of the modem connection. If necessary, contact your telephone company about fixing this type of problem. If youre dialing internationally, line noise is often a problem thats difficult or impossible to eliminate. If you have call-waiting, disable it. Your telephone company can provide instructions. It can cause symptoms similar to static. Eliminate extra connections in the line. If possible, connect directly to the wall jack. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. Reference Guide 73 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the modem doesnt dial or no dial tone is detected Check all cables and connections. Connect a standard telephone to the phone line and make sure the line is working. Make sure someone else isnt using the same phone line. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. If youre in a foreign country, the dial tone may not be recognized by the modem. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Try disabling the option that waits for a dial tone. If the modem dials incorrectly Check the telephone number you entered, including any digits required for outside access or long distance. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Check the dialing options look for duplicate digits for outside access or long distance. Make sure the number youre calling isnt busy. If youre in a foreign country, the dial tone may not be recognized by the modem. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Try disabling the option that waits for a dial tone. If you have call-waiting, disable ityour telephone company can provide instructions. If the modem dials but doesnt connect Make sure youre using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. The modem at the other end may have a problem. Try dialing to a different modem. If the modem isnt detected Check the modem setup. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Check the COM port. 74 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. If the modem is disabled, try to enable it. If it has a conflict, try disabling another device. If youre running fax software using fax Class 2, try using Class 1. If the modem dials but you cant hear it If your model has an audio mute light, make sure it is turned off. If its on, press the audio mute button. Check the speaker volume setting. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Select the modem and select Properties, then check the volume setting on the General tab. If the modem connects, but transferred data is bad In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Make sure the parity, speed, word length, and stop bits match on sending and receiving modems. Try a different telephone line, or dial a different server number. If the modem causes an ERROR message A string of AT commands may contain an incorrect command. If you entered commands as extra settings for the modem in Control Panel or in your communications software, check the commands. If youre using fax Class 2 in the fax software, try using Class 1. If the modem doesnt fax Close any other communications programs. If youre faxing by printing from an application, make sure youve selected the fax printer. Try turning off power management features temporarily. If excessive line current is detected Make sure youre using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. If the modem clicks repeatedly but does not connect Make sure you are using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. Check all cables and connections. Reference Guide 75 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook PC Card problems If the notebook doesnt recognize a PC Card Remove and reinsert the PC Card. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. Try the card in another computer to see whether the card functions properly. Zoomed Video is not supported. If the card requires an IRQ, make sure one is available. Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance >
System. If a network PC Card stops communicating properly The card may have been reset if the notebook entered Standby or shut off. Exit any applications, then remove and reinsert the card. Check settings in Control Panel. If a PC Card modem is not working Disable the internal modem:
1. Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select Modem to list the current modem devices. 3. Select the internal modem, then select the option to disable the modem. Performance problems For best performance, your notebook should have at least 128 MB of memory (RAM). If the notebook pauses or runs sluggishly This may be normal Windows behavior. Background processing can affect response time. Certain background operations (such as a virus-scanning program) can affect performance. 76 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Press CTRL+ALT+DEL and use Task Manager to see if an application is not responding. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. Some file browsers respond slowly while processing graphics or waiting for broken network connections to time out. If the notebook hard drive frequently runs (as indicated by the hard drive light on the front of the notebook) while the notebook appears to be paused or running slowly, Windows is likely spending excess time writing to its swap file on the notebook hard disk. If this occurs frequently, consider installing additional memory. Check the amount of available free disk space. Delete temporary and unneeded files. If the notebook stops responding Press CTRL+ALT+DEL and use Task Manager to end the application that is not responding. Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off and reset the notebook. Any unsaved data will be lost. Then press the power button again to turn the notebook back on. If nothing happens, insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn the notebook back on. To avoid lockup problems, avoid pressing the TV Now! One-Touch button to switch display devices while graphic-intensive applications are running. Also avoid turning the notebook off or putting it into Standby while such applications are running. Power and battery problems If the notebook turns off immediately after it turns on Battery power is probably extremely low. Plug in the AC adapter or insert a charged battery. If the notebook keeps beeping The notebook beeps repeatedly or displays a warning when battery power is low. Save your work, shut down Windows immediately, and insert a charged battery or plug in the AC adapter. Reference Guide 77 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the battery doesnt charge Make sure the AC adapter is fully plugged into the power source and the notebook, and that the light on the Adapter is on. If youre using a power strip, remove the AC adapter from the power strip and plug it directly into a wall outlet. Make sure the battery is fully installed and locked in place. Make sure youre using only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Do not use a 60-watt, 3.16-amp adapter. Move the notebook away from any nearby heat source. Unplug the AC adapter and allow the battery to cool down. If the battery gets too hot, it will not charge properly. If available, try another battery and AC adapter. If the notebook has a short operating time Conserve power using any of the suggestions listed in the Batteries and Power Management chapter in this guide. If you are running an application that has an automatic save feature (such as MS Word), disable this feature or increase the specified save time to reduce hard drive access. If the operating time has gradually become shorter and the battery is more than a year or two old, you may need to replace the battery. Heavy modem use can affect battery operating time. PC Card use can affect battery operating time. Test and recondition the battery every 3 months. If the Time Remaining for the battery is not correct The Time Remaining is an estimate, not a precise value, and is based on the rate at which the notebook is using power at the moment. This value therefore depends on your current task, and assumes that you will continue using power at the same rate until the battery runs out. So, if you check the Time Remaining while the notebook is performing a task requiring a good deal of power (such as reading from a CD or DVD), the value will probably show less time remaining than you really have, since you will probably later switch to tasks that require less power. 78 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the notebook doesnt enter Standby as expected If you have a connection to another computer, the notebook wont enter Standby if the connection is active. If the notebook is performing an operation, it normally waits for the operation to finish before entering Standby. If the notebook doesnt automatically enter Hibernation as expected Make sure Hibernation support is enabled. From Control Panel, open Power Options, then select the Hibernate tab. Check the Power Schemes tab. Make sure the Hibernate timeouts for both AC power and battery power are not set to Never. Printing problems Hint You will usually be able to solve most printing problems by using the Print troubleshooter in Windows Help: select Start > Help and Support. If a serial or parallel printer doesnt print Make sure the printer is on and has paper in it. Make sure you are using the correct printer cable or cable adapter, and that the cable is secure at both ends. Check for printer errors. If the left edge of printed output is missing Certain applications may not work properly with 600-dpi printers. If youre using such a printer, try selecting a compatible printer driver for a 300-dpi printer. If an infrared printer doesnt print Make sure the line between the two infrared ports is not blocked, and that the ports face each other as squarely as possible. (The notebook infrared port is located on the front of the notebook.) The ports should be no more than 1 meter apart. Make sure the printer is on and has paper in it. Check for printer errors. Make sure Windows is running; otherwise infrared printing is not available. Reference Guide 79 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Serial, parallel, and USB problems If a serial mouse doesnt work Make sure you followed the manufacturers installation instructions completely and have installed the mouse properly. If not, repeat the procedure. Make sure the port connection is secure. Press the power button to enter Standby, and again to resume. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. Check mouse settings in Control Panel: select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. Use a mouse that connects to the USB or PS/2 port. If you have a PS/2 keyboard connected, use a PS/2 Y adapter (HP accessory F1469A). Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). If a serial modem doesnt work properly Make sure the port connection is secure. Use the Modem troubleshooter in Windows Help: select Start > Help and Support. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options, and check the modem settings. Disable the internal modem:
1. Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select Modem to list the current modem devices. 3. Select the internal modem, then select the option to disable the modem. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). If the serial or parallel port is not working Make sure the port connection is secure. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). 80 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the USB port is not working Contact the vendor of the peripheral device for the latest USB drivers. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Universal Serial Bus Controller. Startup problems If the notebook does not respond when you turn it on Connect the AC adapter. Reset the notebook by inserting the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn it on. If the notebook still doesnt respond, remove the battery and AC adapter, remove any PC Cards, and undock the notebook if docked. Then plug in the AC adapter again, and reset the notebook using the reset button. If the notebook wont boot from battery power Make sure the battery is properly inserted and fully charged. Check the battery charge by removing it and pressing the pad on the side of the battery. The lights show the charge level. If available, try another battery. If the notebook will not boot from the diskette drive Make sure the diskette drive is selected as the boot device. See the Basic Operation chapter in this guide for directions. If youre using a USB diskette drive, use the BIOS Setup utility to make sure Legacy USB Support is enabled. If your notebook also has a built-in diskette drive, use the BIOS Setup utility Boot menu to make sure the USB diskette drive is the first device under Removable Drive. If the notebook stops responding after booting Check whether you are connected to a TCP/IP network with no DHCP server. This can cause a long delay at startup because DHCP is enabled. Contact your network administrator to determine the proper TCP/IP configuration. Reference Guide 81 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the notebook takes a long time to resume after entering Standby The notebook can routinely take a minute or more to resume if it has a network card installed. While the operating system is loading drivers and checking hardware and network connections, you will see a blinking cursor on your display. As soon as the hardware has been re-initialized, the Windows desktop will appear. Wireless problems If you have problems with wireless 802.11 communication Make sure the wireless indicator light is on. If your notebook includes Bluetooth capabilities, make sure wireless 802.11 communication is turned on. Select Start > All Programs > Utilities > Wireless Configuration, then select the 802.11 button if its not turned on. Make sure you are using the correct SSID and channel settings. Make sure you are in range of an access point (for an infrastructure connection) or other wireless computer (for an Ad Hoc connection). When you log on to an 802.11 network via an access point, yet your notebook cannot connect to network resources, your notebook may not have been assigned an IP address. If the subnet mask for your wireless connection is 255.255.000.000, the network server did not assign an IP address to your notebook, and you may have to release and renew your network IP address. If this does not fix the problem, the access point may need to be rebooted. If you want to change the SSID to a different value to connect to a different access point, or if you want to change from Infrastructure mode to Ad Hoc mode, you may first have to release and renew the Internet IP address. See Local area network (LAN) problems in this chapter. If you have trouble connecting to another computer in the Network Neighborhood or My Network Places Wait a few minutes, then press F5 to refresh the list of computers on the network. Select Start > Search > Computers or People to locate the computer. If you cannot connect to a particular computer on the network Make sure the computer is properly connected to the network. Make sure your TCP/IP setup is correct for your network: in Control Panel, open Network Connections. 82 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If you can connect, but the network is slow Check whether you might be in an area served by more than one wireless LAN. If so, the LANs could be interfering with each other. Move closer to the access point (for an infrastructure connection) or other wireless computer (for an Ad Hoc connection). You could be too far away for high-speed communication. If your notebook cannot detect any Bluetooth devices Make sure the wireless indicator light is on. Make sure Bluetooth communication is turned on. Select Start > All Programs >
Utilities > Wireless Configuration, then select the Bluetooth button if its not turned on. If no Bluetooth button is shown, your notebook does not support Bluetooth communication. Make sure the Bluetooth devices are turned on. Some Bluetooth phones must be set for detection and may be detectable by other devices for only a short time. If your notebook cannot detect a certain Bluetooth device Make sure the Bluetooth device is turned on. Some Bluetooth phones must be set for detection and may be detectable by other devices for only a short time. Refresh the list of Bluetooth devices. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar, then select Bluetooth > Search For Devices in the menu bar. Reference Guide 83 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Configuring Your Notebook The BIOS Setup utility helps you configure your notebook operation. To run the BIOS Setup utility The BIOS (basic input and output system) Setup utility enables you to make changes to the notebook system configuration, and to tailor the operation of your notebook to your individual work needs. The settings made in BIOS Setup generally control the notebook hardware, and so greatly affect how the notebook operates. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press F2 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. The pointing devices are not active in BIOS Setup, so you will need to use the keyboard to navigate:
Press the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to move among menus. Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move among parameters in a menu. Press + or to move through values for the current parameter, or press ENTER to change a setting. 4. After you select the options you want, press F10 or use the Exit menu to exit BIOS Setup. 5. If the settings cause a conflict between devices during reboot, the system prompts you to run BIOS Setup, and marks the conflicting settings. The following tables describe BIOS settings for the BIOS version at publication. If your BIOS is a different version, some settings may differ from those shown. 84 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Setting BIOS Revision System Time System Date Language Main Menu Description Shows the current BIOS version. Sets the time using 24-hour format. Values set take effect immediately. Sets the date using dd/mm/yy format (except English, which uses mm/dd/yy format). Sets the language for BIOS Setup. Internal Hard Disk Sets the hard drive type and various parameters. UMA Video Memory Memory Serial Number Service ID UUID MAC Address Sets the video memory size allocated from total installed memory (RAM). Shows the extended memory size. Displays the serial number as shown on the back of the unit. Displays an identifier used for repair service. Displays the value of the 16-byte UUID (Universally Unique ID) as 32 hex characters. Displays the MAC network address of the internal
(wired) LAN. Default Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Auto Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Reference Guide 85 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Setting Video Display Device External Pointing Device Legacy USB Support Wake On LAN from Power Off Setting User Password is Administrator Password is Set User Password Set Administrator Password Require Password on Boot Internal hard drive lock System Devices Menu Description Sets whether the built-in display automatically switches to an external display, if one is detected. Disables the internal pointing devices when an external pointing device is connected. Enables BIOS support for USB mouse, keyboard, and diskette disk drive during startup. Lets the notebook be turned on via the LAN port. If this option is enabled, the notebook uses increased power while it is shut down. Security Menu Description Shows if a user password is set. Shows if an administrator password is set. Press ENTER to set, change, or clear the user password. The password can have no more than 8 characters (0-9, A-Z), and cannot include special or accented characters. Press ENTER to set, change, or clear the administrator password, which protects BIOS Setup settings. The password can have no more than 8 characters (0-9, A-Z), and cannot include special or accented characters. Sets whether a user password is required when the notebook boots. Requires the administrator password for changes. Only if the Boot password option is enabled, encodes the current user password (or administrator password if that is the only password set) on the hard drive. Default Auto Auto Enabled Disabled Default Clear Clear Enter Enter Disabled Disabled 86 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Setting Hard Drive
+Removable Devices CD-ROM Drive Built-in LAN Boot Menu Description Shows the order of boot devices. Move the entries to change the order. If the notebook has more than one device in a + category, you can select the one scanned. Built-in LAN provides diskless boot from a network server. Default 1. Hard Drive 2. Removable Devices 3. CD-ROM Drive 4. Built-in LAN Setting Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Get Default Values Exit Menu Description Saves Setup changes, then exits and reboots. Discards any Setup changes made since last save, then exits and reboots. Does not affect password, date, or time changes. Restores default settings, and remains in Setup. Does not affect password, date, or time changes. Default To change video memory settings using BIOS Setup utility The notebook comes with either 32MB or 16MB of video memory. Note Changing your video memory to 8MB, 16MB, 32MB, or 64MB may change the performance of your notebook, depending on your selection. To change your video memory:
1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. Press F2 when the splash screen appears. 3. Move the down arrow key until UMA Video Memory is highlighted. Press Enter to bring up a list of memory settings. Selections include 8 MB, 16MB, 64MB, or Auto. 4. Press F10 to save configuration changes and exit BIOS screen. Reference Guide 87 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Reinstalling and Updating Software Reinstalling and Updating Software Your notebook includes two features that allow you to install individual software applications or to restore the entire original contents of your hard drive:
QuickRestore System Recovery CD, included with your notebook, allows you to restore your hard drive to its original factory contents. Application Recovery utility allows you to restore or install one or more applications. Select Start > Software Setup, then follow the installation wizard on the screen. To replace a damaged QuickRestore System Recovery CD If you lose or damage the QuickRestore System Recovery CD, refer to the service telephone numbers in the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet to contact a Customer Care Center for help and support. 88 Reference Guide Reference Information Reference Guide 89 Reference Information Modem Reference Information Modem Reference Information You can customize the operation of the modem using AT commands and S-registers. You can do this from Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel, from most communications software, or by using terminal mode in your software. Note You should have a good understanding of modems and how they operate before you change default settings. This section contains summary information about AT commands, S-registers, and selected result codes for the built-in modem. Modem Reference (Conexant) All listed AT commands must be preceded by the characters AT (except for the command A/). The commands can be entered in upper or lower case. Many commands can be used as queries by entering ? as the argument. Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Go off-hook and attempt to answer a call. Re-execute command (not preceded by AT). Dial modifier: 09, AD =DTMF digits; L=redial last number; P=pulse dialing; T=tone dialing;
W=wait for dial tone; * (star); # (pound sign); +; !=flash; @=wait for silence; $ or &=wait for credit card dialing tone; ,=return to command state; =dial pause; ^=toggle calling tone. Parentheses, hyphens, and spaces can be used to format dial string and have no other effect. Turn off command echo. Turn on command echo (default). Initiate hang-up sequence. If on-hook, go off-hook and enter command mode. Report product code. Report LSB of stored checksum. Report OK. Report identification codes. Report product description. Report country code parameter. Report modem data pump model and internal code revision. Report modem data pump model and internal code revision. Report OK. Report country. Set speaker volume: 0=off, 1=low (default), 2=medium, 3=high. Activate speaker: 0=off, 1=on during handshaking and off when receiving carrier (default), 2=always on, 3=off when dialing and receiving carrier, on when answering. 90 Reference Guide Command A A/
Dn E0 E1 H0 H1 I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 Ln Mn Command N0 or N1 On P Qn Sn Sn=v T Vn W0 W1 W2 W3 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 Z
+DR: a
+DR=n
+DS=a,b,c,d
+DS44=a,b,c,d, e,f,g,h,i Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Included for compatibility only; returns result code. 0=go on-line, 1=go on-line and initiate retrain sequence. Force pulse dialing. 0=enable result codes to DTE (default), 1=disable. Select S-register n as default. Set default S-register n to value v. Force DTMF dialing. Report result codes: 0=short form (terse), 1=long form (verbose) (default). Report DTE speed (default). Report line speed, error correction protocol, and DTE speed. Report DCE speed. Report DCE speed and error correction protocol. Report CONNECT result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy detection not reported. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy detection not reported. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy detection not reported. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone not reported, busy signal reported if detected. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy signal reported if detected (default). Reset to default configuration. Select error control protocol: NONE=no data compression, V42B=42bis in both directions, ALT=MNP 5 compression. 0=disables extended format "+DR:" intermediate result code, 1=enables. Controls V.42bis data compression function (b, c, and d are optional):
a sets direction(s) of data compression function, seen by DTE: 0=negotiated, no compression;
3=both directions (default). b=0 specifies modem does not disconnect if V.42bis is not negotiated by remote modem as specified by a. c sets maximum number of dictionary entries (2048) that should be negotiated. d sets maximum string length (32 bytes) to be negotiated. Controls V.44 data compression function (b, c, d, e, f, g, h, and i are optional):
a sets direction(s) of data compression function, seen by DTE: 0=negotiated, no compression;
1=transmit only; 2=receive only; 3=both directions (default). b specifies whether modem disconnects if V.44 not negotiated remote DCE as specified in a:
0=do not disconnect (default), 1=disconnect. c: 0=stream method (default), 1=packet method, 2=multi=packet method. d (256 to 2048) sets maximum codewords to be negotiated in transmit direction (default=2048). e (256 to 2048) sets maximum codewords to be negotiated in receive direction (default=2048). f (32 to 255) sets maximum string length to be negotiated in transmit direction (default=32). g (32 to 255) sets maximum string length to be negotiated in receive direction (default=32). h (2048 to 4096) sets maximum size of history buffer to be negotiated in transmit direction
(default=4096). i (2048 to 4096) sets maximum size of history buffer to be negotiated in receive direction
(default=4096). Reference Guide 91 Command
+ESA=a,b,c,d,e, f,g,h
+GCAP
+GCI=n
+GMI
+GMM
+GMR
+GOI
+GSN
+IFC=n,m
+ILRR=n
+IPR=n
+ITF=a,b,c
+PCW=n
+PIG=n
+PMH=n
+PMHF
+PMHR=n
+PMHT=n
+PQC=n
+PSS=n
+VCID=n Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Controls operation of synchronous access mode:
a=0 specifies in transparent sub-mode, modem transmits 8-bit SYN sequence on idle. b=0 specified in framed sub-mode, modem transmits HDLC flags on idle (default and fixed). c=0 specifies in framed sub-mode, modem transmits abort on underrun in middle of frame
(default); c=1 specifies in framed sub-mode, modem transmits flag on underrun in middle of frame, notifies DTE. d: not to be commanded. e=0 specifies CRC generation and checking disabled (default and fixed). f=0 specifies NZRI encoding and decoding disabled (default and fixed). g=255 sets the octet value used in character-oriented framing. h: not to be commanded. Transmit text listing commands that provide additional modem capabilities. Set country of installation using 8-bit country code from Annex A of T.35. Report modem manufacturer. Report modem model. Report modem version, revision, or date. Transmit text identifying the device. Report modem model serial number. Set operation of local flow control between DTE and modem. n =method DTE uses to control data flow from modem: 0=none, 1=XON/XOFF on transmitted data, 2=Circuit 133 (Ready for Receiving) (default). m =method modem uses to control data flow from DTE: 0=none, 1=XON/XOFF on received data, 2=CTS/RTS (default). Report local port rate: 0=disable, 1=enable. Set data rate at which the modem accepts commands when connected: 0 (allows operation only at rates automatically detectable by modem), 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200. Sets transmit flow control thresholds (b and c are optional):
a (20 to 7000) sets threshold (octets) above which modem generates flow-off signal in synchronous access mode (default=128). b (10 to 5000) sets threshold (octets) below which modem generates flow-on signal in synchronous access mode (default=64). c=0 (fixed). Set modem behavior with call waiting: 1=request modem-on-hold and collect caller ID information, 2=hang up, 3=ignore call waiting. 0=enable PCM upstream negotiation, 1=disable (default). Set modem-on-hold: 0=enabled in V.92 mode (default), 1=disabled. Initiate flash hook sequence when in modem-on-hold procedure. Request modem to initiate or confirm modem-on-hold (MOH) procedure and timeout: 0=V.92 modem-on-hold request denied or unavailable, 1 to 13 grant MOH with timeout (1=10 sec, 2=20 sec, 3=30 sec, 4=40 sec, 5=1 min, 6=2 min, 7=3 min, 8=4 min, 9=6 min, 10=8 min, 11=12 min, 12=16 min, 13=indefinite). Set whether modem grants modem-on-hold (MOH) request, and MOH timeout: 0=deny V.92 modem-on-hold request (default), 1 to 13=grant MOH with timeout (1=10 sec, 2=20 sec, 3=30 sec, 4=40 sec, 5=1 min, 6=2 min, 7=3 min, 8=4 min, 9=6 min, 10=8 min, 11=12 min, 12=16 min, 13=indefinite). Use Short Phase startup procedures: 0=enable V.92 Short Phase 1 and 2 (default), 1=enable Short Phase 1 only, 3=disable. 0=modems decide whether to use short startup procedures, 2=use full startup procedures on all subsequent connections. Set caller ID reporting: 0=disable (default), 1=enable with formatted presentation, 2=enable with unformatted presentation. 92 Reference Guide Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Report caller ID: 0=use formatted presentation, 1=use unformatted presentation. Use full startup procedures on next connection, then select startup procedure defined by
+PQC. 0=do not allow modem to save generated quick-connect profile, 1=allow (default). Set RLSD: 0=always on, 1=follow carrier state (default). 0=ignore DTR; 1=upon on-to-off transition, enter online command state and issue OK result code; call remains connected; 2=upon on-to-off transition clear call, discard untransmitted data according to +ETBM. 0=disable line quality monitor, auto-retrain, and auto-rate renegotiation;1=enable line quality monitor, auto-retrain, and auto-rate renegotiation (default). Restore factory configuration. Included for compatibility only; no effect (returns OK). Set DTE/DCE flow control: 0=disable, 3=enable RTS/CTS DTE/DCE flow control (default), 4=enable XON/XOFF DTE/DCE flow control, 5 and 6 included for compatibility only (no effect, returns OK). Included for compatibility only; no effect (returns result code). Set pulse dial (pps) with make/break: 0=10 pps with 39%61% make/break (default), 1=10 pps with 33%67% make/break, 2=20 pps with 39%61% make/break, 3=20 pps with 33%67%
make/break. Select asynchronous operation in error correction mode.
(n=03, 6) Select asynchronous operation in normal mode (speed buffering). Terminate any test in progress. Initiate local analog loopback. Display current configuration and stored profiles. PTT testing of signal level: 0009=DTMF dial 09, 0A=DTMF *, 0B=DTMF #, 0C=DTMF A, 0D=DTMF B, 0E=DTMF C, 0F=DTMF D, 10=V.21 Channel 1mark symbol, 11=V.21 Channel 2mark symbol, 12=V.23 Channel 1mark symbol, 13=V.23 Channel 2mark symbol, 14=Bell103 Channel 1mark symbol, 15=Bell103 Channel 2mark symbol, 20=V22Org, 21=V22Ans, 22=Bell212Org, 23=Bell212Ans, 24=V22BisOrg, 25=V22BisAns, 26=V32@4800, 27=V32@7200, 28=V32@9600, 29=V.32Bis@12000, 2A=V32Bis@14400, 30=Silence, 31=2100Hz MISC, 33=1300Hz MISC, 34=1100Hz MISC, 40=Reserved, 41=V27@2400 FAX, 42=V27@4800 FAX, 43=V29@7200 FAX, 44=V29@9600 FAX, 45=V17@7200LT FAX, 46=V17@7200ST FAX, 47=V17@9600LT FAX, 48=V17@9600ST FAX, 49=V17@12000LT FAX, 4A=V17@12000ST FAX, 4B=V17@14400LT FAX, 4C=V17@14400ST FAX. 5abc: a=bit rate (0=2400, D=33600), b=V.34 symbol rate (0=2400, 5=3429), c=pre-emphasis filter (0 to A). Select normal speed buffered mode. Select normal speed buffered mode. Select reliable (error-correction) mode. Select auto reliable mode. Force LAPM mode. Force MNP mode. Report carrier. Report transmit and receive rates. Disable reporting of modulation connection. Enable reporting of modulation connection (+MCR: and +MRR: are transmitted) (default). Enable reporting of modulation connection (+MCR: and Receive Rate Only: are transmitted). Command
+VRID=n
-QCPC
-QCPS=n
&Cn
&Dn
&En
&F0
&Gn
&Kn
&Mn
&Pn
&Q5
&Qn
&T0
&T1
&V
%TTn
\N0
\N1
\N2
\N3
\N4
\N5
+MCR
+MMR
+MR=0
+MR=1
+MR=2 Reference Guide 93 Command
+MS=a,b,c,d,e,f
+WS=n
%Cn
+EB=a,b,c
+EFCS=0
+ER: a
+ER=n
+ES=a,b,c
+ESR=0
+ETBM=a,b,c
+FAE=n
+FAR=n
+FCL=n
+FCLASS=n
+FIT=n,a Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Select modulation (b, c, d, e, and f are optional). a is the carrier (allowable rates in parentheses): B103 (300), B212 (1200 Rx/75 Tx or 75 Rx/1200 Tx), V21 (300), V22 (1200), V22B (1200/2400), V23C (1200), V32 (4800/9600), V32B
(480014400), V34 (240033600), K56 (3200056000), V90 (2800056000), V92 (downstream: 28000 56000; upstream: 2400048000). b is automode: 0=disabled, 1=enabled (default). c is minimum transmit (Tx) rate (bps). d is maximum transmit rate (bps). e is minimum receive (Rx) rate. f is maximum receive rate (bps). Set PDC mode: 1=disable (default), 20=enable. ECC Commands Set data compression: 0=disable, 1=enable V.42 bis and MNP 5, 2=enable V.42 bis and MNP 5, 3=enable V.42 bis and MNP 5 (default). Select break handling (b and c are optional):
a=0 break is ignored. b=0 transmitted V.42 L-SIGNAL will not indicate break signal length. c=0 break is not delivered to DTE. Select 16-bit FCS specified in V.42. Select error control protocol: NONE=error control not in use, LAPM=V.42 LAPM protocol, ALT=MNP. Error control reporting: 0=disable, 1=enable. Select error control and synchronous mode (b and c are optional). a is requested mode when modem is originator: 0=initiate call with direct mode, 1=initiate call with normal mode, 2=initiate V.42 without detection phase, 3=initiate V.42 with detection phase
(default), 4=initiate MNP, 6=initiate V.80 synchronous access mode when connection is completed. b specifies fallback mode when modem is originator: 0=LAPM, MNP, or normal mode error control optional (default); 1=LAPM, MNP, or direct mode error control optional; 2=LAPM or MNP error control required; 3=LAPM error control required; 4=MNP error control required. c specifies fallback mode when modem is answerer or specifies V.80 synchronous access mode: 1=error control disabled, use normal mode; 2=LAPM, MNP, or normal mode error control optional (default); 3=LAPM, MNP, or direct mode error control optional; 4=LAPM or MNP error control required; 5=LAPM error control required; 6=MNP error control required;
8=initiate V.80 synchronous access mode when connection complete. Disable selective repeat option in V.42. Handle data remaining in modem buffers on call termination (b and c are optional):
a=0 disconnect occurs immediately and buffered transmit data is discarded. b=0 disconnect occurs immediately and buffered receive data is discarded. c=0 modem does not attempt to deliver buffered data and discards data. FAX Class 1 Data/fax auto answer: 0=disable (default), 1=enable. 0=disable adaptive reception (default), 1=enable. Set loss-of-carrier delay in units of 100 ms (n=0 to 255). Set active service class: 0=data mode (default), 1=Fax Class 1, 1.0=Fax Class 1.0 mode, 8=voice mode. Set DTE inactivity timeout n seconds after which modem goes on-hook (a=0) or DCE goes on hook (a=1). 94 Reference Guide Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Set flow control type: 0=XON/XOFF and RTS/CTS flow control turned off; 1=XON/XOFF flow control in either direction; 2=RTS for flow control of modem by DTE, and CTS for flow control of DTE by modem. Report modem manufacturer. Report modem model. Report modem version, revision, or date. Set DTE/modem interface rate in bits/sec: 0=automatic detection (default). Receive data with HDLC framing. Receive data. Receive silence, n 10 ms. Transmit data with HDLC framing. Transmit data. Stop transmission and wait, n 10 ms. Voice Commands Select voice mode. Set report ring cadence and timing of RING event code:
a=0 disables ring cadence reporting, a=1 enables. b sets report content: 0=DROF and DRON messages only. Set report control tone cadence:
a=0 disables ring cadence reporting, a=1 enables. b=0 reports CPOF and CPON messages only. Select speakerphone half-duplex (a=0) or full duplex (a=1). Set microphone gain of speakerphone function (0 to 255). Set gain for received voice samples (0 to 255). Set speaker gain of speakerphone function (0 to 255). Set volume (120 to 135). Initialize all voice parameters to defaults. Set initial value for DTE/modem inactivity timer (0 to 255 seconds). Select sources/destinations for analog data. Set automatic hangups: 0=enable, 1=disable, 2=disable automatic hangups in non-voice modes. Set DTE/modem interface rate (0=autobaud). Set delay between ringbacks before modem assumes remote station is off hook (0 to 255 x 0.1 sec). Set delay between ringbacks before modem assumes remote station is off hook (0 to 60 sec). Start voice reception: 0=start without periodic tone production, 1=start with periodic tone production. Set silence detection sensitivity and required period of silence before modem reports silence at end of voice receive. Set voice and silence compression methods, and voice sampling rate. Disable (a=0) or enable (a=1) speakerphone. Set beep duration (1 to 500 x 0.01 sec). Start voice transmission and reception. Send voice tones. Start voice transmission. Command
+FLO=a
+FMI
+FMM
+FMR
+FPR=n
+FRH=n
+FRM=n
+FRS=n
+FTH=n
+FTM=n
+FTS=n
+FCLASS=8
+VDR=a,b
+VDT=a,b
+VDX=a
+VGM=n
+VGR=n
+VGS=n
+VGT=n
+VIP
+VIT=n
+VLS=n
+VNH=n
+VPR=n
+VRA=n
+VRN=n
+VRXn
+VSD=a,b
+VSM=a,b,c,d
+VSP=a
+VTD=n
+VTR
+VTS=string
+VTX
*B
*D Display black-listed numbers. Display delayed numbers. AT* Commands Reference Guide 95 Register S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S10 S11 S12 S18 S29 S30 S46 S95 Reference Information Modem Reference Information S-Registers (Conexant) Function (Conexant) Number of rings to auto-answer. Ring counter. Escape character. Line termination character. Response formatting character. Command line editing character. Wait time for dial tone. Wait time for carrier. Pause time for dial delay modifier. Carrier loss disconnect time. DTMF tone duration. Escape prompt delay. Test timer. Flash dial modifier time. Disconnect inactivity timer. Data compression control. Range/units 0255/rings 0255/rings 0255/ASCII 0127/ASCII 0127/ASCII 032/ASCII 2255/sec 1255/sec 0255/sec 1255/.1 sec 50255/.001 sec 0255/.02 sec 0255/sec 0255/10 msec 0255/10 sec 136 (error correction w/o compression) or 138 (error correction
& compression) Default 0 0 43 13 10 (line feed) 8
(backspace) 2 50 2 14 (1.4 sec) 95 (95 msec) 50 (1 sec) 0 70 (700 msec) 0 138 Extended result code messages control. 0 Selected Result Codes (Conexant) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 24 32 33 35 83 Meaning OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR CONNECT 1200 NO DIAL TONE BUSY NO ANSWER DELAYED BLACKLISTED FAX DATA LINE IN USE 96 Reference Guide Reference Information Safety Information Safety Information Power cords The power cord supplied with the notebook AC adapter should match the plug and voltage requirements for your local area. Regulatory approval for the AC adapter has been obtained using the power cord for the local area. However, if you travel to a different area or need to connect to a different outlet or voltage, you should use one of the power cords listed below. To purchase a power cord (including one for an area not listed below) or a replacement AC adapter, contact your local authorized dealer or Sales and Service office. For any power cord with a fused plug, if you have to replace the fuse, be sure to install an approved fuse. Country or Region Canada Mexico Philippines Taiwan United States East and West Europe Egypt Saudi Arabia Hong Kong Singapore United Kingdom Australia New Zealand Japan India South Africa Argentina Chile China South Korea Rated Voltage and Current 125 Vac (3 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 125 Vac (3 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) Reference Guide 97 Reference Information Safety Information Battery safety To avoid risk of fire, burns, or damage to your battery pack, do not allow a metal object to touch the battery contacts. Do not disassemble the battery. There are no serviceable parts inside. Do not dispose of the battery pack in fire or water. Handle a damaged or leaking battery with extreme care. If you come in contact with the electrolyte, wash the exposed area with soap and water. If it contacts the eye, flush the eye with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not expose the battery pack to storage temperatures above 60 C (140 F). When discarding a battery pack, contact your local waste disposal provider regarding local restrictions on the disposal or recycling of batteries. To obtain a replacement battery, contact your local dealer or sales office. Do not charge the battery pack if the ambient temperature exceeds 45 C
(113 F). Replace only with the same or equivalent type battery pack recommended by the manufacturer. This product contains a lithium-ion or nickel-metal-hydride battery and may require special handling at end-of-life. Laser safety The CD-ROM and DVD drives used with the computer are certified as a Class 1 laser devices according to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard and International Standards IEC 825 /
IEC 825-1 (EN60825 / EN60825-1). These devices are not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Ensure proper use by reading and following the instructions carefully. 98 Reference Guide Reference Information Safety Information If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center. Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beamdo not open the unit. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LED safety The infrared port located on the front of certain models is classified as a Class 1 LED (light-emitting diode) device according to International Standard IEC 825-1
(EN60825-1). This device is not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit. Avoid direct eye exposure to the infrared LED beam. Be aware that the beam is If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center. invisible light and cannot be seen. Do not attempt to view the infrared LED beam with any type of optical device. CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT LEDSCHTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT Mercury safety This product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the liquid-crystal display, and may require special handling at end-of-life. Reference Guide 99 Reference Information Safety Information Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of the IEEE 802.11 and Bluetooth internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. We therefore believe the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. 100 Reference Guide Regulatory Information Reference Information Regulatory Information This section presents information that shows how your computer complies with regulations in certain regions. Any modifications to your computer not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the authority to operate the computer in these regions. U.S.A. This computer has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This computer generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this computer does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by removing the units batteries and AC adapter), try the following:
Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna. Relocating the computer with respect to the receiver. Connecting the computers AC adapter to another power outlet. Connections to Peripheral Devices To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, use properly shielded cables with this device. For more information, consult your dealer, an experienced radio/television technician, or the following booklet, prepared by the Federal Communications Commission: How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402, Stock Number 004-000-00345-4. At the first printing of this manual, the telephone number was (202) 512-1800. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. Reference Guide 101 Reference Information Regulatory Information Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 means the REN is 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call 1-800-652-6672. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should only perform repairs to the equipment specifically discussed in the troubleshooting section of the user guide. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this computer equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. 102 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.) Declaration of Conformity (U.S.A.) Responsible Party:
Hewlett-Packard Company Manager of Corporate Product Regulations 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto, CA 94304
+1 (650) 857-1501 declares that the product(s) Hewlett-Packard Company Pavilion ZE4... and XT... series CRVSA-02T1-75 Trade name:
Product name:
Regulatory Model Number:
Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed five. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Reference Guide 103 Reference Information Regulatory Information The internal wireless radio complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limites applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par le Ministre des Communications du Canada. Le composant RF interne est conforme la norme CNR-210 dIndustrie Canada. Lutilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) lutilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. European Union The equipment has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) and to a radio-frequency wireless network. However, due to differences between the individual PSTs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work in all of the countries of the European Economic Area (Public Switched Telephone Networks). Network compatibility is dependent on internal software settings. Contact your equipment supplier if it is necessary to use the equipment on a different telephone network. Belgium: For outdoor usage only channels 10 (2457 MHz) through 13 (2472 MHz) are allowed. For private usage outside buildings across public grounds over less than 300m, no special registration with IBPT/BIPT is required. Registration to IBPT/BIPT is required for private usage outside buildings across public grounds over more than 300m. An IBPT/BIPT license is required for public usage outside building. For registration and license please contact IBPT/BIPT. France: Restricted frequency band: only channels 10 through 13 (2457 MHz through 2472 MHz respectively) may be used in France. License required for every installation, indoor and outdoor installations. Please contact ART for the procedure to follow. Use with outdoor installations not allowed. 104 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information Germany: License required for outdoor installations. Check with reseller for procedure to follow. Netherlands: License required for outdoor installations. Check with reseller for procedure to follow. Italy: Indoor or outdoor use in a public area requires a user license. Die Gerte wurden gem Ratsentscheidung 98/482/EC fr den Anschluss an eine einzelne Telefonbuchse im europischen Raum (Public Switched Telephone Network) und drahtlose Funknetzwerke zertifiziert. In Anbetracht der Unterschiede zwischen den einzelnen Telefonnetzen bietet die Zertifizierung fr sich genommen keine absolute Sicherheit, dass die Gerte bei Anschluss an jeder beliebigen Telefonbuchse funktionieren. Sollten Probleme auftreten, wenden Sie sich zunchst an den Gertehersteller. Diese Gerte wurden zum Betrieb in allen Lndern der europischen Wirtschaftsgemein-
schaft entwickelt (Public Switched Telephone Networks). Die Kompatibilitt zum Netz ist von internen Software-Einstellungen abhngig. Wenden Sie sich an den Gertehersteller, wenn Sie die Gerte in einem anderen Telefonnetz einsetzen mssen. Cet quipement a t reconnu conforme aux dcisions du Conseil 98/482/EC relatives la connexion pan-europenne de terminal simple au rseau tlphonique public commut (RTPC) et un rseau sans fil RF. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les RTPC nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du rseau tlphonique public commut. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. Cet quipement a t conu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays membres de la zone d'change europenne (Rseaux Tlphoniques Public Commuts). La compatibilit entre rseaux dpend des paramtres internes du logiciel. Prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement pour savoir s'il est prfrable d'utiliser ce dernier sur un autre rseau tlphonique. Questa apparecchiatura stata approvata in conformit alla Decisione del Consiglio 98/482/EC che regolamenta, in seno allUnione Europea, la connessione di singoli terminali alla rete telefonica pubblica commutata (PSTN) e alla rete wireless in radio frequenza. Tuttavia, a causa delle differenze esistenti tra i singoli servizi PSTN forniti nei diversi paesi, lapprovazione in s stessa non rappresenta una garanzia assoluta di funzionamento su ogni singolo punto di terminazione della rete PSTN. Reference Guide 105 Reference Information Regulatory Information In caso di problemi, per prima cosa rivolgersi al fornitore dellapparecchiatura. Questa apparecchiatura stata progettata per funzionare in tutti i paesi dellArea Economica Europea (reti telefoniche pubbliche commutate). La compatibilit della rete dipende dalle impostazioni interne del software. Rivolgersi al fornitore dellapparecchiatura qualora sia necessario utilizzare questultima su una rete telefonica diversa. Japan Japan Telecommunications Approval Name of Equipment: AMC20493-001-KT5 TELEC approval number: D02-0005JP Name of Equipment: T60H424 106 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information New Zealand Conexant AMC20493 Data Fax Modem PTC 211/02/071 PTC200 General Warning The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. PTC200 2.11.1 (6) & (7) Compliance Testing (Functional tests) This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. This condition typically applies to 56 kbit/s modems. PTC200 4.5.1 (4) Off-hook Line Impedance This equipment does not fully meet Telecoms impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. PTC200 5.6.1 (3) General Requirements (automatic dialing devices) This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to Telecoms 111 Emergency Service. PTC200 7.5.2 (3) (4) Ringer Sensitivity This device may be subject to ringing or bell tinkle when certain other devices are connected to the same line. If this occurs, the problem should not be referred to the Telecom Faults Service. Associated Software Limits of Compliance Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the application software or PC equipment associated with this device. The application software shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms specifications:
The S0 register must contain a value of 0 for no auto-answer or a value of 2 for auto-answer. The S6 register must contain a value of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7. The factory default of 2 is recommended. The S7 register must contain a value less than 90. The factory default of 72 is recommended. The S10 register must contain a value less than 150. The factory default of 14 is recommended. The S11 register must contain a value greater than 60. The factory default of 95 is recommended. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of the next attempt to the same number. Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 2 seconds apart. Failure to set these parameters correctly could negate the User Rights under the Telecom Terms of Service. Reference Guide 107 Reference Information Regulatory Information Russia International Note Products sold internationally by the manufacturer and its authorized dealers meet the specifications listed on the following page. For regulatory identification purposes, your product is assigned a Regulatory Model Number. The Regulatory Model Number for your product is listed in the declaration below. This regulatory number is different from the marketing name and product number. 108 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information Hewlett-Packard Company, Personal Systems Group 19310 Pruneridge Ave., Cupertino, CA 95014, U.S.A. Declaration of Conformity (according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014) Manufacturers Name:
Manufacturers Address:
declares that the following product Product Name:
Regulatory Model Number:
Product Options:
conforms to the following product specifications Safety:
HP Notebook PCs CRVSA-02T1-75 Includes all options for analog modems (Conexant) and 802.11b RF devices (Ambit) IEC 60950: 1991 +A1,A2,A3,A4 / EN 60950: 1992 +A1,A2,A3,A4,A11 IEC 60825-1: 1993 +A1 / EN 60825-1: 1994 +A11 Class 1 LED GB4943-1995 EN 55022: 1994 +A1: 1995 +A2: 1997, Class B [1]
CISPR 24: 1997 / EN 55024: 1998 IEC 61000-3-2: 1995 / EN 61000-3-2:1995 +A1: 1998 +A2: 1998 IEC 61000-3-3: 1994 / EN 61000-3-3:1995 GB9254-1998 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B/ANSI C63.4: 1992 AS/NZS 3548: 1995 Rules and Regulations of Class B TBR 21: 1998, EG 201 121: 1998 EN 301 489-17: 2000 Specific conditions for wideband data HYPERLAN equipment EN 300 328-2: 2000 Technical requirements for Radio equipment Notified Body Number: 0682 Notified Body Address: CETECOM ICT Services GmbH, Untertuerkheimer Str. 6-10, D-
66117 Saarbruecken The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and carries the CE marking accordingly.
[1] The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer peripherals. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The HP F1454, F1781, F4600, F4814, F4813, F5104, 5950-4334, and 5950-4359 ac/dc adapters used with this product are designed to operate on all power systems, other than IT power systems. EMC:
Telecom:
Radio:
Equipment Class 2 Supplementary Information:
Corvallis, OR, July 17, 2002 European Contact for regulatory topics only: Hewlett Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany. Fax: +49 7031 143143. USA Contact: Hewlett Packard Co., Corporate Product Regulations Manager, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (650) 857-1501. Reference Guide 109 Index A AC adapter compatibility, 11, 55 connecting, 11 AC adapter jack, location, 5 AdHoc wireless network setup, 41 adjusting brightness, 19 volume, 19 airplanes, wireless communication in, 42, 44 ALT GR key, 21 antistatic precautions, 58, 60 Applications key, 21 AT commands, 38 audio adjusting volume, 66 troubleshooting, 66 volume, 19 audio jacks, 3 audio mute button, 3 B battery best use of, 34 checking status, 32 extending life of, 34 installing, 10 location, 2, 3 low power warning, 33 operating time, 34, 78 release latch, 6, 7 safety, 98 saving power, 34 status lights, 32 troubleshooting, 77 BIOS password, 24 BIOS Setup utility Boot menu, 87 Exit menu, 87 external display settings, 86 Main menu, 85 Security menu, 86 using, 84 black list (modem), 37 blackout periods, modem, 37 Bluetooth business cards, 46 configuring, 45 sending files, 46 troubleshooting, 82 tuning on, 44 turning off, 45 wireless, 44 boot device order, 17, 87 Boot menu (BIOS), 87 brightness, adjusting, 19 business cards, 46 C Cable lock, 25 Caps Lock, 9 Cardbus cards, 48 cards, PCMCIA, 48 CD-ROM drive creating or copying CDs, 23 inserting CD, 20, 22 location, 2, 3 removing CD, 20, 22 CDs copying/creating, 23 recommended media, 23 cleaning the notebook, 28 configuring BIOS settings, 84 modem, 38 connecting IEEE 1394 devices, 53 LAN, 39 wireless network, 40 D data protection, 28 DDR-266 RAM, 58, 73 default BIOS settings, 85 devices boot order, 87 temporary boot order, 17 diskette drive location, 5 USB, 81 display BIOS settings, 86 brightness, 19, 28, 34 dual display, 53 dual monitor, 53 extending life, 28 memory, 85 port, 5 secondary, 53 troubleshooting, 68 docking port, 6, 7 drives hard drive holder, 63 replacing hard drive, 62 DVD drive location, 2, 3 setting region code, 23 troubleshooting, 67 E encryption, 40 ergonomics, 10 Exit menu (BIOS), 87 extended memory, 85 external monitor port, 5 F Fn key
+ Back Space (mute), 19
+ F1 (decrease brightness), 19
+ F12 (hibernation), 19
+ F2 (increase brightness), 19
+ F8 (keypad), 19
+ NumLock (scroll lock), 19
+ Page Down (decrease audio), 19
+ Page Up (increase audio), 19 H hard drive caring for, 28 Hibernation partition, 62, 87 holder, 63 location, 6, 7 protecting, 27 replacing, 62 troubleshooting, 69 Hibernation status lights, 8 Reference Guide 111 Hibernation mode definition, 16 Hibernation partition, 62, 87 hot keys, 19 hot notebook, 70 I IEEE 1394 port connecting devices, 53 location, 5 infrared communication troubleshooting, 70 infrared port location, 2, 3 printing, 54 safety, 99 troubleshooting, 70 inserting CD, 20, 22 DVD, 20, 22 PC card, 48 installing battery, 10 hard drive, 62 hard drive holder, 63 Internet Service Provider, 36 K keyboard ergonomic precautions, 10 non US, 21 status lights, 2, 3, 9 troubleshooting, 71 Keypad Lock, 2, 3, 9 L LAN connecting to, 39 troubleshooting, 72 wireless, 40 LAN port indicator lights, 39 location, 5 laser safety, 98 lights LAN port, 39 status, 2, 3, 8, 9 locking notebook, 24 LPT1 port, 5 M Main menu (BIOS), 85 maintenance notebook configuration, 84 software installation, 88 memory extended, 85 PC2100 DDR-266, 58, 73 troubleshooting, 73 video, 85 Mini PCI location, 6, 7 modem AT commands, 38 black list, 37 blackout periods, 37 built-in, 12 port location, 5 settings, 38 software, 36 troubleshooting, 73 monitor BIOS settings, 86 port, 5 resolution, 53 mouse, troubleshooting, 71 mute button location, 3 N network connecting to, 39 LAN, See LAN wireless, See wireless network Norton AntiVirus, 25 notebook caring for, 27 changing BIOS settings, 84 cleaning, 28 opening/closing, 2, 3 protecting, 27, 70 resetting, 17 timeouts, 31 turning on, 13 Num Lock, 9 O off button location, 2, 3 status lights, 8 turning off, 16 on button, location, 2, 3 One-Touch buttons location, 2, 3 using, 20 overheating, 70 P parallel port location, 5 troubleshooting, 80 password, 24 PC card slot, location, 5 PC cards installing, 48 saving power, 34 stopping, 49 troubleshooting, 76 PC2100 DDR-266 RAM, 58, 73 PCMCIA cards, 48 phone cord, connecting, 12 plug requirements, 97 port locations, 5 power connecting AC, 11 saving, 34 troubleshooting, 77 power button location, 2, 3 resetting with, 17 power cords, 97 power management automated, 30 schemes, 31 printing infrared printers, 54 troubleshooting, 79 protection Cable lock, 25 Norton AntiVirus, 25 PS/2 port, 2, 5 Q Quick Lock, 24 QuickRestore System Recovery CD using, 88 R RAM location, 6, 7 PC2100 DDR-266, 58, 73 112 Reference Guide rebooting boot device, 87 temporary boot device, 17 region code, 23 regulatory information, 101 removing CD, 20, 22 DVD, 20, 22 hard drive, 62 hard drive holder, 63 PC card, 49 reset button, 17 resetting, 17 S safety battery use, 98 infrared port, 99 laser, 98 power cords, 97 wireless communication, 42, 44 safety information, iii saving battery power, 34 scroll pad, 3 scroll pad, 2 secondary display, 53 security cable lock, 5 Cable lock, 25 Norton AntiVirus, 25 Security menu (BIOS), 86 serial port troubleshooting, 80 setting up, 10 Standby and display life, 28 resuming and, 82 saving power, 34 status lights, 8 troubleshooting, 82 Standby mode definition, 16 timeout, 16 startup, troubleshooting, 81 static electricity, 58, 60 status lights battery charge, 32 keyboard, 2, 3, 9 location, 2, 3 meanings, 8 S-Video port, 5 T temperature, overheating, 70 1394 devices, connecting, 53 1394 port, 53 timeouts, notebook, 31 TouchPad location, 2, 3 troubleshooting, 71 troubleshooting audio, 66 battery, 77 CD/DVD drive, 67 display, 68 hard drive, 69 infrared communications, 70 keyboard, 71 LAN, 72 memory, 73 modem, 73 overheating, 70 parallel port, 80 PC card, 76 performance, 76 pointing devices, 71 power, 77 printing, 79 resuming, 82 serial port, 80 Standby, 82 startup, 81 USB, 80 wireless communication, 82 turning on notebook, 13 typing special characters, 21 U USB diskette drive, 81 port location, 5 third port location, 3 troubleshooting, 80 V ventilation, 27, 70 video memory, 85 virus protection, 25 voltage requirements, 97 volume adjusting, 19 troubleshooting, 66 volume control, 3 W Windows key, 21 password, 24 setting up, 13 wireless communication Bluetooth, 44 configuring (Bluetooth), 45 indicator light, 2, 3, 42, 44 on-off button, 40 restrictions on use, 42, 44 status, 42 troubleshooting, 82 turning off (Bluetooth), 45 turning on, 42 turning on (Bluetooth), 44 wireless network AdHoc, 41 connecting to, 40 Reference Guide 113
| 1 2 3 | CRN 10069 Q2 HP PP2180 user manual 1 of 2 | Users Manual | 3.88 MiB | / May 08 2003 |
Ryan Masterfile.book Page i Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup and Reference Guide HP Notebook Series Document Part Number: 335555-001 August 2003 Part 1: Startup The Startup part of this guide explains how to set up your notebook for the first time. Part 2: Reference The Reference part of this guide explains how to identify and use the hardware and software features on your notebook. Ryan Masterfile.book Page ii Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Contents 1 Startup 2 System Components 3 Keyboard 4 Power 5 Drives 6 Multimedia 7 Communications 8 Hardware Options and Upgrades 9 Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities A Specifications Index Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Part-1 Startup This Startup and Reference Guide provides information about setting up and using your notebook. To set up your notebook hardware and software for the first time, follow the procedures in Part 1: Startup. To learn more about using your notebook, refer to Part 2:
Reference. To find information about a specific topic:
Refer to the contents list on the first page of each chapter, or Refer to the Index. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 11 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Setting Up the Hardware To set up the notebook for the first time, you need the notebook, the power cord 1, the AC adapter 2, and the battery pack 3. Insert the battery pack into the notebook, so that the battery can begin to charge as soon as the notebook is connected to external power. (Refer to the next section for details.) Open the notebook, connect it to external power, and press the power button to turn on the notebook. Identifying the AC adapter, the power cord, and the battery pack
(Power cords vary by region and country.) 12 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Inserting a Battery Pack To insert the battery pack into the battery bay:
1. Turn the notebook upside down on a flat surface. 2. Insert the alignment tab on the battery pack into the alignment slot on the notebook. 3. Tilt the battery pack downward until it snaps into place. Inserting a battery pack CAUTION: To ensure that the correct drivers load and to prevent file corruption or damage to components, do not remove the battery pack until the notebook has been connected to external power. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 13 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Opening the Notebook To open the notebook:
1. Place the notebook display-side up on a flat surface near an electrical outlet. 2. Slide the display release latch 1, then lift the display 2. Opening the notebook 14 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Connecting the Notebook to External Power To connect the notebook to external power:
1. Plug the AC adapter cable into the power connector 1. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2, then into an electrical outlet 3. As soon as the notebook is connected to external power, the battery light turns on, and the battery pack begins to charge. Connecting the notebook to external power Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 15 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Charging a New Battery Pack The battery pack begins to charge as soon as the notebook is connected to external power. Charge status is indicated by the battery charge light. The battery charge light is on while the battery pack is charging. HP recommends that you leave the notebook connected to external power until the battery pack is fully charged and the battery charge light turns off. A partially charged new battery pack can run the notebook, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery pack has been fully charged. Identifying the battery light 16 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Turning On the Notebook To turn on the notebook, press the power button. When the notebook turns on, the power/standby button lights up, the power/standby light turns on, and you are prompted to begin software setup. Turning on the notebook If the Notebook Does Not Turn On Make sure that the AC adapter is securely plugged into an electrical outlet. Make sure that the outlet is providing power. (To confirm that the outlet is providing power, plug another device into the outlet.) If you have installed a battery pack, make sure that the battery pack is firmly seated. Refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the notebook to contact an HP Customer Care Center. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 17 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Setting Up the Software CAUTION: To prevent file corruption and ensure that the correct drivers are installed, install software only when the notebook is connected to external power through the AC adapter. During the installation:
Do not unplug the notebook from external power. Do not shut down the notebook or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. Installing Basic Software When the notebook is connected to external power and turned on for the first time, a prompt to set up the operating system and other basic software is displayed on the screen. Before responding to the prompt and proceeding through the on-screen instructions, read the following carefully and follow the installation instructions in this chapter. After beginning the software setup, you must complete the entire process without interruption. Setup time varies. If you are prompted to select a language, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during the installation. Regional settings and most other preferences can be selected or changed later, after the operating system is installed. When you are prompted to accept the End User License Agreement, you must choose Accept to continue the software setup. During setup, it is normal for some notebook models to pause occasionally for up to 2 minutes and to restart several times. These pauses and restarts occur only during initial software setup. They will not occur during routine Windows startups. 18 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Installing Optional Software Instructions for installing and using many of the applications and utilities included with the notebook are provided later in this guide. If you prefer to install optional software now, the following information may be helpful. To install an application or a utility from a CD, refer to the instructions included with the CD. If printed instructions are not included in the CD package, they may be displayed on the screen when the CD is inserted. To view or install preloaded utilities or applications, select Start >
All Programs > Software Setup. Then:
To display the descriptions and space requirements of a preloaded item without installing it, select the Next button, then select an item. After viewing the information, select the Cancel button. To install a preloaded item, select the check box for the item, select the Next button, then follow the instructions on the screen. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 19 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Setting Regional and Display Preferences Keyboard language and other regional preferences, such as time, date, and currency format, are set in the Regional Options window of the operating system. To access the Regional Options window, select Start > Control Panel > Date, Time, Language and Regional Options icon. Screen appearance settings are accessed from the operating system Appearance and Themes window. To access the Appearance and Themes window, select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes icon. To access the settings that control the size of the items displayed on the screen, select the Change Resolution task. Turning Off the Notebook Turn off the notebook by using the Windows shutdown procedure. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the notebook does not respond, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the order below:
Press ctrl+alt+delete, click the Shut Down button, then select Shut Down from the drop down list. Press and hold down the power button for at least 4 seconds. Unplug the notebook from external power and remove the battery pack. For instructions refer to Replacing a Battery Pack in Chapter 4. 110 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 11 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Using the Notebook Safetly Protecting the Notebook Against Computer Viruses When you use the notebook for email, network, or Internet access, you expose the notebook to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, your applications, or your utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases repair damage they have caused. To provide protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be updated. For antivirus instructions and more information about virus updates, refer to the Help file within the application or select Start > Help and Support. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 111 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 12 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup Protecting the Notebook from Power Surges To protect the notebook from the power surges that may be caused by an unreliable power supply or an electrical storm:
Plug the notebook power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector available from most computer or electronic retailers. Provide surge protection for the cable that connects the modem to the telephone jack. During an electrical storm, run the notebook on battery power or shut down the notebook and disconnect the power cord. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. For more information, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Regulatory and Safety Notices. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:
Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the product by unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet. If provided with a three-pin attachment plug on your power cable, plug the cable into a grounded (earthed) three-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. 112 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 13 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety &
Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the hard drive or on the Documentation Library CD that is included with the product. WARNING: This notebook is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the notebook to feel warm or hot when used continuously. To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or use the notebook on your lap for extended periods. The notebook complies with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 60950). Getting Help If you cannot solve a notebook problem by using this guide or the supplementary information, including the Troubleshooting guide, on the Documentation Library CD, you may need to contact HP. Using the Help and Support Center Installed on your notebook desktop is the Help and Support Center that provides a comprehensive online resource tool that can be used for the following:
Troubleshooting assistance Downloading the latest driver updates and product information Learning more about using and maintaining your notebook Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 113 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 14 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup With the Help and Support Center, you can get immediate assistance before contacting an HP support specialist. For example, in Help and Support, you can:
Troubleshoot and fix common notebook problems. Learn how to use the software tools for working with your favorite music, video, games, and photos (select models). Get basic and detailed information about Windows XP for customizing your notebook. Set up your notebook for networking and for communicating on the Web. Use administration tools to manage areas such as passwords, file backups, system restore, and user accounts. Learn how to print, fax, run performance and maintenance tools, and install and configure new hardware. Protect your notebook files by using security and privacy features such as Norton AntiVirus software. Undo changes to your notebook with System Restore. Improve performance of your hard drive and battery pack. Download the latest drivers, utilities, software updates, and product documentation for your notebook. Use Tools to view notebook information and diagnose problems. Keep your notebook up-to-date using Windows Update. Find compatible hardware and software. To access the online Help and Support Center:
1. Press the fn+f1 hotkey or select Start > Help and Support. 2. Follow the on-screen directions to select the online Help and Support Center feature that you need. 114 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 15 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Contacting Technical Support Startup If you cannot solve a problem using the Help and Support Center installed on your notebook or the documentation provided with your notebook, you can call technical support. To obtain a list of worldwide customer support telephone numbers, use either of the following methods:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon. Then, near the lower edge of the System Properties window, select the Support Information button. Refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the notebook to contact an HP Customer Care Center. To provide the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the notebook and the following information available when you call:
Notebook serial number and model description, which are provided on labels affixed to the bottom of the notebook. Purchase date, as marked on your sales receipt/invoice. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have displayed. Manufacturer and model of any optional printer connected. Operating system version number and registration number. To view these numbers, select Start > Control Panel >
System > General tab. Determine the version of the system ROM installed on the notebook. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 115 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 16 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Startup 116 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Part 2 Reference Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM 2 System Components Contents Display . 22 Top . 23 TouchPad . 23 Keys . 24 Power Controls . 25 Lights . 26 Audio Buttons . 27 Front Panel . 28 Rear Panel . 29 Connectors and Jacks. 29 Vents . 210 Left Side . 211 Connectors and Jacks. 211 Vents . 212 Right Side. 213 Bottom . 214 Bays and Memory Compartment. 214 Vents . 215 Labels. 216 Additional Standard Components . 217 Cables and Cord. 217 Adapters and Battery Pack . 218 Restoration and Documentation CDs . 219 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 21 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Display Display Display release latch Opens the notebook. 22 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Top TouchPad Top: TouchPad 1 TouchPad on/off button Enables/disables the TouchPad. 2 TouchPad light On: TouchPad is enabled. 3 TouchPad scroll zone*
Scroll up or down. 4 Left and right TouchPad buttons*
Function like the left and right buttons on an external mouse. 5 TouchPad*
Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen.
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of TouchPad features, refer to Setting TouchPad Preferences in chapter 3. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 23 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Keys Top: Keys 1 Function keys 2 fn key Perform system and application tasks. When combined with the fn key, the function keys f1and f3 through f12 perform additional tasks as hotkeys. Refer to the Hotkey Quick Reference section in chapter 3 for details. Combines with other keys to perform system tasks. For example, pressing fn+f8 increases screen brightness. 3 Microsoft logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. 4 Applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. 5 Keypad keys (17) Standard numeric keypad. 24 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Controls System Components Top: Power Controls Power button*
When the notebook is:
Off, press to turn on the notebook. On, briefly press to initiate Hibernation. In Standby, briefly press to resume from Standby. In Hibernation, briefly press to restore from Hibernation. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook.
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the function of the power button or display switch, refer to Managing Power Options in chapter 4. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 25 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Lights Top: Lights 1 Wireless On/Off light On: An integrated wireless device has been enabled. 2 Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on. 3 Num lock light On: Num lock or the keypad is on. 26 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Audio Buttons System Components Top: Audio Buttons 1 Decrease volume button Pressing the left side, decreases system volume. 2 Mute button Mutes or restores volume. 3 Increase volume button Pressing the right side, increases system volume. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 27 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Front Panel Front Panel 1 Display release latch Opens the notebook. 2 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. 3 Hard drive activity light On: The internal hard drive is being accessed. 4 AC power light On: The notebook is receiving AC power. 5 Battery light 6 Power/standby light On: The notebook is receiving battery power. Flashing: A battery pack is malfunctioning and may need to be replaced. On: Notebook is turned on. Flashing: Notebook is in Standby. 28 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Rear Panel Connectors and Jacks System Components Rear Panel: Connectors and Jacks 1 Security cable slot 2 RJ-11 telephone jack 3 RJ-45 network jack 4 USB connectors (3) 5 S-Video jack Attaches an optional security cable to the notebook. Connects a modem cable. (A modem cable is included with select models.) Connects an Ethernet network cable.
(An Ethernet network cable is included with select models.) Connect optional 1.1 or 2.0-compliant USB devices. Connects an optional S-Video device, such as a television, VCR, camcorder, projector, or video capture card. 6 Parallel connector (available on select models) Connects an optional parallel device such as a printer. 7 External monitor connector Connects an optional VGA external monitor or projector. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 29 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Vents Rear Panel: Vents Exhaust vents Provides airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Do not allow a hard surface, such as a printer, or a soft surface, such as a pillow, blanket, rug, or thick clothing, to block airflow. 210 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 11 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Left Side Connectors and Jacks System Components Left Side: Connectors and Jacks 1 Power connector Connects an AC adapter cable. 2 Expansion port 3 USB connector 4 1394 connector 5 Microphone jack 6 Audio line-out jack Connects to an optional HP Notebook Expansion Base. Connects an optional 1.1 or 2.0-compliant USB device. Connects an optional 1394 device, such as a camcorder. Connects an optional monaural or stereo microphone. Connects optional headphones or powered stereo speakers. Also connects the audio function of an audio/video device such as a television or VCR. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 211 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 12 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Vents Left Side: Vents Exhaust vents Provide airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Do not allow a hard surface, such as a printer, or a soft surface, such as a pillow, blanket, rug, or thick clothing, to block airflow. 212 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 13 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Right Side System Components Right Side 1 Infrared port 2 Digital Media slot Provides wireless communication between the notebook and an optional IrDA-compliant device. Supports SD, MMC, Memory Stick, and SmartMedia. 3 Optical drive release button Opens the optical drive. 4 Optical drive*
Supports an optical disc. 5 PC Card eject button 6 PC Card slot Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot. Supports an optional Type I, Type II, or Type III 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card.
*The type of optical drive, such as a CD, DVD, or combination CD/DVD drive, varies by model. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 213 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 14 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Bottom Bays and Memory Compartment Bottom: Bays and Memory Compartment 1 Battery pack release latch 2 Memory compartment Releases a battery pack from the battery bay. Contains 2 memory slots. Depending on the model, when the notebook is shipped either one or both memory slots may be filled with a replaceable memory module. 3 Hard drive bay Holds the internal hard drive. 4 Battery bay Holds a battery pack. 214 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 15 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Vents System Components Bottom: Vents Intake vents Provide airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Do not allow a hard surface, such as a printer, or a soft surface, such as a pillow, blanket, rug, or thick clothing, to block airflow. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 215 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 16 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Labels The labels affixed to the notebook and some notebook components provide information you may need when troubleshooting system problems or traveling internationally with the notebook. The Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label contains the Product Key number. You may need this number to update or troubleshoot problems with the operating system. The system label provides regulatory information about the notebook. The product identification label contains the serial number of the notebook and a code describing the original configuration of the notebook. You will need the notebook serial number if you call customer support. The modem approvals label, which is affixed to an optional internal modem, provides regulatory information. Wireless certification labels, which are specific to various types of optional wireless devices provide regulatory information and lists the countries in which this optional wireless device has been approved for use. 216 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 17 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Additional Standard Components The components included with the notebook vary by region, country, notebook model, and the optional hardware ordered. The following sections identify the standard external accessories and components included with most notebook models. Cables and Cord Additional Standard Components: Cables and Cord 1 Modem cable
(included with select models) 2 Network cable
(included with select models) 3 Power cord*
Connects a modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. A modem cable has a 6-pin, RJ-11 telephone connector at each end. Connects the notebook to an Ethernet network jack. A network cable has an 8-pin, RJ-45 network connector at each end. Connects an AC adapter to an AC electrical outlet.
*Power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 217 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 18 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Adapters and Battery Pack Additional Standard Components: Adapters and Battery Pack 1 AC adapter Converts AC power to DC power. 2 Country-specific modem adapter (included by region as required) Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack. 3 Japan-specific outlet adapter
(Japan only) Connects the AC adapter to a 2-prong electrical outlet. 4 Battery pack Runs the notebook when the notebook is not connected to external power. 218 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 19 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components Restoration and Documentation CDs CDs for repairing or reinstalling software and for obtaining supplementary information about the notebook are included with the notebook. For information about restoring, repairing, or reinstalling software, refer to Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities. For supplementary information about the notebook, refer to the Documentation Library CD. The Documentation Library CD provided with all models includes the following guides:
Maintenance, Shipping and Travel Guide Troubleshooting Guide Modem and Networking Guide Regulatory and Safety Notices Safety & Comfort Guide Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 219 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 20 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM System Components 220 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM 3 Keyboard Contents TouchPad . 32 Identifying TouchPad Components . 32 Using the TouchPad. 33 Setting TouchPad Preferences . 33 Using Hotkey and Shortcut Keys. 34 Identifying fn and Function Keys . 34 Hotkey and Shortcut Key Quick Reference . 35 Hotkey and Shortcut Key Procedures . 36 Hotkey and Shortcut Key Commands . 36 Keypad . 310 Quick Launch Buttons . 311 Using Custom Assignments and Schemes. 312 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 31 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard TouchPad Identifying TouchPad Components The TouchPad includes the following components:
Identifying TouchPad components Button name Default assignment 1 TouchPad on/off button Enables/disables the TouchPad. 2 TouchPad light On: TouchPad is enabled. 3 TouchPad scroll zone Scroll up or down. 4 Left and right TouchPad buttons Function like the left and right buttons on an external mouse. 5 TouchPad Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. 32 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Using the TouchPad The TouchPad provides the navigation, selection, and scroll functions of an optional external mouse. To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want to move the pointer. If the pointer continues to move after you lift your finger from the TouchPad surface, wait a few seconds and the pointer will stop moving. To execute the click functions of the left or right button on an external mouse, press the left or right TouchPad button. To scroll up or down, slide your finger up or down in the scroll zone. To enable or disable the TouchPad, press the TouchPad button. When the TouchPad is enabled, the TouchPad light is on. The notebook turns on with the TouchPad enabled. Users who work with keystrokes rather than mouse actions may prefer to disable the TouchPad to prevent accidental TouchPad activity. Setting TouchPad Preferences Pointer speed and shape, click speed, mouse trails, and other pointing device preferences are set in the operating system Mouse Properties window. To access Mouse Properties, select Start >
Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse icon. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 33 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Using Hotkey and Shortcut Keys Hotkey and shortcut keys are preset combinations of the fn key with other keys on the keyboard. A hotkey is a combination of the fn key and one of the function keys. A shortcut key is a combination of the fn key and a key other than a function key. Identifying fn and Function Keys The icons on the function keys f1, and f3 through f12 represent the hotkey functions available on the notebook. Identifying hotkeys Item Component 1 2 fn key Function keys 34 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Hotkey and Shortcut Key Quick Reference The following table identifies the default hotkey and shortcut key functions. For information about changing the function of the fn+f5 hotkey, refer to the Managing Power Options section in chapter 4. Default Function Key combination Display System information. Open Help and Support window. Open Microsoft Internet Explorer. Switch display and image. Initiate Standby. Initiate QuickLock. Decrease display brightness. Increase display brightness. Play, pause, or resume an audio CD or DVD. Stop an audio CD or DVD. Play the previous track or chapter on an audio CD or DVD. fn+esc fn+f1 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f5 fn+f6 fn+f7 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 fn+f11 Play the next track on an audio CD or DVD. fn+f12 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 35 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Hotkey and Shortcut Key Procedures To use a hotkey or shortcut key command on the notebook keyboard, use either of the following procedures:
Briefly press the fn key, then briefly press the second key of the hotkeys command. Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkeys command, then release both keys at the same time. Hotkey and Shortcut Key Commands Display System Information (fn+esc) Press fn+esc to display information about system hardware components and software version numbers. Press fn+esc a second time to remove the system information from the screen. When viewing system information, the system BIOS date is the version number of the system ROM. The BIOS date may display in a decimal format, such as 10/19/2002 F.07. Open Help and Support Window (fn+f1) The fn+f1 hotkey opens the Help and Support Center. From the Help and Support Center, you can access general information about your notebook, links to software updates and online technical support specialists, and other support features. For more information about the Help and Support window, refer to the Getting Help section in Startup. Open Internet Explorer (fn+f3) The fn+f3 hotkey opens Internet Explorer. After you have set up your Internet or network services and your Internet Explorer home page, you can use the fn+f3 hotkey for quick access to your home page and the Internet. 36 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Switch Display (fn+f4) The fn+f4 hotkey switches the image between display devices connected to the external monitor connector or the S-Video jack on the notebook. For example, if an external monitor is connected to the notebook, pressing the fn+f4 hotkey multiple times will toggle the image between the notebook display, the external monitor display, and a simultaneous display on both the notebook and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the notebook using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f4 hotkey can also toggle images between other devices receiving video information from the notebook. The following five video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f4 hotkey:
LCD (notebook display) External VGA (most external monitors) S-Video (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture boards with S-Video-in jacks) Composite video (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture boards with composite-video-in jacks) Composite video devices can only be connected to the notebook when it is docked in an optional HP Notebook Expansion Base. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 37 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Initiate Standby (fn+f5) The fn+f5 hotkey is set by default to initiate Standby. Standby can be initiated only while the notebook is on. If the notebook is in Hibernation, you must restore from Hibernation before you can initiate Standby. To restore from Hibernation or resume from Standby, briefly press the power button. For more information about using Standby and Hibernation, refer to Power. For information about changing the function of the fn+f5 hotkey, refer in chapter 4 to the Managing Power Options section. Initiate QuickLock (fn+f6) The fn+f6 hotkey initiates the operating system QuickLock security feature. The QuickLock feature disables the keyboard and displays the log on screen. QuickLock does not disable the TouchPad. Before you can use the QuickLock feature, you must set a Windows system password. For instructions, refer to your operating system documentation. After you have set a Windows system password:
To initiate QuickLock, press fn+f6. To exit QuickLock, enter your Windows system password. Decrease Screen Brightness (fn+f7) The fn+f7 hotkey decreases notebook screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increase Screen Brightness (fn+f8) The fn+f8 hotkey increases notebook screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. 38 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Play, Pause, or Resume an Audio CD or DVD (fn+f9) The fn+f9 hotkey functions only when an audio CD or DVD is inserted. If the audio CD or DVD is:
Not playing, press the fn+f9 hotkey to begin or resume the play. Playing, press the fn+f9 hotkey to pause the play. Stop an Audio CD or DVD (fn+f10) The fn+f10 hotkey stops the play of an audio CD or DVD that is playing. Play Previous Track of an Audio CD or DVD (fn+f11) The fn+f11 hotkey plays the previously played track of an audio CD or DVD that is playing. Play Next Track of an Audio CD or DVD (fn+f12) The fn+f12 hotkey plays the next track of an audio CD or DVD that is playing. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 39 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Keypad The keypad consists of 17 keys that can be used like the keys on an external keypad. Identifying the keypad keys 310 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 11 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Quick Launch Buttons The three Quick Launch buttons enable you to use one keystroke to access a software application or to activate a wireless network device. Identifying the Quick Launch buttons Button name 1 Media button Default assignment Launches multimedia application. 2 Picture button Launches digital imaging application. 3 Wireless on/off butfton Turns the wireless network device on and off. The settings for the Quick Launch buttons can be changed. Refer to the next section for information on reassigning these buttons to other applications. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 311 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 12 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Keyboard Using Custom Assignments and Schemes A Quick Launch button can be re-assigned to an Internet or network destination or to any software application or data file. For example, an Quick Launch button can be assigned to open your Internet browser to a favorite Web page or to open an application, such as Microsoft Word, or a document, such as an Excel worksheet, on a notebook or network drive. Button assignments can be grouped into schemes. When you select a scheme, only the button assignments within that scheme are active. Button assignments and schemes are set up, changed, or deleted in the Quick Launch buttons window. To program a Quick Launch button:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Utilities > Quick Launch. 2. On the Quick Launch tab, select the button you want to reprogram. 3. Type a label for the button, then select the application, document, folder, or Web site you want the button to open. If you want a label to appear onscreen when you press a button, select that option on the Onscreen Display tab. 312 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM 4 Power Contents Selecting a Power Source. 42 Understanding Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown . 43 Standby . 43 Hibernation . 44 Shutdown . 45 Initiating Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown . 46 When Leaving Your Work . 46 When External Power Supply is Uncertain . 46 When Using Infrared or Drive Media . 47 Using Default Power Settings . 48 Identifying Power Controls and Indicators . 48 Turning the Notebook or Display On or Off . 49 Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures . 410 Initiating or Resuming from Standby . 411 Initiating or Resuming from Hibernation . 412 Managing Power Options. 413 Using Battery Power . 416 Identifying the Power Lights . 416 Switching Between Battery and External Power. 417 Charging a Battery Pack . 417 Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack . 418 Managing Low-Battery Conditions . 419 Resolving Low-Battery Conditions . 420 Calibrating a Battery Pack. 421 Storing a Battery Pack . 424 Battery Conservation Settings . 425 Replacing a Battery Pack . 426 Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . 427 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 41 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Selecting a Power Source The notebook can run on internal power from a battery pack or on external power from an AC adapter and other devices. The following table describes the best power source for general tasks. Task Work in most software applications. Recommended Power Source Charged battery pack in the notebook External power supplied through the following devices:
AC adapter Optional HP Notebook Expansion Base Charge or calibrate a battery pack in the notebook. Install or modify system software or write to a CD. External power supplied through:
AC adapter Optional HP Notebook Expansion Base External power supplied through:
AC adapter Optional HP Notebook Expansion Base WARNING: This notebook is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the notebook to feel warm or hot when used continuously. To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or use the notebook on your lap for extended periods. The notebook complies with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 60950). 42 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Understanding Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown This section describes Standby, Hibernation, and shutdown and explains when to implement them. Standby and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can be initiated by you or by the system. Standby Standby reduces power to system components that are not in use. When Standby is initiated, your work is saved in random access memory (RAM) and the screen is cleared. Saving your work before initiating Standby is not usually necessary, but is a recommended precaution. When the notebook is in Standby, the power/standby light flashes. When you resume from Standby, your work returns to the screen where you left off. CAUTION: To avoid a complete battery discharge, do not leave your notebook in Standby for extended periods. Connect to an external power source if your notebook will not be used for extended periods. The system will not initiate from Standby through touchpad movement. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 43 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Hibernation Hibernation takes a snapshot of the current system memory, saves it to the hard drive, then shuts down the notebook. When you resume from Hibernation, your work returns to the screen exactly as you left it. When possible, save your work before initiating Hibernation to prevent loss of data. Do not change the notebook configuration during Hibernation. CAUTION: If the configuration of the notebook system is changed during Hibernation, it may not be possible to resume from Hibernation. When the notebook is in Hibernation:
Do not add or remove memory modules. Do not insert or remove the hard drive. Do not connect or disconnect external devices. Do not insert or remove a CD or DVD. Do not insert a PC Card, SD Card, Memory Stick, Smart Media Card, or MMC. If you cannot resume from Hibernation when power is restored to the system, you will be prompted to delete the restoration data and proceed with system boot. Unsaved data will be lost. If a power-on password has been set, the password must be entered to resume from Hibernation. Hibernation is enabled by default, but can be disabled. To reduce the risk of power loss during a low battery condition, users should disable Hibernation only during a battery pack calibration. CAUTION: If Hibernation is disabled, the system does not automatically save your system memory if the notebook reaches a critical low-battery condition. 44 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power To verify that Hibernation is enabled, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options >
Hibernate tab. Be sure that the Enable Hibernation check box is selected. Hibernation will not be displayed as a power option in the Power Options window if it has been disabled. Shutdown Shutdown procedures turn off the notebook. Whether to leave a battery pack in the notebook or in storage depends on how you work:
Leaving the battery pack in the notebook enables the battery pack to charge whenever the notebook is connected to external power and also protects your work during a power outage. A battery pack in the notebook discharges more quickly, even when the notebook is turned off, than a battery pack that has been removed from the notebook and stored in a cool, dry location. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 45 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Initiating Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown The following sections describe when to initiate Standby or Hibernation and when to shut down your notebook. When Leaving Your Work Initiate Standby for shorter times and Hibernation for longer times or for more power conservation. The amount of time a battery pack can support Standby or Hibernation or hold a charge varies by notebook configuration and the condition of the battery pack. Initiating Standby clears the screen, uses less power than leaving the notebook on, and your work returns quickly to the screen when you resume from Standby. A fully charged new battery pack can typically support Standby for up to 48 hours. Initiating Hibernation clears the screen and uses much less power than Standby. Returning to work saved in Hibernation takes longer than returning to work saved in Standby, but is faster than returning to your place manually after restarting the notebook. A fully charged new battery pack can typically support Hibernation for several weeks. To extend the life of the battery pack when the notebook will be disconnected from external power for an extended period, shut down the notebook, remove the battery pack, and store it in a cool, dry location. When External Power Supply is Uncertain If an external power supply is uncertain, for example, because of an electrical storm, save your work, then initiate Hibernation or shut down the notebook. 46 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power When Using Infrared or Drive Media Standby and Hibernation interfere with the use of infrared communication and drive media. If the notebook is in Standby or Hibernation, you cannot initiate an infrared transmission. If Standby or Hibernation is accidentally initiated while drive media (such as a diskette, disk, CD, or DVD) is in use:
Your playback may be interrupted. You may see a warning message: Putting the computer into Hibernation or Standby may stop the playback. Do you want to continue? Select No. Resume from Hibernation or Standby by briefly pressing the power button. Audio and video may resume, or you may need to restart the media. CAUTION: Do not initiate Standby or Hibernation while using drive media. Doing so may result in video and audio degradation and loss of audio and video playback functionality. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 47 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Using Default Power Settings This section explains the default Standby, Hibernation, and shutdown procedures and includes information about turning the display on or off. You can change many of these settings according to your preferences. If you want to change the default settings, refer to Setting Power Options later in this chapter. Identifying Power Controls and Indicators Standby, Hibernation, shutdown, and display procedures use the following controls and indicators:
1 Power button 2 Initiate Standby hotkey (fn+f5) 3 Power/standby light Identifying Standby, Hibernation, shutdown, and display controls and indicators 48 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Turning the Notebook or Display On or Off Task Procedure Results Turn on the notebook. Shut down the notebook.*
The power/standby light turns on. The operating system loads. The power/standby light turns off. The operating system shuts down. The notebook turns off. Press the power button. Pressing the power button turns on the notebook from Standby, Hibernation, or shutdown. Save your work and close all open applications. Then:
Press the power button and follow the onscreen instructions
(if displayed) for shutting down the notebook. Shutdown the notebook through the operating system. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off.
*If the system is unresponsive, and you are unable to shut down the notebook with this procedure, refer to the next section, Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 49 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures If the notebook does not respond and you are unable to use normal Windows shutdown procedure, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:
Press ctrl+alt+delete. Select the Shut Down button, then select Shut down from the drop-down list. Press and hold down the power button for at least 4 seconds. Unplug the notebook from external power and remove the battery pack. For battery pack removal instructions, refer to the Replacing a Battery Pack section, later in this chapter. CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures may result in the loss of unsaved data. 410 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 11 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Initiating or Resuming from Standby Task Procedure Result Initiate Standby With the notebook on, use either of the following procedures:
Press the fn+f5 hotkey. Select Start > Turn off Computer > Stand by. If the notebook is running on battery power, the system initiates standby after 10 minutes of notebook inactivity (default setting). If the notebook is running on external power, the system does not initiate standby. Power settings and timeouts can be changed in the Power Options window. Press the power button. Allow the system to initiate standby Resume from user-initiated or system-initiated Standby. The power/standby light flashes. The screen clears. The power/standby light flashes. The screen clears. The power/standby light turns on. Your work returns to the screen. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 411 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 12 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Initiating or Resuming from Hibernation Task Procedure Result Initiate Hibernation Allow the system to initiate Hibernation (with Hibernation enabled) Resume from user-initiated or system-initiated Hibernation. With the notebook on, use either of the following procedures:
Briefly press the power button. Select Start > Shut Down >
Hibernate. (If the Hibernate option is not displayed, press and hold shift.) If the notebook is in Standby, you must resume from Standby before you can initiate Hibernation. If the notebook is running on battery power, the system initiates Hibernation after 30 minutes of notebook inactivity or when the battery pack reaches a critical low-battery condition. If the notebook is running on external power, the system will not initiate Hibernation. Power settings and timeouts can be changed in the Power Options window. Press the power button. If the system initiated Hibernation because of a critical low-battery condition, connect external power or insert a charged battery pack before you press the power button. The power/standby light turns off. The screen clears. The power/standby light turns off. The screen clears. The power/standby light turns on. Your work returns to the screen. 412 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 13 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Managing Power Options Many of the default power settings, such as timeouts and alarms, can be changed in Power Options. For example, you can set an audio alert to warn you when the battery reaches a low-power condition. By default, when the notebook is on:
Briefly pressing the power button initiates Hibernation. Pressing the fn+f5 hotkey, called the sleep button in the operating system, initiates Standby. The display switch turns off the display. The display switch is activated by closing the display. Accessing the Power Options Window To change the function of the power button, the fn+f5 hotkey, or the display switch:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Advanced tab. To change the power button function, select a function from the drop-down list for When I Press The Power Button On My Computer. To change the function of the fn+f5 hotkey, select a function from the drop-down list for When I Press The Sleep Button On My Computer. To change the display switch function, select a function from the drop-down list for When I Close The Lid Of My Portable Computer. 2. Select the OK button. The Hibernate function is available in the power button, sleep button, and display switch drop-down lists only if Hibernation is enabled. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 413 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 14 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Displaying the Power Meter Icon The Power Meter icon changes shape to indicate whether the notebook is running on a battery pack or external power. Double-click the icon to display the Power Options window. To hide or show the Power Meter icon on the taskbar:
1. Access the Power Options window. 2. Select the Advanced tab. 3. Select or clear the Always show icon on the taskbar check box. 4. Select the OK button. If you cannot see an icon you have placed on the taskbar, the icon may be hidden. Select the arrow or vertical bar on the taskbar and expand it to view icons. Setting or Changing a Power Scheme The Power Schemes tab in the Power Options window assigns power levels to system components. You can assign different schemes depending on whether the notebook is running on a battery pack or external power. You can also set a power scheme that initiates Standby or turns off the display or hard drive after a time interval that you specify. To set a power scheme:
1. Access the Power Options window > Power Schemes tab. 2. Select the power scheme you wish to modify, and adjust options in the lists on the screen. 3. Select Apply. 414 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 15 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Using a Security Password You can add a security feature that prompts you for a password when the notebook turns on or resumes from Standby or Hibernation. To set a password prompt, access the Power Options window >
Advanced tab. Select the check box for Prompt For Password When the Computer resumes from Standby, and select OK. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 415 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 16 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Using Battery Power Identifying the Power Lights Battery pack procedures refer to the front panel lights:
Identifying the battery and power/standby lights Top: TouchPad 1 Power/standby light On when the notebook has power. 2 Battery light 3 AC power light On in the absence of AC power, when the notebook is running on battery power. Flashing indicates that the battery pack is malfunctioning and may need to be replaced. On when notebook is connected to AC power. When AC power is available, the battery will charge. 416 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 17 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Switching Between Battery and External Power The notebook switches between AC power and battery power according to the availability of an external AC power source, always preferring AC power. If the notebook contains a charged battery pack and is running on external AC power, the notebook will switch to battery power only if the AC adapter is disconnected from the notebook. Keeping a battery pack in the notebook enables the battery pack to charge whenever the notebook is connected to external power and also protects your work in case of a power outage. On the other hand, a battery pack in the notebook slowly discharges even when the notebook is powered off. To prolong battery life, remove and store the battery pack if you will not be using the notebook for 2 weeks or more. Refer to Storing a Battery Pack later in this chapter for details. Charging a Battery Pack The battery pack charges whenever the notebook is connected to external power through an AC adapter. The battery pack charges whether the notebook is turned off or turned on, but charges most quickly when the notebook is turned off. When the notebook is turned on, charging times are longer and vary with system activity. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 417 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 18 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack Obtaining Accurate Charge Information To increase the accuracy of all battery charge displays:
Allow the battery pack to fully discharge before charging it. Charge the battery pack fully. Even a new battery pack can display charge information inaccurately if it has not been fully charged. Fully charging and discharging the battery pack will reduce the need for battery calibration. Displaying Charge Information To display battery charge information on the screen, select Start >
Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Meter tab. Power Meter displays battery status in both percent and time:
The percent indicates the amount of charge remaining in the battery pack. The time indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery pack if the battery pack continues to provide power at the current level. For example, the time remaining will decrease if you start playing a DVD and will increase if you stop playing a DVD. 418 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 19 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Managing Low-Battery Conditions Some low-battery condition alerts and system responses can be changed in the Power Options window of the operating system. The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Preferences set in the Power Options window do not affect lights. Identifying Low-Battery Conditions This section explains how to identify low and critical battery conditions. Low-Battery Condition When a battery pack that is the sole power source for the notebook reaches a low-battery condition (5 percent of a full charge), the battery light blinks. Critical Low-Battery Condition If a low-battery condition is not resolved, the notebook enters a critical low-battery condition (3 percent of a full charge). In a critical low-battery condition:
If Hibernation is enabled and the notebook is on or in Standby, the notebook initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the notebook is on or in Standby, the notebook remains briefly in Standby, then shuts down and loses your unsaved work. To verify that Hibernation is enabled, be sure that the Enable Hibernate Support check box on the Hibernate tab is selected. To access the tab select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options icon. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 419 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 20 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Resolving Low-Battery Conditions CAUTION: If the notebook has reached a critical low-battery condition and has begun to initiate Hibernation, do not restore power until the Power/Standby light turns off. When External Power Is Available To resolve a low-battery condition when external power is available, connect the AC adapter. When a Charged Battery Pack Is Available To resolve a low-battery condition when a charged battery pack is available, turn off the notebook or initiate Hibernation, insert a charged battery pack, then turn on the notebook. When No Power Source Is Available To resolve a low-battery condition when no power source is available, initiate Hibernation, or save your work and shut down the notebook. When the Notebook Cannot Exit Hibernation To resolve a low-battery condition when the notebook lacks the power to exit Hibernation:
1. Insert a charged battery pack or connect external power. 2. Exit Hibernation by briefly pressing the power button. 420 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 21 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Calibrating a Battery Pack When to Calibrate Even if a battery pack is heavily used, it should not be necessary to calibrate it more than once a month. It is not necessary to calibrate a new battery pack before first use. Calibrate the battery pack under the following conditions:
When battery charge displays seem inaccurate. When you observe a significant change in battery run time. When the battery pack has not been used for one month or more. How to Calibrate To calibrate a battery pack, you must fully charge, fully discharge, then fully recharge the battery pack. Charging the Battery Pack Charge the battery pack while the notebook is in use. To charge the battery pack:
1. Insert the battery pack into the notebook. For instructions, refer to Replacing a Battery Pack later in this chapter. 2. Connect the notebook to external power. (The battery light is on as the battery pack charges.) 3. Leave the notebook connected to external power until the battery pack is fully charged. (The battery light turns off.) Discharging the Battery Pack Hibernation is enabled by default, but can be disabled. Before you begin the full discharge, disable Hibernation. To disable Hibernation, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab. Then clear the Enable Hibernation check box. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 421 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 22 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power CAUTION: If you plan to leave the notebook unattended during discharge, save your work before starting the discharge procedure. To fully discharge the battery pack:
1. Select the power icon on the taskbar or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Schemes tab. 2. Record all settings in the Plugged In column and all settings in the Running On Batteries column, so you can reset them after calibration. 3. Use the drop-down lists to set each item in both columns to Never. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Disconnect the notebook from the external power source, but do not turn off the notebook. 6. Run the notebook on battery power until the battery pack is fully discharged. When the battery pack is fully discharged, the battery light turns off and the notebook shuts down. If you use the notebook occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from your system during the discharge process:
The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically while the notebook is idle. System-initiated Standby will not occur. 422 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 23 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Recharging the Battery Pack 1. Connect the notebook to external power and keep the notebook connected until the battery pack is fully recharged and the battery light turns off. You can use the notebook while the battery pack is recharging, but the battery pack will charge faster if the notebook is turned off. 2. Select the Power icon on the taskbar or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Schemes tab. 3. Reenter the settings you recorded for the items in the Plugged In column and the Running on Batteries column. 4. Select the OK button. CAUTION: After calibrating the battery pack, reenable Hibernation:
select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab, then select the Enable Hibernation check box. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 423 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 24 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Storing a Battery Pack If the notebook will be unused and unplugged for more than 2 weeks, remove and store the battery pack. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery pack, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. High temperatures accelerate the self-discharge rate of a stored battery pack. To prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, keep it in a cool, dry place. Use the following table to estimate how long you can safely store a battery pack. The storage times provided are based on a battery pack that contains 50 percent of a full charge. A fully charged battery pack can be safely stored longer. Temperature Range F Temperature Range C Safe Storage Time 115140 79113 3277 4660 2645 025 Less than 1 month No more than 3 months 1 year 424 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 25 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Battery Conservation Settings Power Using the following battery conservation settings and procedures extends the run time of a battery pack. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect from the notebook any external devices that use power from the notebook. Battery run time is not affected by external devices that are plugged into an external power source. Stop or remove a PC Card you are not using. For more information, refer to the Using a PC Card section in Chapter 8. Disable or remove a Digital Media card (SD, MMC, Memory Stick, or SmartMedia) you are not using. Lower screen brightness. Lower system volume. Turn off a device connected to the S-Video jack. If you leave your work, initiate Standby or Hibernation or shut down the notebook. Select a short wait time, 5 minutes or less, for the monitor timeout. To change monitor timeout settings, select Start >
Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Meter tab. Select a short wait time from the Turn Off Monitor drop-down list, then select OK. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 425 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 26 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power Replacing a Battery Pack CAUTION: To prevent loss of work when removing a battery pack that is the only power source, initiate Hibernation or turn off the notebook before removing the battery pack. To replace the battery pack:
1. Turn the notebook upside down. To remove a battery pack, slide the battery release latch 1. (The battery pack tilts upward.) Then pull the battery pack out of the battery bay 2. Removing a battery pack 426 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 27 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power To insert a battery pack, insert the alignment tab on the battery pack into the alignment slot on the notebook, then tilt the battery pack downward until it snaps into place. Inserting a battery pack 2. To restore from Hibernation or to turn on the notebook, press the power button. Disposing of a Used Battery Pack For information about recycling or disposing of a used battery pack, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 427 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 28 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Power 428 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM 5 Drives Contents Understanding Drives. 52 Adding a Drive to the System . 52 Types of Drives . 52 Caring for Drives . 53 Hard Drive . 54 Identifying the Hard Drive Activity Light. 54 Replacing the Internal Hard Drive. 55 Optical Drive . 58 Inserting an Optical Disc . 59 Removing an Optical Disc (With Power) . 510 Removing an Optical Disc (Without Power). 511 Playing an Optical Disc . 512 Setting the Boot Order . 514 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 51 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Understanding Drives The hard drive and optical (CD/DVD) drive are standard features of the notebook, but the optical drive features vary by model. Some notebooks include a diskette drive and/or a USB Digital drive. Adding a Drive to the System Drives enable you to store and access data. An optional external drive can be added to the system by connecting it to one of the USB (Universal Serial Bus) or 1394 connectors on the notebook. Additional data storage can be added with Digital Media including Secure Digital Card, Multimedia Card, Smart Media, and Memory Stick. Types of Drives Hard drives are for the storage of data files and of software such as system files, applications, and drivers. A hard drive is sometimes called a hard disk drive. Optical drives include CD and DVD drives. Optical drives support DVDs and/or CDs, often called discs, which are used to store or transport data and to play music and movies. DVDs have a higher capacity than CDs. The notebook can read or write to optical drives as described in the following table. Optical Drive DVD-ROM drive DVD/CD-RW drive DVD+RW Read Write Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Diskette drives support diskettes, which are used to store or transport data. The notebook can read or write to any diskette. A diskette drive is sometimes called a floppy disk drive. 52 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Caring for Drives Drives are fragile notebook components that must be handled with care. The following cautions apply to all drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To prevent loss or damage to the notebook or a drive:
Handle a drive carefully. Do not drop it. When inserting a drive, use only enough pressure to seat the drive. Excessive force can damage drive connectors. Do not spray a drive with a cleaner or other liquid or expose it to temperature extremes. Do not remove the primary hard drive (the hard drive in the hard drive bay) except for repair or replacement. Electrostatic discharge can damage electronic components. To prevent electrostatic damage to the notebook or a drive:
Discharge yourself from static electricity before handling a drive by touching a grounded metal object, and Avoid touching the connectors on a drive. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer to the Regulatory and Safety Notices on the Documentation Library CD. Avoid exposing a hard drive or a diskette to devices with magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, usually while it is placed on a conveyor belt, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a hard drive or a diskette. If you mail a drive, ship it in packaging that protects it from shock, vibration, temperature, and high humidity. Label the package FRAGILE. CAUTION: To prevent damage to drive media:
Do not open the metal shutter of a diskette or touch the disk within the diskette case. Do not expose a diskette to a strong magnetic field, such as the security field used by a walk-through security device or a handheld security wand. Clean a CD or DVD only with a disc cleaning kit, available from most electronics retailers. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 53 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Hard Drive This section discusses the primary hard drive of the notebook. Identifying the Hard Drive Activity Light The hard drive activity light turns on when the internal hard drive is being accessed. Identifying the hard drive activity light 54 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Replacing the Internal Hard Drive The hard drive in the hard drive bay is the internal hard drive. Remove the internal hard drive only for repair or replacement. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and loss of work, do not begin this procedure until you have:
Saved your work, closed all open applications, and shut down the notebook. Disconnected the notebook from external power and removed the battery pack. 1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the notebook and close the display. 3. Disconnect the notebook from external power. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Turn the notebook upside down. 6. Remove the 4 hard drive retaining screws from the hard drive bay. Removing the hard drive retaining screws Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 55
| 1 2 3 | CRN 10069 Q2 HP PP2180 user manual 2 of 2 | Users Manual | 3.89 MiB | / May 08 2003 |
Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives 7. Remove the hard drive cover 1. 8. Using the handle, unseat the hard drive by sliding the hard drive towards the edge of the notebook 2, then remove it from the hard drive bay 3. Removing an internal hard drive 56 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives 9. To install a hard drive, lower the hard drive into the hard drive bay 1, then slide the hard drive away from the notebook edge until it is fully seated 2. Lower the hard drive cover onto the hard drive bay 3. Installing an internal hard drive Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 57 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives 10. If you have installed a hard drive, reinsert the 4 hard drive retaining screws. (If you removed but did not replace a hard drive, put the retaining screws in a safe place.) Replacing the hard drive retaining screws Optical Drive CAUTION: To avoid playback distortion or damage to optical media, stop the CD or DVD and exit media software before inserting or removing an optical drive. 58 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Inserting an Optical Disc 1. Turn on the notebook. 2. Press the release button 1 on the drive bezel to release the media tray, then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2. 3. Position a CD or one-sided DVD over the tray, label side up. 4. Gently press the center of the disc onto the tray spindle 3 until the disc snaps into place. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. (If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc to position it over the tray spindle, then press it down into position.) 5. Close the media tray 4. Inserting an optical disc into the optical drive Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 59 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Removing an Optical Disc (With Power) 1. Turn on the notebook. 2. Press the release button 1 on the drive bezel to release the media tray, then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2. 3. Remove the disc from the tray by gently pushing down on the spindle while pulling up on the outer edges of the disc 3. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remove it. 4. Close the media tray. 5. Place the disc in a protective case. Removing an optical disc from the optical drive when power is available 510 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 11 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Removing an Optical Disc (Without Power) If the notebook is turned off or if no power is available, the release button on the optical drive will not work. To remove a disc from an optical drive without using the release button:
1. Insert a small object like the end of a paper clip into the release access 1 in the front bezel of the drive. 2. Press gently on the paper clip until the media tray is released, then pull the tray out until it is fully extended 2. 3. Remove the disc from the tray by gently pushing down on the spindle while pulling up on the outer edges of the disc 3. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remove it. 4. Place the disc in a protective case. Removing an optical disc from the optical drive when power is not available Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 511 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 12 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Playing an Optical Disc You can play a CD in a CD drive or a DVD drive. You can play a DVD only in a DVD drive. The information in this section applies to most optical drives and most disc software. For information about specific disc software, including Windows Media Player, WinDVD, and Easy CD Creator, refer to Using Multimedia Software in chapter 6. Displaying Optical Disc Contents When you insert a CD or DVD into the system, the notebook can play the medium, display its contents, take no action, or display a response prompt on the screen. You can choose how the notebook responds to the insertion of a medium by using the operating system AutoPlay feature. When AutoPlay is enabled, in most cases your notebook responds to the following procedures as described:
To prevent an audio CD from opening when AutoPlay is enabled on the drive containing it, press the shift key as you insert the CD. To display the contents of a drive medium when the contents are not displayed by AutoPlay:
1. 2. Select Start > Run, then type:
Insert the medium into the drive. x:
where x = the designation of the drive containing the disc. 3. Press enter. 512 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 13 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Protecting Playback CAUTION: Inserting or removing any device while running any multimedia application may pause or stop the play. CAUTION: Initiating Standby or Hibernation while playing a drive medium may stop the play or diminish the quality of the play. If Standby or Hibernation is accidentally initiated during playback:
If you see the warning message Putting the computer into Hibernation or Standby may stop the playback. Do you want to continue? select No. (Audio and video may resume or you may need to restart the drive medium.) If Standby or Hibernation initiates and no warning message is displayed, resume from Hibernation or Standby by briefly pressing the power button, then restart the medium. Observing the Copyright Warning It is a criminal offense, under applicable copyright laws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including computer programs, films, broadcasts, and sound recordings. This notebook should not be used for such purposes. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 513 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 14 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Drives Setting the Boot Order By default, the notebook starts up from the internal hard drive. You can set the notebook to start up from any bootable CD or DVD in the optical drive. A bootable CD or DVD contains files needed by the notebook to start up and operate properly. On some models, you can also start up from a drive connected to the notebook by USB. Startup preferences are set in the Setup utility. The Setup utility is not a Windows utility and does not support the TouchPad. For information about using the Setup utility, refer to the Using the Setup Utility section in Chapter 9. 514 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM 6 Multimedia Contents Adjusting Volume . 63 Using the Volume Buttons . 63 Using the Volume Control. 64 Using the Speakers. 65 Connecting an Audio Device . 65 Identifying the Audio Jacks. 66 Using the Microphone Jack . 67 Using the Audio Line-Out Jack . 67 Connecting an S-Video Device . 68 Connecting the Audio . 68 Connecting the Video . 68 Turning a Video Device On and Off . 69 Changing the Color Television Format . 69 Using Multimedia Software . 610 Playing Audio and Video CDs with Windows Media Player . 610 Playing Video CDs and DVDs with InterVideo WinDVD . 611 Creating CDs with Roxio Easy CD &
DVD Creator . 613 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 61 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Preparing to Use Easy CD & DVD Creator . 615 Formatting Recording Media. 616 Creating CDs . 617 Erasing Recorded Media with Roxio Easy CD &
DVD Creator . 617 Selecting Easy CD & DVD Creator Settings . 618 Creating DVDs Using InterVideo WinDVD Creator. 619 62 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Adjusting Volume Volume can be adjusted by using the audio buttons on the notebook or by using the volume control software. The mute button overrides all software volume settings. Using the Volume Buttons To adjust volume using the audio buttons:
To increase volume, press the increase volume button 3. To mute or restore volume, press the mute button 2. To decrease volume, press the decrease volume button 1. Identifying the audio buttons Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 63 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Using the Volume Control To place the volume control icon on the taskbar:
Select Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices icon > Volume tab. Select the Place volume icon in the task bar check box. To adjust volume, click the volume control icon. To increase or decrease volume, select the slide bar and drag it up or down. To mute or restore volume, select or clear the Mute check box. If you cannot see an icon you have placed on the taskbar, the icons may be hidden. Select the arrow or thick vertical bar on the taskbar and expand to view icons. 64 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Using the Speakers The internal speakers plays sound in stereo from applications, the operating system, games, drive media, the Internet, and other sources. If an external device, such as a headset, is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled. Identifying the internal speakers Connecting an Audio Device WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones or a headset. CAUTION: To prevent possible damage to an external device, do not plug a monaural (single sound channel) plug into the audio-out jack. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 65 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Identifying the Audio Jacks The notebook has 2 audio jacks:
The microphone jack 1, sometimes called the line-in jack, connects an optional monaural or stereo microphone. The audio line-out jack 2, sometimes called a line-out jack, connects headphones or external stereo speakers. Identifying the audio jacks 66 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Using the Microphone Jack When connecting a microphone to the microphone jack, use a monaural microphone with a 3.5-mm plug. A monaural electret condenser microphone is recommended. If you connect a stereo microphone, left channel sound will record on both channels. If you connect a dynamic microphone, the recommended sensitivity may not be achieved. Using the Audio Line-Out Jack The audio-out jack is also used to connect the audio functions of an audio/video device such as a television or VCR. When you connect a device to the audio-out jack:
Use only a 3.5-mm plug. For best sound quality, use 24-ohm to 32-ohm headphones. The internal speakers are disabled. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 67 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Connecting an S-Video Device Connecting the Audio The S-Video jack supports video signals only. If you are setting up a configuration that combines audio and video functions, such as playing a DVD movie on your notebook and displaying it on your television, you will need a standard 3.5-mm audio cable available from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug the stereo end of the audio cable into the notebook audio-out jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the audio input jack on the external device. Connecting the Video To transmit video signals through the S-Video jack, you will need a standard S-Video cable available from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug either end of the S-Video cable into the notebook S-Video jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the S-Video input jack on the external device. Identifying the S-Video jack 68 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Turning a Video Device On and Off When an S-Video device is turned on, an image is displayed. When the device is off, an image is not displayed. To turn on a video device that is connected to the notebook:
Start or restart the notebook. Repeatedly pressing the fn+f4 hotkey toggles the image between the notebook display, any connected external monitor, and simultaneous display of the notebook and connected monitor. Switching the image to a connected video device turns on the video device. Switching the image to the notebook display only turns off the video device. The preceding methods for turning a video device on and off are interchangeable. If you turned off a connected device in Windows, for example, you can turn on the device by either restarting the notebook or pressing the fn+f4 hotkey. To conserve power, turn off the device before disconnecting the device from the system. Changing the Color Television Format Color television formats are modes by which television video signals are sent and received. To send signals between the notebook and a television, both the notebook and the television must be using the same color television format. The NTSC format is common in the United States, Canada, Japan, and South Korea. The PAL format is common in Europe, China, Russia, and Africa, and the PAL-M format is common in Brazil. Other South American and Central American countries may use NTSC, PAL, or PAL-M. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 69 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Region-specific formats are set at the factory for most notebooks, but the region setting can be changed on any notebook. Refer to Changing DVD Region Settings later in this chaper. Color television format settings are changed in the Setup utility. The Setup utility is not a Windows utility and does not support the TouchPad. For information about using the Setup utility, refer to the Using the Setup Utility section in Chapter 9. Using Multimedia Software This section provides guidelines for playing CDs and DVDs using Windows Media Player and WinDVD. This software supports the integrated optical drive on your notebook. Playing Audio and Video CDs with Windows Media Player The Windows Media Player application is a program included with the operating system. Use Windows Media Player primarily for playing audio CDs. Although video CDs can be played using Windows Media Player, InterVideo WinDVD provides higher quality playback. To open Windows Media Player and play a CD:
1. Insert a CD into the optical drive, then close the tray. 2. If you do not have Autorun enabled, select Start > All Programs > Windows Media Player. 3. Select the Play button to play the CD.To stop the CD, use the on-screen Play button or Stop button, or use the media hotkeys described in the Using Hotkey and Shortcut Keys section of Chapter 3. To access Windows Media Player Help, select Help on the Windows Media Player menu bar. 610 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 11 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Playing Video CDs and DVDs with InterVideo WinDVD InterVideo WinDVD is an application that enables you to play DVD movies or video CDs. WinDVD is preinstalled on the notebook. Some DVDs contain third-party DVD player programs such as PCFriendly that may interfere with WinDVD. Installing WinDVD If WinDVD has been uninstalled and you insert a DVD that contains a non-HP player program, you are prompted to install that non-HP player program. If you prefer to use WinDVD, decline the non-HP player installation, close the installation window, and re-install WinDVD. To re-install WinDVD:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. A setup wizard loads, and a list of applications is displayed. 2. Select WinDVD and follow the instructions on the screen. For more information about WinDVD, select Help on the WinDVD menu bar. Playing a Video CD or DVD For best playback quality, save and close all files and software unrelated to playing the DVD or video CD. If a DVD displays a Playback Of Content From This Region Is Not Permitted error message, stop the DVD, change the region setting, then restart the DVD. For information about changing the region setting, refer to Changing DVD Region Settings in this chapter. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 611 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 12 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia To play a DVD or video CD:
1. Insert the DVD or video CD into the optical drive. 2. Assign WinDVD to play the video:
If the Microsoft Windows XP AppPicker window is displayed, select Play Video By Using WinDVD. If the Microsoft Windows XP AppPicker window is not displayed, select Start > All Programs > InterVideo WinDVD > InterVideo WinDVD. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. After you insert a DVD, a short pause is normal before Autorun opens the DVD and WinDVD Player. Changing DVD Region Settings Most DVDs that contain copyrighted files also contain region codes. The region codes help protect copyrights internationally. You can play a DVD containing a region code only if the region code on the DVD matches the region setting on your DVD drive. If the region code on a DVD does not match the region setting on your drive, a Playback Of Content From This Region Is Not Permitted message is displayed when you insert the DVD. To play the DVD, you must change the region setting on your DVD drive. CAUTION: The region setting on your DVD drive can be changed only 5 times. The region setting you select the fifth time becomes the permanent region setting on the drive. The number of allowable region changes remaining on the drive is displayed in the Remaining Times Until Permanent field in the WinDVD window. The number in the field includes the fifth and permanent change. 612 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 13 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia To change the region setting on drive media:
1. Open WinDVD by doing one of the following:
Select the WinDVD icon on the taskbar. Select Start > All Programs > InterVideo WinDVD >
InterVideo WinDVD. 2. Right-click on the WinDVD player window. 3. Select Setup. 4. Select the button for the region. 5. Select the OK button. Creating CDs with Roxio Easy CD &
DVD Creator Roxio Easy CD & DVD Creator is a data transfer utility that enables you to create or copy optical drive media. Before you can create CDs, you must install this application using the installation CD provided with your notebook. If your optical drive has DVD+RW capability, DVDs can be used with Easy CD and DVD Creator to store large amounts of data on a disc. To build DVDs containing movies, refer to Creating DVDs Using InterVideo WinDVD Creator, later in this chapter. When Easy CD & DVD Creator is installed on your notebook model, a Roxio Easy CD and DVD Creator icon is displayed in Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD and DVD Creator. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 613 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 14 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Understanding Easy CD & DVD Creator Features Easy CD & DVD Creator includes the following 4 applications:
Application Disc Copier Creator Classic Drag-To-Disc Allows you to create backup copies of personal discs. create CDs backups or archives of files on your hard drive. drag and drop files to a CD or DVD and automatically record data was you would with a floppy disk. Drag-to-Disc does not copy and burn audio files. Roxio Label Creator create personalized labels for your discs. Additional applications that appear in the Roxio Easy CD & DVD Creator online Users Guide are not available on this notebook model, as purchased. These applications can be accessed through the start menu or through the Home window. To open the Home window select Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD and DVD Creator >
Home. For a more information concerning Easy CD & DVD Creator applications, features, or use, refer to the Roxio Easy CD & DVD Creator online Userfs Guide. To access the guide, select Start >
All Programs > Roxio Easy CD and DVD Creator > Users Guide. 614 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 15 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Preparing to Use Easy CD & DVD Creator CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to a CD or DVD:
Before writing to a CD, connect the notebook to a reliable external power source. Do not write to a CD while the notebook is running on battery power. Before writing to a CD, close all open applications (including screen savers and antivirus software) except Easy CD and DVD Creator. Do not copy directly from a CD to another CD or from a network drive to a CD. Instead, copy from a CD or network drive to your hard drive, then copy from your hard drive to the CD. Do not type on the notebook keyboard or move the notebook while the notebook is writing to a CD. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Choosing Recording Media HP recommends using high-quality media that correspond to the maximum speed of the optical drive. The notebook can write or copy to CDs which provide one-time, non-erasable recording
(CD-R) or to CDs which provide erasable recording (CD-RW). In order to write data to a CD, you must use a blank CD-R or disc or a CD-RW disc on which the format has not been finalized. For more information about choosing media for use with Easy CD and DVD Creator, refer to the Roxio Easy CD and DVD Creator online Users Guide. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 615 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 16 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Responding to the UDF Prompt The first time you insert a CD into an optical drive, you may be prompted to install Universal Disk Format (UDF) Reader. The UDF Reader is preinstalled on select notebook models. If UDF Reader is installed on your notebook, a CD created with the Drag-to-Disc application can be used in a compatible optical drive on a computer without Drag-to-Disc, provided you select the Make this disc readable on any CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive option during the eject process. Formatting Recording Media To record information to a disc using Drag-to-Disc, use a CD formatted for Drag-to-Disc. Drag-to-Disc will automatically format blank discs. Formatting a disc in Drag-to-Disc may take up to 45 minutes to complete. To record information to a CD using Creator Classic or Disc Copier, do not use a CD formatted for Drag-to-Disc or erase the information from a rewriteable disc to use it again. To manually format a disc so that it can be used in Creator Classic or Disc Copier:
1. Insert a disc into the optical drive. 2. Open Drag-to-Disc by selecting Start > All Programs >
Roxio Easy CD and DVD Creator > Drag-to-Disc. 3. Open the Drag-to-Disc menu. 4. Select Manually Format Disc, and choose the format settings. To format a disc for use with only Drag-to-Disc, select Quick Format. To format a disc for use with another application, select Full Format. 5. Select OK. 616 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 17 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia To record information to a CD using Creator Classic or Disc Copier, do not use a CD formatted for Drag-to-Disc or erase the information from a rewriteable disc to use it again. Creating CDs Refer to the Roxio Easy CD and DVD Creator online Users Guide for details on burning CDs. Erasing Recorded Media with Roxio Easy CD
& DVD Creator You cannot erase data from a CD-R or DVD+R disc. Only CD-RW or DVD+RW discs can be used in the following process. Erasing recorded media in Drag-to-Disc or Creator Classic may take up to 45 minutes to complete. Erasing Recorded Media with Drag-to-Disc To erase recorded media created with Drag-to-Disc:
1. Insert the CD into the optical drive. 2. Open the Drag-to-Disc window by selecting Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD Creator > Drag-to-Disc. 3. Open the Drag-to-Disc menu. 4. Select Erase Disc. 5. Select OK. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 617 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 18 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Erasing Recorded Media with Creator Classic To erase recorded media formatted with Creator Classic:
1. Insert the CD into the optical drive. 2. Open the Creator Classic window by selecting Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD and DVD Creator > Creator Classic. 3. In the Source window, select the optical drive containing the disc you wish to erase. 4. On the Creator Classic menu bar, select Disc > Erase Disc. Selecting Easy CD & DVD Creator Settings To use Drag-to-Disc, Creator Classic, or Disc Copier, the default settings shown in the following table must be selected. These settings are compatible; for example, the settings for Drag-to-Disc do not conflict with the settings for Disc Copier. Application Required Settings Drag-to-Disc Enable Auto Insert Notification*
Creator Classic Disable Disc-at-Once**
and Enable Track-at-Once**
Disc Copier Disable Disc-at-Once
* Auto Insert Notification settings are selected through the operating system.
** Disk-at-Once and Track-at-Once are recording methods that appear in the Record Setup window after you begin burning a CD. 618 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 19 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia The following table describes the Track-at-Once and Disc-at-Once recording methods. Option Description Track-at-Once Disc-at-Once Writes data to the disc in multiple passes and allows you to copy one track or data file at a time to the disc. Additional options allow you to choose whether the session is finalized at the end of recording. Writes all information to the disc at once and finalizes both the session and the disc at the end of recording. For additional information about Track-at-Once or Disc-at-Once settings, refer to the Roxio Easy CD and DVD Creator online Users Guide. Creating DVDs Using InterVideo WinDVD Creator InterVideo WinDVD Creator allows you to create, author, and edit movies and burn them to a DVD. Before you can create DVDs, you must install this application using the installation CD, included with select notebook. This application will not install successfully unless your notebook is equipped with an optical drive that has DVD+RW capability. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 619 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 20 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Multimedia Preparing to Use InterVideo WinDVD Creator CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to a DVD:
Before writing to a DVD, connect the notebook to a reliable external power source. Do not write to a DVD while the notebook is running on battery power. Before writing to a DVD, close all open applications (including screen savers and antivirus software) except InterVideo WinDVD Creator. Do not copy directly from a DVD to another DVD or from a network drive to a DVD. Instead, copy from a DVD or network drive to your hard drive, then copy from your hard drive to the DVD. Do not type on the notebook keyboard or move the notebook while the notebook is writing to a DVD. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Choosing Recording Media HP recommends using high-quality media that correspond to the maximum speed of the optical drive. The notebook can write or copy to DVDs which provide one-time, non-erasable recording
(DVD+R) or to DVDs which provide erasable recording
(DVD+RW). In order to write data to a DVD, you must use a blank DVD+R disc or a DVD+RW disc on which the format has not been finalized. For more information about choosing media for use with WinDVD Creator, select Help on the WinDVD Creator menu bar. Creating DVDs To open InterVideo WinDVD Creator, select Start > All Programs > InterVideo WinDVD Creator> InterVideo WinDVD Creator. For instructions on creating DVDs, select Help on the WinDVD Creator menu bar. 620 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM 7 Communications Contents Modem . 72 Connecting the Modem . 73 Network . 73 Connecting a Network Cable. 74 Turning a Network Connection Off and On . 74 Accessing the Network at Startup . 74 Wireless (Select Models Only) . 75 To Turn Wireless Communication On and Off . 76 Connecting to a Wireless Network . 77 Infrared. 78 Setting Up an Infrared Transmission. 79 Avoiding Standby While Using Infrared. 79 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 71 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Communications Modem All notebook models include an RJ-11 telephone jack, and a preinstalled V.92 modem. A modem cable with RJ-11 connectors at each end is also included with select models. If you purchased a notebook with an internal modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are not standard, a country-specific modem adapter is included with the notebook. For best performance, you can connect to any Internet Service Provider (ISP) or modem network that has V.90 or V.92 interoperable modems. Check with your ISP for a list of telephone numbers that support V.90 or V.92. (V.92 enables modem on-hold technology that allows an Internet session to be interrupted to answer a phone call, then resumes the Internet session after the call is complete.) The maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 Kbps, even though the modem is capable of downloading at higher speeds. CAUTION: Your built-in modem may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX), cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and does not work with party lines. Some of these connections may result in excess electrical voltage and could cause a malfunction in the internal modem. Check your telephone line type prior to connecting your phone line. 72 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Communications Connecting the Modem A modem must be connected to an analog telephone line. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a telephone cable into the RJ-45 network jack. WARNING: Connecting the notebook to a digital line can permanently damage the modem. Immediately disconnect your modem cable if accidentally connected to a digital line. CAUTION: Jacks for digital PBX systems may resemble RJ-11 telephone jacks, but are not compatible with the modem. For more information on connecting and configuring your modem, refer to the Modem and Networking Guide included on the Documentation Library CD. Network All notebook models ship with an RJ-45 network jack. A network cable with RJ-45 connectors at each end is included with select models. The notebook can be connected to a network whether or not the internal modem is connected to a telephone line. If your notebook is connected to a network, you may want to confer with your network administrator before changing network settings. The notebook supports network speeds up to 10 Mbps when connected to a 10BASE-T network and 100 Mbps when connected to a 100BASE-TX network. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 73 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Communications Connecting a Network Cable For information on connecting a network cable, refer to the Modem and Networking Guide included on the Documentation Library CD. Turning a Network Connection Off and On To conserve power, turn off a network connection you are not using. To turn off a network connection, log off the network, then disconnect the network cable. To turn on a network connection, connect the network cable, then log on to the network. Accessing the Network at Startup To connect the notebook to a PXE (Preboot eXecution Environment) server during startup, you must enable the internal NIC for startup, then respond to the Network Service Boot prompt each time you want to connect to the server. To enable the NIC for startup and set the notebook to display the Network Service Boot prompt each time the notebook is started or restarted, set your preferences in the Setup utility. The Setup utility is not a Windows utility and does not support the TouchPad. For more information about using the Setup utility, refer to the Using the Setup Utility section in Chapter 9 of this guide. To respond to the Network Service Boot prompt, press f12 while the prompt F12 = Boot from LAN appears very briefly in the lower left corner of the screen before Windows loads. 74 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Communications Wireless (Select Models Only) If your notebook is equipped with a wireless device, you can connect by radio to an 802.11b or 802.11g wireless local area network (WLAN) and access computers and other resources on the network. A wireless network provides all the functions of a typical wired network, but also provides for roaming. Since your notebook connects to the network by radio rather than through cables, you can move from place to place within the networkfrom your office to a conference room, for exampleand remain on the network the entire time. Wireless antennae location WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches) during normal operation, including when the notebook display is closed. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 75 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Communications To Turn Wireless Communication On and Off Wireless networks and cellular modems are examples of devices that use wireless communication. Such devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as when traveling in an airplane. If in doubt, be sure to ask for authorization before turning on your notebook wireless networking. In Italy, Singapore, and possibly other countries, you may be required to purchase a license before using the wireless function. Turning On Communication and Making a Connection To turn on wireless communication and connect to a wireless network:
1. If the notebook is not on, turn it on. 2. Press the wireless on-off button (Quick Launch button) located above the number pad of the notebook to turn wireless 802.11b or 802.11g communication on and off The wireless indicator light on the Wireless On/Off Quick Launch button turns on when 802.11b or 802.11g wireless communication is turned on. To check the status of your wireless connection, open Network Connections in Control Panel, then select the connection. Turning Off Communication and Ending a Connection To end wireless communication and disconnect from a wireless notebook:
1. Close any files that reside on other network notebooks. 2. To turn off the wireless 802.11b or 802.11g communication without turning off the notebook, press the wireless on-off button. Putting the notebook in Standby or shutting it down also turns off the wireless function. 76 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Communications Connecting to a Wireless Network You can connect to an access point that gives you access to a local area network, or you can connect directly to other computers in an ad hoc network. Before you can connect your notebook to an existing 802.11b or 802.11g wireless network, you have to configure the notebook. For details on how to configure your notebook for wireless networking, open the Windows Help and Support Center and enter wireless as a search topic. This provides you with overviews, tutorials, articles, and step by step information on setting up your wireless device. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 77 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Communications Infrared The notebook is IrDA-compliant and can communicate with another infrared-equipped device that is also IrDA-compliant. The IrDA connection speed standard is 4 megabits per second (Mbps). The infrared port supports low-speed connections up to 115 kilobits per second (Kbps) as well as high-speed connections up to 4 Mbps. Infrared signals are sent through an invisible beam of infrared light and must have an unobstructed line of sight. Infrared performance may vary with the performance of infrared peripherals, the distance and angle between infrared devices, and the applications being used. Linking to an infrared device 78 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Setting Up an Infrared Transmission Communications For information about using infrared software and enabling or disabling infrared ports, refer to the operating system Help files and to the documentation included with the external infrared device. To set up 2 infrared devices, such as the notebook and an optional printer, for optimal transmission:
Position the devices so that their infrared ports face each other at a distance of no more than 3.3 feet (1 meter). Position the ports so that they face each other directly. The maximum capture angle is 30 degrees, so the ports must be aligned no more than 15 degrees off center. Shield the ports from direct sunlight, flashing incandescent light, and fluorescent light. Be sure that signals from a remote control or other wireless device (such as a cell phone, a headset, or an audio device) do not aim at either port. During the transmission, do not move either device and do not allow objects or movement to disrupt the beam. Avoiding Standby While Using Infrared Standby is not compatible with infrared transmission. If the notebook is in Standby, an infrared transmission cannot be initiated. If Standby initiates during an infrared transmission, the transmission stops. To resume from Standby, briefly press the power button. The transmission resumes when the notebook resumes from Standby. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 79 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Communications 710 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM 8 Hardware Options and Upgrades Contents External Devices . 82 Connecting a Monitor or Projector . 82 Connecting a USB Device . 83 Using a USB Device . 84 Using a PC Card. 84 Selecting a PC Card. 85 Configuring a PC Card . 85 Inserting a PC Card . 85 Stopping and Removing a PC Card. 86 Using Digital Media. 87 Using the Digital Media Light. 89 Inserting Digital Media . 810 Removing Digital Media . 811 Disabling or Restarting Digital Media. 811 Increasing Memory . 812 Displaying Memory Information. 812 Removing or Inserting a Memory Module . 813 Connecting an Optional Cable Lock . 818 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 81 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades External Devices The jacks and connectors described in this guide support standard external devices. For information about which jack or connector to use, refer to the documentation included with the device. For information about installing or loading any software, such as drivers, required by the device, refer to the documentation included with the device. To connect a standard external device to the notebook:
1. Turn off the notebook. 2. If you are connecting a powered device, turn off the device. 3. Connect the device to the connector on the notebook. 4. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. 5. Turn on the device. 6. Turn on the notebook. To disconnect a standard external device from the notebook, turn off the device, then disconnect the device from the notebook. Connecting a Monitor or Projector To connect an external monitor or projector to the notebook, insert the monitor cable into the external monitor connector on the back of the notebook. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display an image, try pressing the fn+f4 hotkey to switch the image to the monitor. 82 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Connecting a USB Device USB (universal serial bus) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect external devices such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub to the notebook or optional HP Notebook Expansion Base. A hub is a connecting device that can be either powered or unpowered. USB hubs can be connected to a USB connector on the notebook or to other USB devices. Hubs can support several USB devices. Powered hubs must be connected to external power. Unpowered hubs must be connected either to a USB connector on the notebook or to a port on a powered hub. The USB connectors on the notebook support USB 2.0 and earlier devices. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information and software installation instructions, refer to the documentation included with the device. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 83 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Using a USB Device To use a USB device, plug the device into one of the four USB connectors on your notebook. Legacy USB 1.1 support is enabled by default. This supports a USB keyboard or hub connected to a USB connector on the notebook during startup (before Windows loads) or in a non-Windows application or utility. Identifying the 3 USB connectors on the rear notebook and 1 USB connector on the left side Using a PC Card A PC Card is a credit cardsized accessory designed to conform to the standard specifications of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA). The notebook PC Card slot supports both 32-bit CardBus and 16-bit PC Cards. PC Cards can be used to add modem, sound, storage, wireless communication, or digital camera functions to the notebook. 84 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Selecting a PC Card A Type I, Type II, or Type III PC Card can be used. Zoomed video PC cards are not supported. Configuring a PC Card CAUTION: If you install all of the software or any of the enablers provided by a PC Card manufacturer, you may not be able to use other PC Cards. If you are instructed by the documentation included with your PC Card to install device drivers:
Install only the device drivers for your operating system. Do not install other software, such as card services, socket services, or enablers, that may also be supplied by the PC Card manufacturer. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 85 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Inserting a PC Card CAUTION: To prevent damage to the PC Card connectors:
Use minimal force when inserting a PC Card into a PC Card slot. Do not move or transport the notebook while a PC Card is inserted. 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently push the card into the slot until the card is seated. Inserting a PC Card 86 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Stopping and Removing a PC Card CAUTION: To prevent loss of work or an unresponsive system, stop the PC Card before removing it. Stopping a PC Card, even if it is not in use, conserves power. 1. Close all applications and complete all activities that are supported by the PC Card. 2. To stop a PC Card, select the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar, then select the PC Card. (To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar, click the arrow icon for Show Hidden Icons.) 3. To release the PC Card, press the PC Card eject button 1. (If the PC Card button does not extend while a PC Card is in the PC Card slot, press the button once to extend the button, then press the button again to release the PC Card.) 4. Gently pull out the PC Card 2. Removing a PC Card Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 87 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Using Digital Media The digital media slot supports the following digital media formats:
Secure Digital (SD) Multimedia Card (MMC) Memory Stick (MS) SmartMedia (SM) CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital media card connectors:
Use minimal force when inserting a SD, MMC, Memory Stick, or Smart Media into a Digital Media slot. Do not move or transport the notebook while Digital Media is inserted. Digital media formats consist of flash memory cards that provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital media-equipped cameras and PDAs as well as other notebooks. 88 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Using the Digital Media Light The digital media light turns on when an inserted Digital Media card is being accessed. The digital media light turns off when inserted digital media is inactive or when the digital media slot is empty. Identifying the digital media light Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 89 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Inserting Digital Media To insert a digital media card:
1. Hold the card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently push the card into the Digital Media slot until the card is seated. (The card will extend slightly beyond the edge of the notebook.) Inserting a digital media card 810 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 11 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Removing Digital Media To remove a Digital Media card:
1. Complete all activities that are supported by the card (such as a data transfer) and close all applications. 2. Push the card in until it is released 1. 3. Pull the card out of the slot 2. Releasing and removing a digital media card Disabling or Restarting Digital Media An inserted Digital Media card uses power even when the card is not in use. Disabling the card conserves power. To disable an inserted Digital Media card, double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows Desktop, right-click the drive assigned to the card, then select Eject. (The card is stopped but is not released from the Digital Media Card slot.) To restart the card, remove, then reinsert, the card. For instructions, refer to Inserting Digital Media and Removing Digital Media in this chapter. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 811 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 12 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Increasing Memory You can increase the amount of RAM (random access memory) in the notebook with an optional HP-approved memory module. The notebook memory slot supports one 128-MB, 256-MB, 512-MB, or 1024-MB memory module. Some notebook models ship with a vacant memory slot. On other models the memory slot contains a preinstalled memory module that can be replaced at any time. Displaying Memory Information When RAM is increased, the operating system increases the hard drive space reserved for the hibernation file. If you experience problems with Hibernation after increasing RAM, verify that your hard drive has enough free space for the larger hibernation file. To display the amount of RAM in the system:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon > General tab. To display the amount of free space on your hard drive, double-click My Computer and right-click the hard drive and select properties. To display the amount of space required by the hibernation file:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Hibernate tab. 812 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 13 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Removing or Inserting a Memory Module WARNING: To prevent exposure to electrical shock, access only the memory compartment during this procedure. The memory compartment and the battery and hard drive bays are the only user-accessible internal compartments on the notebook. All other areas that require a tool to access should be opened only by an HP authorized service provider. WARNING: To prevent exposure to electrical shock and damage to the notebook, shut down the notebook, unplug the power cord, and remove the battery pack before installing a memory module. CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components: before beginning this procedure, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide, Electrostatic Discharge section. 1. Save your work and shut down the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is off or in Hibernation, briefly press the power button. If your work returns to the screen, save your work, exit all applications, then shut down the notebook. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the notebook. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 813 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 14 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades 5. Turn the notebook upside down. 6. Remove the two memory compartment screws 1. 7. Slide the memory compartment cover towards the notebook display hinges and lift up to remove 2. Opening the memory compartment 814 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 15 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades 8. Remove or insert the memory module. To remove a memory module:
a. Pull away the retention clips on each side of the module 1. (The module tilts upward.) b. Grasp the edges of the module and gently pull the module out of the memory slot 2. c. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. Removing a memory module Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 815 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 16 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades To insert a memory module:
a. Align the keyed (notched) edge of the module with the keyed area in the memory slot 1. b. With the module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory compartment, press the module into the memory slot until it is seated 2. c. Push the module down until the retention clips snap into place 3. Inserting a memory module 816 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 17 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades 9. Align the tabs on the memory compartment cover with the cover slots on the notebook, then lower the cover and slide it towards the front of the notebook 1. 10. Reinsert and tighten the two memory compartment screws 2. 11. Replace the battery pack (if you removed a battery pack at the beginning of this procedure), reconnect external power, then restart the notebook. Closing the memory compartment Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 817 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 18 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Connecting an Optional Cable Lock The purpose of security solutions is to act a deterrent. The solutions do not prevent the product from being mishandled or stolen. To install a security cable:
1. Loop the cable around a secured object. 2. Insert the cable lock key 1 into the cable lock. 3. Insert the cable lock 2 into the security cable slot 3. 4. Lock it with the cable lock key. Connecting an optional cable lock 818 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM 9 Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Contents Updating Software . 92 Preparing for a Software Update . 92 Downloading and Installing an Update . 94 Backing Up and Restoring Data. 97 Setting a System Restore Point . 97 Restoring to a System Restore Point . 97 Repairing or Reinstalling the Operating System . 98 Repairing the Operating System . 98 Reinstalling the Operating System . 99 Reinstalling Device Drivers and Other Software . 910 Installing a Retail Version of an Operating System. 911 Using the Setup Utility. 911 Opening the Setup Utility . 911 Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility . 912 Restoring Setup Utility Default Settings . 912 Exiting the Setup Utility . 912 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 91 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Updating Software For optimal notebook performance and to make sure your notebook remains compatible with changing technologies, install the latest versions of the software provided with your notebook as they become available. To update notebook software:
Prepare for any update by identifying your notebook type, series or family, and model. Prepare for a ROM (read-only memory) update by identifying the ROM version currently installed on the notebook. 1. Access the updates at the HP Web site. 2. Download and install the updates. The notebook ROM stores the BIOS (basic input-output system). The BIOS determines how the notebook hardware interacts with the operating system and external devices and also supports such notebook services as time and date. Preparing for a Software Update If your notebook connects to a network, consult with your network administrator before installing any software updates, particularly a ROM update. Accessing Notebook Product Information To access the updates for your notebook, you will need the following information:
The product category is Notebook. The product family name and series number are printed on the display bezel. More complete model information is provided on the serial number label on the bottom of the notebook. 92 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities The product name, notebook model, and notebook serial number are also displayed in the same section of the Setup utility that displays ROM information, as described in the next section. Accessing Notebook ROM Information To determine whether an available ROM update is a later ROM version than the ROM version currently installed on the notebook, you need to know the version of the currently installed ROM. ROM information is displayed in the Setup utility. The Setup utility is a non-Windows utility that does not support the TouchPad. For complete information about using the Setup utility, refer to the Using the Setup Utility section in Chapter 9. 1. To open the Setup utility, turn on or restart the notebook. 2. Before Windows opens and while the Press <F10> to enter setup prompt is displayed in the lower left section of the screen, press f10. 3. The ROM version and date are displayed in the System BIOS Version field. 4. To exit the Setup utility without changing any settings:
a. Press esc to close the window. b. Use the arrow keys to select Ignore changes and exit, then press enter. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 93 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Downloading and Installing an Update Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. Some ROM updates may be packaged in a compressed file called a RomPaq. Other ROM updates may be provided as a CPQFlash SoftPaq. Most download packages contain a file named Readme.txt. Readme.txt contains detailed descriptive, installation, and troubleshooting information about the download. Readme.txt included with RomPaqs are English only. The following sections provide instructions for downloading and installing:
A ROM update. A SoftPaq containing an update other than a ROM update. Downloading and Installing a ROM Update CAUTION: To prevent serious damage to the notebook or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a ROM update only while the notebook is connected to reliable external power. (Do not download or install a ROM update while the notebook is docked or running on battery power.) During the download and installation:
Do not unplug the notebook from the electrical outlet. Do not shut down the notebook or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. Downloading a ROM Update:
1. Access the page at the HP Web site that provides software for your notebook: Select Start > Help and Support, then select a software update link. Or, visit the HP Web site at:
http://www.hp.com/support 2. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the ROM update you want to download. 94 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities 3. At the download area:
a. Record the date, name, or other identifier of any ROM update that is later than the ROM currently installed on your notebook. (You may need to identify the update later, after it has been downloaded to the hard drive.) b. Record the path to the default or custom location on the hard drive to which the ROM package will download.
(You may need to access the ROM package after it has been downloaded.) c. Follow the online instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Installing a ROM Update ROM installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed:
1. Open Windows Explorer. To open Windows Explorer from the Start button, select Start > All Programs > Accessories >
Windows Explorer. 2. In the left pane of the Windows Explorer window, select My Computer > your hard drive designation. (The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk C.) Then follow the path you recorded earlier to the folder on your hard drive containing the update. 3. To begin the installation, open the folder, then double-click the file with an .exe extension, for example, Filename.exe.
(The ROM update installation begins.) 4. To complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from the destination folder. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 95 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Downloading and Installing a Non-ROM SoftPaq To update software other than a ROM update:
1. Access the page at the HP Web site that provides software for your notebook: Select Start > Help and Support, then select a software update link. Or, visit the HP Web site at:
http://www.hp.com/support 2. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the SoftPaq you want to download. 3. At the download area:
a. Write down the date, name, or other identifier of the SoftPaq you plan to download. (You will need to identify the update later, after it has been downloaded to the hard drive.) b. Follow the online instructions to download the SoftPaq to the hard drive. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer. To open Windows Explorer from the Start button, select Start >
All Programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer. 5. In the left pane of the Windows Explorer window, select My Computer > your hard drive designation, which is typically Local Disk C > HP. 6. In the HP folder, select the name or number of the software package you have downloaded. 7. Select the file that includes an .exe extension, for example, Filename.exe. (The installation begins.) 8. To complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from the HP folder. 96 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Backing Up and Restoring Data The System Restore utility enables you to safeguard your system files and functional configurations by using System Restore points. System Restore points are restorable snapshots or benchmarks of your system. The notebook may set System Restore points whenever you change personal settings or add software or hardware. Setting System Restore points manually provides additional protection for your system files and settings. HP recommends that you set System Restore points:
Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware. Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally. Setting a System Restore Point To set a System Restore point manually:
1. Select Start > Help & Support > Tools. (Notebook and diagnostic information is displayed.) 2. Select System Restore, then follow the on-screen instructions for setting a Restore Point. Restoring to a System Restore Point To restore the notebook to a System Restore point:
1. Select Start > Help & Support > Tools. (Notebook and diagnostic information is displayed.) 2. Select System Restore, then follow the on-screen instructions for restoring the notebook to a Restore Point. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 97 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Repairing or Reinstalling the Operating System The Operating System CD included with your notebook can be used to repair or reinstall the operating system. Either operations may take 1 to 2 hours to complete. Repairing the operating system preserves your data and settings. Reinstalling the operating system deletes all files on the notebook. After the operating system has been reinstalled, all device drivers must also be reinstalled. HP recommends that you try to restore your system by using the System Restore utility before you consider repairing or reinstalling your operating system. For restoration instructions, refer to Backing Up and Restoring Data earlier in this chapter. If a System Restore restoration fails to restore functionality, first try to repair the operating system. If the repair procedure does not restore functionality, you may need to reinstall the operating system. Repairing the Operating System To repair the operating system without deleting your personal data, use the Operating System CD that was shipped with the notebook:
1. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the Operating System CD (included with the notebook) into the optical drive. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the notebook. 4. Press the power button again to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from CD. After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen is displayed. 98 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities 6. Press enter to continue. A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed. 7. Press f8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup window is displayed. 8. Press R to repair the selected Windows installation. The repair process begins. The notebook restarts in Windows after the process is complete. Reinstalling the Operating System If the System Recovery and operating system repair procedures did not restore functionality to your notebook, it may be necessary to reinstall the operating system. CAUTION: Personal data and any software you have installed on the notebook will be lost during the operating system reinstall. To protect your data, back up your data before beginning the procedure. For back up information and instructions, select Start > Help and Support. Also refer to Backing Up and Restoring Data earlier in this section. During the reinstallation, you may be prompted for your product key. The product key is displayed on the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label on the bottom of the notebook. To reinstall the operating system using the Operating System CD included with the notebook:
1. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the Operating System CD into the optical drive. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the notebook. 4. Press the power button again to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from CD. After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen is displayed. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 99 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities 6. Press enter to continue. A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed. 7. Press f8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup window is displayed. 8. Press esc to continue installing a new copy of the operating system instead of repairing it. 9. Press enter to set up the operating system. 10. Press C to continue setup using this partition. 11. Select Format the partition using the NTFS file system
(Quick), and press enter. Formatting a drive will delete all current files. 12. Press F to format the drive. The reinstallation process begins. This process may take up to 2 hours to complete. The notebook restarts in Windows after the process is complete. Reinstalling Device Drivers and Other Software After the installation process is complete, you must reinstall drivers and other software. To reinstall drivers use the Driver Recovery CD included with the notebook:
1. While running Windows, insert the Driver Recovery CD into the optical drive. If you do not have Autorun enabled, select Start > Run. Then type D:\SWSETUP\APPINSTL\SETUP.EXE (where D indicates the optical drive). 2. Follow the on-screen instructions for installing drivers. After the drivers are reinstalled, you must reinstall any software you added to the notebook. Follow the installation instructions provided with the software. 910 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 11 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Installing a Retail Version of an Operating System The Windows operating system provided on the notebook or on a restoration CD is enhanced by HP. The HP enhancements add power and security features and provide supplementary support for external devices such as drives and PC Cards. CAUTION: Replacing an operating system enhanced by HP with a retail version of an operating system will result in the loss of all HP enhancements. In some cases, the loss of these enhancements may result in an unresponsive system or the loss of complete USB support. Using the Setup Utility The Setup utility is a preinstalled, ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your operating system is not working or will not load. The utility reports information about the notebook and provides settings for startup, password, port, Setup utility appearance, and other preferences. Opening the Setup Utility To access most settings:
1. Start up or restart the notebook. 2. Before Windows opens and while the Press <F10> to enter setup prompt is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen, press f10. On some models, you must start up (not restart) the notebook to access the settings for a hard drive password. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 911 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 12 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility Because the Setup utility is not Windows-based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To navigate, use the up and down arrow keys or tab. To select an item, use the arrow keys to select the item, then press enter. To close a display but remain in the Setup utility, press esc. An on-screen guide to navigation and selection is displayed at the lower edge of most Setup utility submenu screens. To minimize keystrokes by using the <Alt> Key Activates Accelerators feature:
1. Press and hold alt. (A letter or number in most on-screen items is highlighted.) 2. Press the keyboard key corresponding to the highlighted letter or number in the item you want to select. For example, to select an on-screen OK button, press alt. When the O in OK is highlighted, press O. Restoring Setup Utility Default Settings To return all Setup utility settings to default values, select File menu > Restore Defaults. (Identification information, including ROM version information, is retained.) Exiting the Setup Utility The Setup Utility exit options are on the File menu. When you select either option, Windows opens after the Setup utility closes. To close the utility and save your changes from the current session, select Exit Saving Changes. To close the utility without saving changes from the current session, select Exit Discarding Changes. 912 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM A Specifications The information in this appendix may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the notebook internationally or in extreme environments. Notebook Dimensions Dimension Height (front) Height (rear) Width Metric 4.25 cm 4.70 cm 39.80 cm Depth (with hinge) 28.8 cm U.S. 1.67 inches 1.85 inches 15.67 inches 11.33 inches Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 A1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Specifications Operating Environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 10 to 35 C
-20 to 60 C 50 to 95 F
-4 to 140 F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating 3,048 m 9,144 m 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
10,000 ft 30,000 ft Rated Input Power The notebook operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the notebook can be powered from a stand-alone DC power source, HP strongly recommends that the notebook be powered only with an AC adapter supplied or approved by HP. An AC adapter provided by HP for use with this notebook is capable of accepting AC power within the following specifications. Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Operating frequency range Rating 100240V AC @1.7A - 5060Hz 1.5A rms 50 to 60Hz A2 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Specifications The notebook is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5V DC @6.5A- 120W 4.9A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 Vrms. Finding More Environmental Information The specifications in this appendix contain information about exposing the notebook to environmental extremes. For similar information about storing battery packs, refer to the Storing a Battery Pack section in Chapter 4. For information about exposing the notebook to sunlight, ultraviolet light, x-rays, or magnetic fields, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Maintenance, Shipping and Travel guide. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 A3 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Specifications A4 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 1 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Index 1394 connector 211 A AC adapter connecting 15 identifying 218 power connector 211 AC power 112 adapter AC 15, 218 country-specific modem 218 Japan-specific outlet 218 airport security devices 53 altitude specifications A2 antivirus software 111 applications key 24 applications. See software;
software updates audio CD. See CD(s) audio-out jack connecting 66 identifying 211 AutoPlay 512 B backup, system 97 battery bay identifying 214 inserting battery pack 13 removing battery pack 426 battery light 28 battery pack calibrating 421 charging 12, 16, 417, 421 discharging 421 inserting 13 monitoring charge 418 recharging 423 removing 426 storing 424 when to remove 45 battery power conserving 425 when to use 46 BIOS (basic input output system) 92 boot order 514 Startup and Reference Guide Index1 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 2 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Index button(s) PC Card eject 213, 86 power 25 TouchPad 23, 33 volume 27, 63 See also key; latch; switch, display C cable AC adapter 15 audio 68 modem 29, 217, 72 network 217 S-Video 68 See also power cord cable lock, connecting 818 caps lock light 26 card and socket services, PC Card 85 card. See memory, modules supported; PC Card; SD Card CD drive. See drives CD(s) Driver Recovery 910 Operating System 99 playing, with Windows Media Player 610 playing, with WinDVD 611 starting from 514 See also drive media Certificate of Authenticity label 216, 99 compartment, memory 214, 812 connector(s) 1394 211 drive 53 external monitor 29 infrared port 213, 78 modem 29, 73 network 29, 73 parallel 29 power 211 USB 29, 211, 83 conservation, power 425 country-specific modem adapter identifying 218 currency formats, setting 110 customer support 113, 219 D date, setting the 110 device drivers, reinstalling 910 digital media digital media light 89 disabling 811 inserting 810 inserting, removing 88 memory stick (MS) 87 multimedia card (MMC) 87 removing 811 secure digital (SD) 87 smartmedia (SM) 87 Index2 Startup and Reference Guide Ryan Masterfile.book Page 3 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM display switch function, changing 413 identifying 48 display, internal brightness 38 opening 14 switching image 37 Documentation Library CD 219 drive media affected by airport security 53 canceling AutoPlay on 512 caring for 53 displaying contents of 512 inserting, removing CD or DVD 59 types and terms 52 Driver Recovery CD 910 drivers, reinstalling 910 drives affected by airport security 53 avoiding Standby and Hibernation while using optical 513 IDE drive light 54 inserting, removing media 58 shipping 53 starting from 514 types and terms 52 USB 83 See also hard drive, internal DVD drive. See drives DVD(s) playing, with WinDVD 611 region settings 612 starting from 514 See also drive media Index E Easy CD and DVD Creator creating CDs 613 erasing media 617 features 614 formatting media 616 preparing to use 615 settings 618 UDF prompt 616 eject button optical drive 510 PC Card 86 electric shock warning 112 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 53, 813 emergency shutdown procedures 110, 410 enablers, PC Card 85 End User License Agreement 18 environmental specifications A1 error message Playback Of Content From This Region Not Permitted 611 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 53, 813 exhaust vent 210, 212, 215 external monitor connector 29 switching image 37 F fan, vents 210, 212, 215 FCC notice 112 FDD (floppy disk drive) 52 flash memory card 88 flash RAM card 88 Startup and Reference Guide Index3 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 4 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Index fn key changing function of fn+f5 changing Standby function 413 413 identifying 24 Standby function 48 function keys 24 H hard drive bay identifying 214 replacing hard drive 55 hard drive, internal defined 52 displaying amount of free space on 812 replacing 55 retaining screws 55, 58 space on, required for Hibernation file 812 See also drives headphones 66 Help and Support window 36 Hibernation avoiding when playing media 513 changing configuration during 44 controls and indicators 48 defined 44 identifying 55 initiating 25, 412 resuming from 412 setting preferences 413 when to use 44 hotkeys Index4 procedures 36 Quick Reference 35 hotkeys commands access Help and Support 36 display brightness 38 initiate QuickLock 38 initiate Standby 38, 411 media commands 39 Open Internet Explorer 36 Quick Reference 35 switch image 37 hub, USB 83 humidity specifications A2 I IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light 54 identifying components additional 217 display 22 infrared port 213, 78 InterVideo WinDVD creating DVDs 619, 620 error message 611 managing region settings 612 J jack audio-out 211, 66 microphone 211, 66 RJ-11 29 RJ-45 29 S-Video 29, 211, 68 Japan-specific modem adapter 218 Startup and Reference Guide Ryan Masterfile.book Page 5 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM K key applications 24 fn 24 function (F1, F2, etc.) 24 hotkeys 34 keypad 24, 310 Microsoft logo 24 See also button; latch; switch, display keyboard language 110 L label Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 216, 99 modem approvals 216 product identification 216 system 216 wireless certification 216 language choosing during setup 18 selecting keyboard 110 latch battery pack locking 427 battery pack release 214 display release 22 See also button; switch, display light battery 28 caps lock 26 hard drive 28 Index IDE drive 54 power/standby 28 line-out jack 211, 66 lock, security cable 818 locked system 110, 25, 410 locking latches, battery pack 427 M Maintenance, Shipping and Travel guide 219 media hotkeys 39 Media Player, Windows 610 media, drive affected by airport security 53 canceling AutoPlay on 512 caring for 53 displaying contents of 512 inserting, removing CD or DVD 59 types and terms 52 See also drives memory compartment 214 displaying amount of 812 increasing RAM 812 module, removing or inserting 813 modules supported 812 microphone jack 211 microphone, connecting 66 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 216 Startup and Reference Guide Index5 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 6 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Index Microsoft logo key 24 model, identifying notebook 92 modem approvals label 216 cable 217 connecting 73 country-specific adapter 218 specifications 72 virus protection 111 Modem and Networking guide 219 monitor, external external monitor connector 29 switching display 37 mouse, external USB connectors 29, 211 multimedia card 88 N network cable 217 RJ-45 jack 29 specifications 73 speed 73 Norton AntiVirus 2003 111 notebook model, family, type, and serial number 92 NTSC television format 69 num lock light 26 number Product Key 216 serial 216 numeric keypad 310 O opening the notebook 14, 22 operating environment specifications A2 operating system installing retail version of 911 loading 49 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 216 Product Key number 216 reinstalling 98 repairing 98 shutting down 49, 410 Operating System CD 98, 99 optical disc. See CD(s); DVD(s) optical drive avoiding Standby and Hibernation while using 513 boot order 514 identifying 213 See also drives P PAL, PAL-M television formats 69 parallel connector 29 passwords 911 PC Card configuring 85 functions 84 inserting, removing 85 stopping 86 types available 85 PC Card eject button 213 pointing device 33 port, infrared 213, 78 Index6 Startup and Reference Guide Ryan Masterfile.book Page 7 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM power button 25 connecting the notebook to external 15 conservation 44, 425 controls 48 cord 217 emergency shutdown procedures 410 Hibernation procedures 410 power connector 211 power/standby light 28 rated input A2 setting preferences 413 shutting down the notebook 110 Standby procedures 411 turning on the notebook 17 See also battery pack power button function, changing 413 identifying 48 resetting with 410 power connector connecting 15 identifying 211 power cord connecting 15 identifying 217 See also cable Power Meter 418 power, AC 112 Index power/standby light 48 Preboot eXecution Environment
(PXE) 74 preloaded utilities 19 Product Key number 216 projector connecting 29 switching display 37 PXE (Preboot eXecution Environment) 74 R RAM (Random Access Memory) 812 region settings currency, date, language, time 110 DVD 612 Regulatory and Safety Notices guide 219 regulatory information modem approvals label 216 notices 112 Regulatory and Safety Notices guide 219 system label 216 wireless certification label 216 release latch battery pack 214 display 22 repairing the operating system 98 reset (emergency shutdown Startup and Reference Guide Index7 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 8 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Index resolution, screen 110 restoring software 219 RJ-11 telephone jack identifying 29 modem cable 217 RJ-45 network jack identifying 29 network cable 217 ROM defined 92 determining current version of 93 downloading and installing 94 obtaining updates 94 RomPaq, downloading 94 S Safety & Comfort Guide 219 safety considerations 112 security cable lock, connecting 818 slot 29 serial number, notebook 216, 92 series, notebook 92 Setup utility 911 shutdown procedures 110, 49 sleep button 38, 413 Sleep. See Standby slot memory 812 PC Card 213 SD Card 88 security cable 29 socket services, PC Card 85 SoftPaq described 94 downloading and installing 96 software antivirus protection 111 AutoPlay 512 infrared 78 installing optional 19 network 74 Norton AntiVirus 2003 111 Power Meter 418 regional settings 110 reinstalling 98, 910 repairing 98 restoring 219 RomPaq 94 Setup utility 911 SoftPaq 94 updating preloaded software 92 Windows Media Player 610 WinDVD 611 software updates downloading and installing 94, 96 obtaining 94 preparing for 92 speakers, external 66 Index8 Startup and Reference Guide Ryan Masterfile.book Page 9 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Index specifications temperature dimensions A1 modem 72 network 73 operating environment A2 rated input power A2 Standby avoiding when playing media 513 avoiding when using infrared 79 controls and indicators 48 initiating 38, 411 power/standby light 28 resuming from 411 setting preferences 413 S-Video connections 68 jack 29 system label 216 system lockup 110, 25, 410 System Restore utility 97 T technical support getting help 113 notebook documentation 219 telephone (RJ-11) jack identifying 29 modem cable 217 specifications A2 storage, battery pack 424 1394 connector 211 time, settting the 110 TouchPad components 33 setting preferences 33 traveling with notebook battery pack temperature considerations 424 environmental specifications A2 modem approvals label 216 regional settings 110 serial number 216 wireless certification label 216 troubleshooting Troubleshooting guide 219 turning off notebook 110, 49, 410 turning on notebook 17, 49 U unresponsive system, emergency shutdown procedures 110, 410 USB connectors, identifying 29, 211 telephone numbers, service and devices, connecting 83 support 113 television changing color format 69 connecting audio 66 connecting video 68 utilities, preloaded displaying descriptions 19 installing 19 See also software Startup and Reference Guide Index9 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 10 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Index V VCR audio-out jack function 66 connecting 68 vents, fan 210, 212, 215 video CDs, DVDs. See CD(s);
DVD(s) video device connecting audio 68 S-Video jack 68 turning on and off 69 viruses, computer 111 volume, adjusting 63 W Windows applications key 24 Windows Media Player accessing with Digital Audio button 610 using with audio CDs WinDVD error message 611 managing region settings 612 wireless device certification label 216 turning on and off 76 wireless network 75 Index10 Startup and Reference Guide Ryan Masterfile.book Page 11 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. SD Logo is a trademark. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Startup and Reference Guide HP Notebook Series First Edition August 2003 Reference Number: zd7000 Document Part Number: 335555-001 Ryan Masterfile.book Page 12 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Ryan Masterfile.book Page 13 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM Ryan Masterfile.book Page 14 Monday, June 9, 2003 2:33 PM
| 1 2 3 | CRN 10069 Q2 HP PP2180 user manual Regulatory statement | Users Manual | 1.41 MiB | / May 08 2003 |
339645-001.book Page i Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Safety Notices Document Part Number: 339645-001 August 2003 This guide provides governmental agency notices concerning wireless communication and all other governmental agency information. Instructions for preventing damage from electrostatic discharge are also included. 339645-001.book Page ii Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting and additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Regulatory and Safety Notices First Edition August 2003 Document Part Number: 339645-001 339645-001.book Page iii Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Contents 1 Regulatory and Wireless Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice. 11 Modifications. 12 Cables . 12 Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) . 12 Canadian Notice . 13 Avis Canadien . 13 Japanese Notice . 13 Korean Notice . 13 Airline Travel Notice . 14 Power Cords Notice . 14 Battery Notice . 15 Energy Star Compliance . 15 German Ergonomics Notice. 16 Macrovision Corporation Notice . 16 Laser Safety Notices . 16 CDRH Regulations . 16 Laser Information . 17 Modem Notices . 18 Important Safety Instructions . 18 Telecommunications Device Approvals . 18 U.S. Modem Statements . 19 Canadian Modem Statements . 111 New Zealand Modem Statements . 112 Regulatory and Safety Notices iii 339645-001.book Page iv Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Contents Wireless Notices. 114 European Union Notice . 115 Japanese Regulatory Wireless Notice . 116 Brazilian Regulatory Wireless Notice . 117 2 Electrostatic Discharge Preventing Electrostatic Discharge . 21 Handling Drives. 21 Handling Internal Components . 21 Grounding Methods . 22 iv Regulatory and Safety Notices 339645-001.book Page 1 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM 1 Regulatory and Wireless Notices This chapter provides all country-specific regulatory notices and compliance information for your notebook including wireless notices. Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Regulatory and Safety Notices 11 339645-001.book Page 2 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo
(United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about your product that are not related to this declaration, refer to the printed Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your product for customer support information. Or write to:
Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 12 Regulatory and Safety Notices 339645-001.book Page 3 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to:
Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333. To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Japanese Notice Korean Notice Regulatory and Safety Notices 13 339645-001.book Page 4 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Power Cords Notice If you were not provided with a power cord for your notebook or for an external power accessory intended for use with your notebook, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the products electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 feet) and 2 m
(6 feet). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your HP authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Only an AC adapter provided with the notebook, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an option from HP should be used with the notebook. 14 Regulatory and Safety Notices 339645-001.book Page 5 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices Battery Notice WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short the external contacts on, or dispose of a notebook battery pack in fire or water. Replace only with the HP battery pack for this notebook. N In North America, dispose of nickel metal hydride or lithium ion batteries by taking advantage of the notebook battery recycling program. This program provides you with a postage-paid battery pack mailer preaddressed to a reclamation facility where the metals are recycled. For more information, visit the recycling program Web site at https://www.orderz.com/recycle. N In Europe, do not dispose of batteries with general household waste. Dispose of or recycle them by using the public collection system or returning them to HP, your authorized HP partners, or their agents. CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Energy Star Compliance This notebook is compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Regulatory and Safety Notices 15 339645-001.book Page 6 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices German Ergonomics Notice HP notebooks bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. HP notebooks in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Macrovision Corporation Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other right owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Laser Safety Notices All HP systems equipped with laser products comply with appropriate safety standards, including IEC 825. With specific regard to the laser, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products. It does not emit hazardous light; the beam is totally enclosed during all modes of customer operation and maintenance. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. 16 Regulatory and Safety Notices 339645-001.book Page 7 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices WARNING: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This system is classified as a Class 1 laser product. This label appears on the laser product. Laser Information Laser Type: Semiconductor GaAlAs Wave Length: 780 35 nm Divergence Angle: 53.5 1.5 Output Power: Less than 0.2mW or 10,869 Wm-2sr-1 Polarization: Circular Numerical Aperture: 0.45 0.04 Only authorized technicians trained by HP should attempt to repair this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed to allow only subassembly/module level repair. Because of the complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, no one should attempt to make repairs at the component level or to make modifications to any printed wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. Regulatory and Safety Notices 17 339645-001.book Page 8 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices Modem Notices Important Safety Instructions WARNING: When using this device, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord in order to reduce the risk of fire. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the network (RJ-45) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS 18 Regulatory and Safety Notices 339645-001.book Page 9 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices Telecommunications Device Approvals The telecommunications device in your notebook is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the notebook or on the modem. Refer to the documentation included with the product to ensure the product is configured for the country in which it is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause your modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, your modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when selecting a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. U.S. Modem Statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Regulatory and Safety Notices 19 339645-001.book Page 10 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this HP equipment, refer to the printed Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your notebook for information about obtaining customer support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should only perform repairs to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. 110 Regulatory and Safety Notices 339645-001.book Page 11 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.) In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian Modem Statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Regulatory and Safety Notices 111 339645-001.book Page 12 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices New Zealand Modem Statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line. 112 Regulatory and Safety Notices 339645-001.book Page 13 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms Specifications:
a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (S0 set between 2 and 10). Voice Support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one part to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service. Regulatory and Safety Notices 113 339645-001.book Page 14 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices Wireless Notices In some situations or environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. Such restrictions may apply when:
Using the wireless equipment on airplanes, or The risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless equipment in a specific organization or environment
(such as airports), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use this device prior to turning on the equipment. WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should not be less than 20 cm
(8 inches) during normal operation, including when the notebook display is closed. 114 Regulatory and Safety Notices 339645-001.book Page 15 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices European Union Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply with the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC), EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. CE compliance of this computer is valid only if powered with an HP provided CE marked AC adaptor. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms (in parentheses are the equivalent international standards and regulations):
EN 55022 (CISPR 22)Electromagnetic Interference EN55024 (IEC61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11)Electromagnetic Immunity EN61000-3-2 (IEC61000-3-2)Power Line Harmonics EN61000-3-3 (IEC61000-3-3)Power Line Flicker EN 60950 (IEC 60950)Product Safety EN 300 328-2Technical requirements for radio equipment EN 301 489-1, -17General EMC requirements for radio equipment Regulatory and Safety Notices 115 339645-001.book Page 16 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices The IEEE 802.11g wireless LAN functionality of this product may be used in the following EU, EU candidate and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland and United Kingdom. For normal wireless LAN operation of this product, only a limited band is available in France (Channels 10, 11, 12 and 13 only). The Autorit de rgulation des tlcommunications (ART) has special regulations for hotspots allowing other channels too, please check with ART (http://www.art-telecom.fr) on this for local rulings and for authorization. Japanese Regulatory Wireless Notice 116 Regulatory and Safety Notices 339645-001.book Page 17 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Regulatory and Wireless Notices Brazilian Regulatory Wireless Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Regulatory and Safety Notices 117 339645-001.book Page 1 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM 2 Electrostatic Discharge A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. Before handling electrostatic-sensitive components, discharge static electricity by using one of the methods described in this chapter. Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Handling Drives Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching an exterior unpainted metal surface of a device that is connected to an electrical outlet by a grounding plug. Do not touch the connector pins on a drive or the notebook. Handling Internal Components When you are removing or installing internal components, use the following precautions:
Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Have everything needed for the installation within reach so that you do not need to leave the area after beginning the procedure. Use nonmagnetic tools. Regulatory and Safety Notices 21 339645-001.book Page 2 Wednesday, May 28, 2003 12:47 PM Electrostatic Discharge Before touching an electronic component, discharge static electricity by using one of the grounding methods described later in this chapter. If you must leave the area during the procedure, remember to reground yourself before resuming the procedure. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. Grounding Methods If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the notebook, unplug it after being properly grounded and before removing a cover. Use one or both of the following grounding methods:
Touch an exterior unpainted metal surface of a device that is connected to an electrical outlet by a grounding plug. Use a wrist strap connected by a ground cord to the notebook chassis. Wrist straps are flexible grounding straps with a minimum of one megohm 10 percent resistance in the ground cords. To provide proper ground, wear the strap snugly against the skin. If you need more information about static electricity or assistance with component removal or installation, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your product for customer support information. 22 Regulatory and Safety Notices
| 1 2 3 | CRN 10072 Q3 Wireless regulatory info | Users Manual | 669.78 KiB | / September 10 2003 |
353841-B22.book Page i Wednesday, November 12, 2003 9:46 AM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices Document Part Number: 353841-B22 November 2003 353841-B22.book Page iii Wednesday, November 12, 2003 9:46 AM Contents U.S. Wireless Notices . 1 European Union Notice . 2 Indian Notice . 3 Brazilian Notice . 4 Japanese Notices . 4 353841-B22.book Page 1 Wednesday, November 12, 2003 9:46 AM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices Some computer models ship with one or more integrated wireless devices installed. This document includes governmental and agency regulatory notices that apply to integrated wireless devices. Some notices may not apply to your computer. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. U.S. Wireless Notices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches) during normal operation, including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 1 353841-B22.book Page 2 Wednesday, November 12, 2003 9:46 AM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices European Union Notice 0336 0682 0984 Products bearing the CE marking comply with the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC), EMC Directive (89/336/EEC), and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. CE compliance of this computer is valid only if powered with an HP-provided, CE-marked AC adapter. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms (in parentheses are the equivalent international standards and regulations):
EN 55022 (CISPR 22)Electromagnetic Interference EN 55024 (IEC 61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11)Electromagnetic Immunity EN 61000-3-2 (IEC 61000-3-2)Power Line Harmonics EN 61000-3-3 (IEC 61000-3-3)Power Line Flicker EN 60950 (IEC 60950)Product Safety EN 300 328-2Technical requirements for 2.4-GHz radio equipment EN 301 489-1, -17General EMC requirements for radio equipment EN 301 893Technical requirements for 5-GHz radio equipment 2 Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 353841-B22.book Page 3 Wednesday, November 12, 2003 9:46 AM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices The IEEE 802.11b/g wireless LAN and Bluetooth functionality of this product may be used in the following EU, EU candidate, and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. For IEEE 802.11b/g wireless LAN operation of this product in France, certain restrictions apply:
This equipment may be used for indoor application for the entire 2400- to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1-13). For outdoor use, only 2454 to 2483 MHz (channels 10-13) may be used. Private use (independent networks, personal use) does not require authorization from Autorit de rgulation des tlcommunications (ART). For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. The IEEE 802.11a functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Denmark, France, Finland, Germany, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Liechtenstein, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Please contact your local spectrum authority to determine any requirements concerning this product. Indian Notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that the end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 3 353841-B22.book Page 4 Wednesday, November 12, 2003 9:46 AM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices Brazilian Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Japanese Notices 4 Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 353841-B22.book Page 5 Wednesday, November 12, 2003 9:46 AM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices WLAN 802.11b Devices Bluetooth Devices 2. 4DS 4 2 . 4 F H 1 WLAN 802.11g Devices 2. 4OF 4 Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 5 353841-B22.book Page i Wednesday, November 12, 2003 9:46 AM 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition November 2003 First Edition October 2003 353841-B22
| 1 2 3 | CRN 10072 Q3 notebook user manual | Users Manual | 3.79 MiB | / September 10 2003 |
Hardware Guide HP Notebook Series Document Part Number: 335395-001 September 2003 This guide explains how to identify and use notebook hardware features, including connectors for external devices. It also includes power and environmental specifications, which may be helpful when traveling with the notebook. 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. SD Logo is a trademark. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Hardware Guide HP Notebook Series First Edition September 2003 Reference Number: zx5000/zv5000/nx9100 Document Part Number: 335395-001 Contents 1 Hardware Components Identifying Parts of the Notebook . 11 Display . 11 TouchPad . 13 Top . 15 Power Lights . 15 Keyboard and Drive Lights . 17 Power and Volume Controls . 19 Quick Launch Buttons and Keyboard Keys . 111 Wireless On-Off Button and Application Keys. 112 Function and Keypad Keys . 113 Front View . 115 Rear View. 118 Left Side . 120 Right Side. 123 Bottom Panel . 127 Labels. 129 Additional Standard Components . 130 Documentation Library CD . 130 Cords, Cables and Adapters. 131 2 TouchPad and Keyboard Using the TouchPad . 21 Setting TouchPad Preferences . 23 Using the Hotkeys . 24 Hotkey Quick Reference . 26 Hardware Guide iii Contents Hotkey Procedures. 27 Hotkey Commands . 27 Using Quick Launch Buttons . 210 Reprogramming the Quick Launch Buttons . 211 Keypad. 211 Using the Keypad . 211 3 Battery Packs Running the Notebook on Battery Power . 31 Inserting or Removing the Battery Pack . 32 Charging a Battery Pack. 34 Obtaining Accurate Charge Information . 35 Accessing the Battery Charge Display . 35 Placing the Power Icon on the Taskbar . 36 Managing Low-Battery Conditions . 36 Identifying a Low-Battery Condition . 36 Identifying a Critical Low-Battery Condition . 37 Verifying Hibernation Settings . 37 Resolving Low-Battery Conditions . 38 If External Power Is Available . 38 If a Charged Battery Pack Is Available . 38 If No Power Source Is Available. 38 Calibrating a Battery Pack . 39 When to Calibrate . 39 How to Calibrate . 39 Battery Conservation Procedures and Settings . 311 Conserving Power as You Work . 311 Storing a Battery Pack . 312 Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . 313 Finding More Power Information . 313 iv Hardware Guide Contents 4 Drives Understanding Drive Terms. 41 Caring for Drives and Drive Media . 42 Caring for Drives . 43 Caring for Drive Media . 44 Using Drive Media. 44 Avoiding Standby and Hibernation . 44 Displaying Media Contents . 45 Adding a Drive to the System . 46 Using the IDE Drive Light. 47 Inserting and Removing Drive Media . 48 Inserting a CD or DVD . 48 Removing a CD or DVD (With Power) . 410 Removing a CD or DVD (Without Power) . 412 Inserting a Diskette (Select Models) . 414 Removing a Diskette (Select Models) . 415 Installing an Optional HP USB Digital Drive
(Select Models) . 415 Installing an Optional SD Memory Card. 416 Connecting an Optional Digital Drive to the USB Port . 417 Inserting an Optional Digital Drive into an Optional Digital Bay . 421 Removing an Optional Digital Drive from an Optional Digital Bay . 423 Finding Optional Drive Software Information . 424 5 Audio and Video Adjusting Volume . 51 Using the Volume Buttons . 51 Using the Volume Control Icon. 52 Using the Internal Speakers . 53 Hardware Guide v Contents Connecting an Audio Device . 54 Identifying Audio Jacks. 54 Using the Microphone Jack . 56 Using the Audio-Out Jack . 56 Connecting an S-Video Device . 57 Connecting the Audio . 57 Turning a Video Device On and Off . 59 Changing the Color Television Format . 510 6 External Device Connections Connecting a Standard Device . 61 Connecting a USB Device . 62 Using a USB Device . 63 Enabling USB Legacy Support . 64 Linking to an Infrared Device (Select Models) . 64 Setting Up an Infrared Transmission. 66 Avoiding Standby While Using Infrared. 66 Connecting an Optional Cable Lock . 67 7 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem (Select Models) . 71 Connecting the Modem to an RJ-11 Jack . 73 Connecting the Modem with an Adapter. 74 Special Restrictions in Certain Countries . 75 Changing Your Modem Settings . 75 Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN). 76 Turning a Network Connection Off and On . 79 Making Wireless Network Connections
(Select Models) . 79 Turning Wireless Communication On and Off . 711 Connecting to a Wireless Network . 712 Checking the Wireless Connection Status. 712 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections
(Select Models) . 713 vi Hardware Guide Contents 8 Hardware Upgrades Obtaining Upgrades . 81 Using PC Cards . 82 Selecting a PC Card. 82 Configuring a PC Card . 82 Inserting a PC Card . 82 Stopping and Removing a PC Card. 84 Using Digital Media Cards (Select Models) . 85 Inserting an Optional Digital Media Card . 86 Removing an Optional Digital Media Card. 88 Disabling an Optional Digital Media Card . 89 Increasing Memory . 810 Displaying Memory Information. 810 Removing or Inserting a Memory Module . 811 Replacing the Hard Drive. 817 Finding More Upgrade Information. 822 9 Specifications Notebook Dimensions . 91 Operating Environment . 91 Rated Input Power . 92 Notebook Dimensions . 92 Operating Environment . 92 Rated Input Power . 93 Index Hardware Guide vii 1 Hardware Components Identifying Parts of the Notebook Components included with your notebook may vary by geographical region and by model. The following illustrations identify the standard external features included in most notebook models. Reference the illustrations that closely match your notebook. Display Component Description Display release latch Opens the notebook. Hardware Guide 11 Hardware Components Component Description Display release latch Opens the notebook. 12 Hardware Guide Hardware Components Top Power Lights Component 1 Power button light 2 Power/standby light 3 Battery light Description On: Notebook is turned on. Blinking: Notebook is in Standby. Off: Notebook is off or in Hibernation. On: Notebook is turned on. Blinking: Notebook is in Standby. Off: Notebook is off or in Hibernation. On: Battery pack is charging. Blinking: Battery pack has reached a low-battery condition. Off: AC power is applied with battery pack either fully charged or not installed, or no AC power is applied. Hardware Guide 15 Hardware Components Component 1 Power button light 2 Power/standby light 3 Battery light Description On: Notebook is turned on. Blinking: Notebook is in Standby. Off: Notebook is off or in Hibernation. On: Notebook is turned on. Blinking: Notebook is in Standby. Off: Notebook is off or in Hibernation. On: Battery pack is charging. Blinking: Battery pack has reached a low-battery condition. Off: AC power is applied with battery pack either fully charged or not installed, or no AC power is applied. 16 Hardware Guide Power and Volume Controls Hardware Components Component Description 1 Power button* When the notebook is:
Off, press button to turn on the notebook. On, briefly press button to initiate Hibernation. In Standby, briefly press button to resume from Standby. In Hibernation, briefly press button to resume from Hibernation. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. Decrease, mute, and increase the system volume:
To decrease volume, use left button. To mute or restore volume, use middle button. To increase volume, use right button. 2 Volume buttons (3)
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the function of the power button, refer to the Power chapter in the Software Guide on this CD. Hardware Guide 19 Hardware Components Component Description 1 Power button* When the notebook is:
Off, press button to turn on the notebook. On, briefly press button to initiate Hibernation. In Standby, briefly press button to resume from Standby. In Hibernation, briefly press button to resume from Hibernation. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. 2 Mute button On: Audio is muted. 3 Volume buttons (2) Decrease and increase the system volume:
To decrease volume, use left button. To increase volume, use right button.
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the function of the power button, refer to the Power chapter in the Software Guide on this CD. 110 Hardware Guide Hardware Components Wireless On-Off Button and Application Keys Component Description 1 Wireless on-off button Turns optional internal wireless device(s) on or off. 2 Windows logo key Displays Windows Start menu. 3 Applications key Displays shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. 112 Hardware Guide Front View Hardware Components Component Description 1 Display release latch Opens the notebook. 2 Power/standby light 3 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light; also referred to as hard drive/optical drive activity light 4 Battery light On: Notebook is turned on. Blinking: Notebook is in Standby. Off: Notebook is off or in Hibernation. On: The internal hard drive or optical drive bay is being accessed. On: Battery pack is charging. Blinking: Battery pack has reached a low-battery condition. Off: AC power is applied with battery pack either fully charged or not installed, or no AC power is applied.
(Continued) Hardware Guide 115 Hardware Components Component Description 5 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. 6 Volume and mute buttons (3) Decrease, mute, and increase the system volume:
To decrease volume, use left button. To mute or restore volume, use middle button. To increase volume, use right button. 116 Hardware Guide Hardware Components Component Description 1 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. 2 Power/standby light On: Notebook is turned on. Blinking: Notebook is in Standby. Off: Notebook is off or in Hibernation. 3 Display release latch Opens the notebook. 4 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light; also referred to as hard drive/optical drive activity light 5 Battery light 6 Wireless on-off button On: The internal hard drive or optical drive bay is being accessed. On: Battery pack is charging. Blinking: Battery pack has reached a low-battery condition. Off: AC power is applied with battery pack either fully charged or not installed, or no AC power is applied. Turns optional internal wireless device(s) on or off. Hardware Guide 117 Hardware Components Rear View Component Description 1 Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 2 Exhaust vent 3 External monitor connector 4 Parallel connector Allows airflow to cool internal components. Additional vents are on the bottom panel of the notebook. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct the vent. Do not allow a hard surface, such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as bedding or clothing, to block airflow. Connects an optional external monitor or overhead projector. Connects an optional parallel device, such as a printer. 5 RJ-11 jack Connects the modem cable. 118 Hardware Guide Hardware Components Component Description 1 DC power connector Connects an AC adapter. 2 Exhaust vent 3 External monitor connector 4 Parallel connector Allows airflow to cool internal components. Additional vents are on the bottom panel of the notebook. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct the vent. Do not allow a hard surface, such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as bedding or clothing, to block airflow. Connects an optional external monitor or overhead projector. Connects an optional parallel device, such as a printer. 5 RJ-11 jack (select models) Connects the modem cable.
(select models) Hardware Guide 119 Hardware Components Component 1 Security cable slot Description Attaches an optional security cable to the notebook. 2 PC Card slot (1 or 2 slots, select models) Supports an optional Type I or Type II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. 3 PC Card eject button (1 or 2 buttons, select models) Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot. 4 USB connectors (2) 5 Three drive configurations:
optional HP USB Digital Bay, optional diskette drive, no drive 6 One of 4 optical drive bay configurations Connects an optional USB device, such as a printer. Digital Bay: Supports optional pocket-sized HP USB Digital Drive. Diskette drive: Supports standard 1.4 MB diskette. No drive: No drive bay is installed. CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, DVD+RW, or DVD/CD-RW combo drives. DVD+RW drives and DVD/CD-RW combo drives can write to both recordable CDs and DVDs. (Type of drive varies by model.) 122 Hardware Guide Right Side Hardware Components Component Description 1 Audio-out headphone jack 2 Audio-in microphone jack 3 USB connector 4 1394 connector
(select models) 5 Infrared port (select models) Connects an optional headphone, headset, or powered stereo speakers. Also connects the audio function of an audio/video device, such as a television or VCR. Connects an optional external microphone. Connects an optional USB device, such as a printer. Connects an optional IEEE1394 device, such as a camcorder. Provides wireless communication between the notebook and an optional IrDA-compliant device.
(Continued) Hardware Guide 123 Hardware Components Component 6 Expansion port Description Connects optional HP Notebook Expansion bases. 7 RJ-45 network jack Connects an optional network cable. 8 S-Video-out jack Connects an optional S-Video device, such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. 124 Hardware Guide Hardware Components Component 1 Wireless LED 2 Volume buttons (3) and audio mute light 3 Audio-out headphone jack Description On: At least one optional internal wireless device is active. Off: No wireless device is active. Decrease, mute, and increase the system volume:
To decrease volume, use left button. To increase volume, use middle button. To mute or restore volume, use right button. Light on: Audio is muted. Connects an optional headphone, headset, or powered stereo speakers. Also connects the audio function of an audio/video device, such as a television or VCR.
(Continued) Hardware Guide 125 Hardware Components Component Description 4 Audio-in microphone jack 5 USB connector 6 1394 connector
(select models) 7 Infrared port
(select models) 8 Expansion port Connects an optional external microphone. Connects an optional USB device, such as a printer. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 device, such as a camcorder. Provides wireless communication between the notebook and an optional IrDA-compliant device. Connects optional HP Notebook Expansion bases. 9 RJ-45 network jack Connects an optional network cable.
- S-Video-out jack Connects an optional S-Video device, such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. 126 Hardware Guide Bottom Panel Hardware Components Component Description 1 Battery release latch Releases the battery pack from the battery bay. 2 Battery bay Holds the battery pack. 3 Exhaust vents Allows airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct the vent. Do not allow a hard surface, such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as bedding or clothing, to block airflow. 4 Hard drive bay Holds the primary hard drive. 5 Memory compartment Contains 2 memory slots, 1 of which is accessible for an optional 128-MB, 256-MB, 512-MB, or 1024-MB memory module upgrade. As shipped, the memory slot may be filled with a replaceable memory module, or it may be vacant, depending on the notebook model. Hardware Guide 127 Hardware Components Component Description 1 Battery release latch 2 Battery bay 3 Exhaust vents Releases the battery pack from the battery bay. Holds the battery pack. (Battery shipment and type vary by model.) Allows airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct the vent. Do not allow a hard surface, such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as bedding or clothing, to block airflow. 4 Hard drive bay Holds the primary hard drive. 5 Memory compartment Contains 2 memory slots, one of which is accessible for an optional 128-MB, 256-MB, 512-MB, or 1024-MB memory module upgrade. As shipped, the memory slot may be filled with a replaceable memory module, or it may be vacant, depending on the notebook model. 128 Hardware Guide Labels Hardware Components The labels affixed to the bottom of the notebook and to the inside of the battery compartment provide information you may need when troubleshooting system problems or traveling abroad with the notebook. The Service Tag label affixed to the bottom of the notebook contains the product name, product number (P/N), and serial number (S/N). You will need the notebook serial number and product number if you call customer support. The Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label affixed to the bottom of the notebook contains the Product Key number. You may need this number to update or troubleshoot problems with the operating system. The System label affixed to the inside of the battery compartment provides regulatory information about the notebook. The Product identification label affixed to the inside of the battery compartment contains the serial number (S/N) of the notebook and a code describing the original configuration of the notebook. The Modem approval label affixed to an optional internal modem provides regulatory information. The wireless certification labels affixed to the inside of the battery compartment are specific to various types of optional wireless devices. These labels provide regulatory information and lists the countries in which the optional wireless devices have been approved for use. You may need the wireless device information to use the wireless device while traveling. Hardware Guide 129 Hardware Components Additional Standard Components The components included with the notebook vary by geographic region and by model. The following illustrations and tables identify the standard external components included with most notebook models. Documentation Library CD Your notebook Documentation Library CD includes the following guides:
Hardware Guide (the document you are viewing) Software Guide Maintenance, Shipping and Travel guide Regulatory and Safety Notices Safety & Comfort Guide Troubleshooting guide Modem and Networking guide For information about using the Documentation Library CD, refer to the printed Startup Guide included with the notebook. 130 Hardware Guide Cords, Cables and Adapters Hardware Components Component 1 Power cord*
Description Connects the AC adapter to an AC electrical outlet. 2 AC adapter**
Converts AC power to DC power. 3 Modem cables
(select models)*
4 Country-specific modem adapter (included by region as required) Connects the modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack. 5 Japan-specific outlet adapter
(Japan only) Connects the AC adapter to a 2-prong electrical outlet.
*Power cords and modem cables vary in appearance by region.
**AC adapters vary by region. Hardware Guide 131 2 TouchPad and Keyboard Using the TouchPad The TouchPad duplicates the functions of an optional external mouse. To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface 1 in the direction you want to move the cursor. If the cursor continues to move after you take your finger off the TouchPad, wait a few seconds for the cursor to stop moving. Use the left and right TouchPad buttons 2 as you would the left and right buttons on an external mouse. Use the TouchPad scroll pad 3 as you would the arrows on the scroll bars on the edges of windows. This moves the viewing area up, down, right, and left. Use the TouchPad on-off button 4 to turn off the Touchpad. This also turns off the TouchPad light 5. Hardware Guide 21 TouchPad and Keyboard Identifying TouchPad components Use the TouchPad on-off button 3 to turn off the Touchpad. This also turns off the TouchPad light 4. Identifying TouchPad components 22 Hardware Guide TouchPad and Keyboard Setting TouchPad Preferences The TouchPad is supported by the mouse software in the operating system. To access the Mouse Properties window, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. Among the settings you can select are:
TouchPad tapping, which enables you to tap the TouchPad once to select an object or twice to double-click an object. Inertial Movement, which enables you to continue to scroll even though your finger has reached the edge of the TouchPad. Typing, which prevents inadvertent tapping when typing on the keyboard. Other features, such as sensitivity, virtual scrolling, mouse trails, and mouse speed preferences, are available in the Mouse Properties window. Hardware Guide 23 TouchPad and Keyboard Using the Hotkeys Hotkeys are preset combinations of the fn key 1 and one of the function keys 2. Excluding function key f2, the icons on f1 through f12 represent the hotkey functions available on your notebook. The f2 function key is not used. Identifying hotkeys 24 Hardware Guide TouchPad and Keyboard Identifying hotkeys Hardware Guide 25 TouchPad and Keyboard Hotkey Quick Reference The following table identifies the hotkey functions set at the factory. Default Function Open Help and Support Center. Not used. Open Microsoft Internet Explorer. Switch display image. Initiate Standby. Initiate QuickLock. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Play, pause, or resume an audio CD or DVD. Stop an audio CD or DVD. Play the previous track or chapter of an audio CD or DVD. Play the next track of an audio CD or DVD. Hotkey fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f5 fn+f6 fn+f7 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 fn+f11 fn+f12 26 Hardware Guide TouchPad and Keyboard Hotkey Procedures To use a hotkey command on the notebook keyboard:
Briefly press the fn key, then briefly press the second key of the command, or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key, then release both keys simultaneously. Hotkey Commands Open Help and Support Center (fn+f1) The Help and Support Center provides a comprehensive online resource tool for contacting an HP support specialist, for downloading the latest software driver updates and product information, and for learning more about using and maintaining your notebook. Press the fn+f1 hotkey to open the Help and Support Center window. Open Internet Explorer (fn+f3) Press the fn+f3 hotkey to open Microsoft Internet Explorer. Switch Display Image (fn+f4) The fn+f4 hotkey switch the image among display devices connected to the notebook. For example, if an external monitor is connected to the notebook, pressing fn+f4 switches the image among the notebook display, the external monitor display, and a simultaneous display on both the notebook and the external monitor. Hardware Guide 27 TouchPad and Keyboard Initiate Standby (fn+f5) The fn+f5 hotkey are set by default to initiate Standby. When the notebook is on, press the fn+f5 hotkey to initiate Standby. When Standby is initiated, your work is saved in random access memory (RAM), the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the notebook is in Standby, the power/standby light blinks. To exit Standby, briefly press the power button, or tap the TouchPad, a key on the keyboard, or other pointing device component. The function of the fn+f5 hotkey, called the sleep button in Windows, can be changed. For example, the fn+f5 hotkey can be set to initiate Hibernation instead of Standby. For more information about Standby, Hibernation, and changing the function of the fn+f5 hotkey, see the Software Guide on this CD, Power chapter. Initiate QuickLock (fn+f6) The QuickLock operating system security feature disables the keyboard and displays the log on screen. QuickLock does not disable the TouchPad. Before you can use this feature, you must set a Windows system password. For instructions, refer to your operating system documentation. To initiate QuickLock, press the fn+f6 hotkey. To disable QuickLock, enter your Windows system password. Decrease Screen Brightness (fn+f7) Press the fn+f7 hotkey to decrease the brightness of the notebook screen. Decreasing brightness conserves power. Increase Screen Brightness (fn+f8) Press the fn+f8 hotkey to increase the brightness of the notebook screen. 28 Hardware Guide TouchPad and Keyboard Play, Pause or Resume an Audio CD or DVD (fn+f9) If an audio CD or DVD is inserted into the optical drive, press the fn+F9 hotkey to play it. If an audio CD or DVD is playing in the optical drive, press the fn+F9 hotkey to pause it. If you have paused an audio CD or DVD in the optical drive by pressing the fn+f9 hotkey, press the fn+f9 hotkey again to resume play. Stop an Audio CD or DVD (fn+f10) If an audio CD or DVD is playing in the optical drive, press the fn+f10 hotkey to stop it. Play Previous Track of an Audio CD or DVD (fn+f11) Press the fn+f11 hotkey to select the previously played track of an audio CD or DVD that is playing in the optical drive. Play Next Track of an Audio CD or DVD (fn+f12) Press the fn+f12 hotkey to play the next track of an audio CD or DVD playing in the optical drive. Hardware Guide 29 TouchPad and Keyboard Using Quick Launch Buttons The 3 Quick Launch buttons enable you to use one keystroke to access default software applications or the Internet. Identifying the Quick Launch buttons Button Name 1 Picture 2 Media 3 Internet Default Assignment Opens My Pictures folder, and then launches the default photo and imaging software application. Launches the default multimedia software application. Opens to Microsoft Internet Explorer or to a personal Web page you can customize. 210 Hardware Guide Reprogramming the Quick Launch Buttons TouchPad and Keyboard Your notebook Quick Launch buttons can be assigned to an Internet location, a network destination, a software application, or a data file. For example, a Quick Launch button can be assigned to open your Internet browser to a favorite Web page or to open an application, such as Microsoft Word, or even a document, such as an Excel worksheet. Button assignments can be grouped into schemes. When you select a scheme, only the button assignments within that scheme are active. Button assignments and schemes are set up, changed, or deleted in the Quick Launch buttons window. To reprogram a button:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Utilities > Quick Launch. 2. On the Quick Launch tab, select the button you want to reprogram. 3. Type a label for the button, then select the application, document, folder, or Web site you want the button to open. If you want an icon for the button to appear on the taskbar or on the desktop, select that option on the Onscreen Display tab. Keypad The notebook has an internal numeric keypad and supports an optional external numeric keypad or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. Using the Keypad The keypad consists of 15 keys that can be used like the keys on an external keypad. When the keypad is turned on, each key on the keypad performs the functions indicated by the icon in the top-right corner of the key. Hardware Guide 211 TouchPad and Keyboard The standard functions of the keypad keys are still available while the keypad is turned on. See Turning the Keypad On and Off later in this chapter. Identifying the keypad keys Identifying the keypad keys 212 Hardware Guide TouchPad and Keyboard Turning the Keypad On and Off When the keypad is off, press fn+num lk 1 on the notebook to turn the keypad on. When the keypad is on, press fn+num lk on the notebook (or the num lock key on an external keypad) to turn the keypad off. The num lock light 2 turns on:
When the keypad is on, or When an optional external keypad with num lock turned on is connected to the system. The keypad cannot be turned on while an optional external keypad is connected to the USB connector on an optional HP Notebook Expansion base. Identifying the fn and num lock keys and the num lock light Hardware Guide 213 TouchPad and Keyboard Identifying the fn and num lock keys and the num lock light Switching Key Functions on the Keypad You can temporarily switch the functions of keys on the keypad between the standard function and the keypad function by using the fn key or the fn+shift key combination. To make a standard key function as a keypad key (when the keypad is turned off), press and hold the fn key while pressing the keypad key. To make a keypad key function as a standard key (while the keypad is turned on):
Press and hold the fn key to type in lowercase. Press and hold fn+shift to type in uppercase. When the fn key is released, the keys return to their original mode. Turning Num Lock Mode On or Off as You Work To turn num lock on or off on an external keypad as you work, press the num lock key on the external keypad (not on the notebook keypad). 214 Hardware Guide 3 Battery Packs Running the Notebook on Battery Power The notebook switches between AC power and battery power according to the availability of an external AC power source, always preferring AC power. If the notebook contains a charged battery pack and is running on external AC power, the notebook will switch to battery power only if the AC adapter is disconnected from the notebook. Keeping a battery pack in the notebook enables the battery pack to charge whenever the notebook is connected to external power and also protects your work in case of a power outage. On the other hand, a battery pack in the notebook slowly discharges even when the notebook is powered off. Whether to leave a battery pack in the notebook or in storage depends on how you work. Hardware Guide 31 Battery Packs Inserting or Removing the Battery Pack CAUTION: When removing a battery pack that is the only power source, initiate Hibernation or turn off the notebook to prevent loss of work. To insert or remove a battery pack:
Turn off the notebook or initiate Hibernation by briefly pressing the power button. To insert a battery pack, slide the battery into the battery bay until it is seated 1. To remove a battery pack, slide and hold the battery release latch 2 toward the rear of the notebook as you pull the battery pack from the battery bay 3. Turn on the notebook or resume from Hibernation by briefly pressing the power button. CAUTION: Do not restore power until the power/standby light turns off, indicating that Hibernation is completed. Inserting or removing the battery pack 32 Hardware Guide Battery Packs Inserting or removing the battery pack Hardware Guide 33 Battery Packs Charging a Battery Pack The battery pack automatically charges when the notebook is connected to external power through an AC adapter. When it is attached to an external power source, the battery pack charges whether the notebook is powered off or in use. The battery pack charges faster when the notebook is powered off. When the notebook is in use, charging will take longer, depending on system activity. The battery light on the notebook stays on while the battery pack is charging. The light turns off when the battery is fully charged. Identifying the battery light Identifying the battery light 34 Hardware Guide Battery Packs Placing the Power Icon on the Taskbar To place the Power icon on the taskbar, access the Power Options window, select the Advanced Tab, and select the Always Show Icon on the taskbar check box. If the Power icon is on the taskbar, it will change shape depending on whether a battery pack or AC power is the primary power source. Managing Low-Battery Conditions It is important to respond to a low-battery or critical low-battery condition. This section describes default battery settings and ways to protect your work in a low-battery condition. Identifying a Low-Battery Condition When the battery pack is the only power source for the notebook and drops to 5 percent of a full charge, the notebook has reached a low-battery condition. When this occurs, the battery light blinks and a text warning message appears on the screen. The Power Options utility allows the user to redefine a low-battery condition, set audio warnings, and change other power defaults. For details, see the Power chapter in the Software Guide on the Documentation Library CD. 36 Hardware Guide Battery Packs Identifying a Critical Low-Battery Condition If you do not resolve a low-battery condition, the notebook enters a critical low-battery condition. By default, the notebook defines a critical low-battery condition as 3 percent battery charge remaining. The battery light continues to blink and:
If Hibernation is enabled (the default setting) and the notebook is on or in Standby, the system initiates Hibernation and saves system memory to the hard drive. Unsaved work may be lost. If Hibernation is disabled and the notebook is on or in Standby, the notebook remains briefly in Standby, then shuts down. The power/standby light turns off, and the notebook cannot save system memory to the hard drive. Verifying Hibernation Settings Hibernation, enabled by default, is an important safeguard in low-battery situations. To verify that Hibernation is enabled, access the Power icon, or:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab. Make sure that the Enable Hibernate support check box is selected. Hardware Guide 37 Battery Packs Resolving Low-Battery Conditions CAUTION: If the notebook has reached a critical low-battery condition and initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power/standby light turns off, indicating that Hibernation is completed. If External Power Is Available When external power is available to the notebook, connect the AC adapter. If a Charged Battery Pack Is Available Shut down the notebook or initiate Hibernation. Then insert a charged battery pack, and turn the notebook back on. If No Power Source Is Available Save your work. Then initiate Hibernation or shut down the notebook. If the Notebook Cannot Resume from Hibernation If you cannot resume from Hibernation when power is restored to the system, you will be prompted to delete the restoration data and proceed with system boot. Unsaved data will be lost. 38 Hardware Guide Battery Packs Calibrating a Battery Pack When to Calibrate Even if a battery pack is heavily used, it should not be necessary to calibrate it more than once a month. It is not necessary to calibrate a new battery pack before first use. However, make sure that the battery pack is fully charged, especially if it is the only power source. Calibrate the battery pack under the following conditions:
When the battery status display seems inaccurate. When you observe a significant change in normal battery run time. When the battery pack has not been used for one month or more. How to Calibrate To calibrate a battery pack, you must fully charge, fully discharge, then fully recharge the battery pack. Charging the Battery Pack Fully charge the battery pack when the notebook is in use. To charge the battery pack:
1. Insert the battery pack into the notebook. 2. Connect the notebook to external power through an AC adapter. (The battery light turns on.) The battery light turns off when the battery pack is fully charged. Hardware Guide 39 Battery Packs Discharging the Battery Pack Disabling Hibernation To fully discharge the battery pack, disable Hibernation temporarily. To disable Hibernation:
Select the Power icon on the taskbar or access Power Options > Hibernate tab, and uncheck the Enable Hibernate support check box. Discharging the Battery Pack After the battery light turns off, which indicates that the battery pack is fully charged, begin discharging the battery pack. CAUTION: If you plan to leave the notebook unattended during discharge, save your work before starting the discharge procedure. To fully discharge the battery pack:
1. Select the power icon on the taskbar, or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Schemes tab. 2. Make a note of the 3 settings in the Plugged In column and the 3 settings in the Running on Batteries column, so you can reset them after calibration. 3. Select the drop-down lists and set all 6 options in both columns to Never. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Disconnect the notebook from the external power source, but do not turn off the notebook. 6. Run the notebook on battery power until the battery pack is fully discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery pack has discharged to a low-battery condition. When the battery pack is fully discharged, the power/standby light turns off and the notebook shuts down. 310 Hardware Guide Recharging the Battery Pack Battery Packs 1. Connect the notebook to external power and keep the notebook connected until the battery pack is fully recharged and the battery light turns off. You can use the notebook while the battery pack is recharging, but the battery pack will charge faster if the notebook is turned off. 2. Select the Power icon on the taskbar or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Schemes tab. 3. Reenter the 3 settings you made a note of for the 3 options in the Plugged In column and for the 3 options in the Running on Batteries column. 4. Select the OK button. CAUTION: After calibrating the battery pack, reenable Hibernation:
select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab, then select the Enable Hibernation check box. Battery Conservation Procedures and Settings Using the battery conservation procedures and settings described in the following section extends the run time of the battery pack. Conserving Power as You Work To conserve power while you use the notebook:
Plug in the AC adapter, especially if you are using a CD-ROM, DVD drive, or any external connections. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Set the automatic timeout settings to emphasize saving power. Hardware Guide 311 Battery Packs Disposing of a Used Battery Pack WARNING: There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if a battery pack is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery pack or short the contacts on a battery pack. Do not expose a battery pack to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F), or dispose of a battery pack in water or fire. When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of it in general household waste. In North America, you can dispose of battery packs by using the HP battery recycling program. This program provides a postage-paid battery pack mailer preaddressed to a reclamation facility where the metals are recycled. For more information, call the telephone number listed for your location in the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet, included with the notebook. In Europe, dispose of or recycle battery packs by using the public collection system or by returning them to HP, your authorized HP, or their agents. In other regions, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet, included with the notebook, to contact an authorized dealer, reseller, or service provider and request information about battery pack disposal. For more information about battery pack precautions and disposal and the complete text of governmental agency notices, refer to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide on this CD. Finding More Power Information For more information about conserving power, setting power preferences, and using Standby and Hibernation, refer to the Power chapter in the Software Guide on the Documentation Library CD. Hardware Guide 313 4 Drives Understanding Drive Terms Hard drives are for permanent storage of data files and software, such as system files, applications, and drivers. A hard drive is sometimes called a hard disk drive. Optional disk drives (select models) include diskette drives. A diskette drive is sometimes called a floppy disk drive or floppy drive. Drives are often used to store or transport data. Optical drives include CD and DVD drives. Optical drives are used to store or transport data and to play music and movies. DVD drives have a higher storage capacity than CD drives. DVD+RW drives and DVD/CD-RW combo drives can write to both recordable CDs and DVDs. Depending on your model, the notebook can read or write to optical drives as described in the following table. Optical Drive CD-ROM DVD-ROM DVD/CD-RW combo DVD+RW Read Write Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Hardware Guide 41 Drives Optional HP USB Digital Drives (select models) are pocket-sized, SD (Secure Digital) memory drives for storing and transferring files such as digital pictures, music, video, or large data files. An HP USB Digital Drive can be connected to an optional Digital Bay or to an USB port with the HP USB Digital Drive cable either retracted or extracted. A diskette, disk, or disc that can be inserted or removed from a drive is referred to as a drive medium. In this guide, a diskette is used in a diskette drive, a disk is used in a high-capacity disk drive, and a disc is used in an optical drive. Drive media include diskettes, CDs, and DVDs. Caring for Drives and Drive Media Drives and drive media are fragile notebook components that must be handled with care. The following cautions apply to all drives. Cautions that concern specific procedures are included with the procedures. 42 Hardware Guide Caring for Drives Drives CAUTION: To prevent damage to the notebook or a drive and loss of work:
Do not remove the internal hard drive except for repair or replacement. Do not try to remove a Digital Drive while it is still in use. Electrostatic discharge can damage electronic components. To prevent electrostatic damage to the notebook or a drive, follow these 2 precautions: (1) Discharge yourself from static electricity before handling a drive by touching a grounded metal object, and
(2) Avoid touching the connectors on a drive. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide, Electrostatic Discharge section. Excessive force can damage drive connectors. When you insert a drive, use only enough force to seat the drive. Handle a drive carefully. Do not drop it. Avoid exposing a hard drive or a diskette to devices with magnetic fields. Products with magnetic fields include video and audio tape erasure products, monitors, and speakers. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, usually while it is placed on a conveyor belt, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a hard drive or a diskette. Do not spray a drive with cleaners. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids or temperature extremes. If you mail a drive, ship it in packaging that protects it from shock, vibration, extreme temperatures, and high humidity. Label the package FRAGILE. Hardware Guide 43 Drives Caring for Drive Media CAUTION: To prevent damage to drive media:
Do not open the metal shutter of a diskette or touch the disk within the diskette case. Do not expose a diskette to a strong magnetic field, such as the security field used by a walk-through security device or a handheld security wand. Clean a CD or DVD only with a disc cleaning kit, available from most electronics retailers. Using Drive Media Avoiding Standby and Hibernation CAUTION: Initiating Standby or Hibernation while playing optical drive media may stop the play or diminish the quality of the play. Turn off all media before initiating Standby or Hibernation. If Standby or Hibernation is accidentally initiated when an optical drive is in use, you may see a warning message: Putting the computer into Hibernation or Standby may stop the playback. Do you want to continue? Select No. Resume from Hibernation or Standby by pressing the power button briefly. Audio and video may resume or you may need to restart the drive media. For details about Standby and Hibernation, refer to the Power chapter in the Software Guide on this CD. 44 Hardware Guide Drives Displaying Media Contents AutoPlay, sometimes called Autorun, is a feature of the operating system. AutoPlay displays the contents of your media on the screen when you insert a CD or DVD into an optical drive and close the tray. AutoPlay is enabled by default, but can be disabled. Setting AutoPlay Preferences AutoPlay is enabled or disabled through the operating system:
1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. Right-click the optical drive. 3. Select Properties > AutoPlay tab, and follow the instructions on the screen. Canceling AutoPlay on an Audio CD To prevent an audio CD from opening when AutoPlay is enabled, press the shift key as you insert the CD. Displaying the Contents of a CD or DVD If AutoPlay is disabled and the contents of a CD or DVD are not displayed when you insert it, you can display the contents manually:
1. Select Start > Run, then type:
X:
(where X = the drive containing the CD or DVD) 2. Press enter. A drive designation is a letter of the alphabet that the notebook uses to identify a drive. To display the drive designation of every drive in the system, select Start > My Computer. Hardware Guide 45 Drives Using the IDE Drive Light The IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light turns on when the internal hard drive or an optical drive is being accessed. The light is also referred to as the hard drive/optical drive activity light. Identifying the IDE drive light Identifying the IDE drive light Hardware Guide 47 Drives Inserting and Removing Drive Media CAUTION: To avoid playback distortion or damage to optical media, stop the CD or DVD and exit media software before inserting or removing an optical drive. Inserting a CD or DVD 1. Turn on the notebook. 2. Press the release button 1 on the drive bezel to release the media tray, then pull the tray out until it is fully extended 2. 3. Position a CD or one-sided DVD over the tray, label side up. 4. Gently press the disc near the hole onto the tray spindle 3 until the disc snaps into place. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc to position it over the tray spindle, then press it down into position. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. 5. Close the media tray 4. Inserting a CD or DVD into an optical drive 48 Hardware Guide Drives Inserting a CD or DVD into an optical drive Hardware Guide 49 Drives Removing a CD or DVD (With Power) 1. Turn on the notebook. 2. Press the release button 1 on the drive bezel to release the media tray, then pull the tray out until it is fully extended 2. 3. Remove the disc from the tray 3 by gently pushing down on the spindle while pulling up on the outer edges of the disc. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remove it. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. 4. Close the media tray. 5. Place the disc in a protective case. Removing a CD or DVD from an optical drive when power is available 410 Hardware Guide Drives Removing a CD or DVD from an optical drive when power is available Hardware Guide 411 Drives Removing a CD or DVD (Without Power) If the notebook is turned off or if no power is available, the release button on the drive will not work. To remove a disc from an optical drive without using the release button:
1. Insert the end of a paper clip into the release access 1 in the front bezel of the drive. 2. Press gently on the paper clip until the media tray is released, then pull the tray out until it is fully extended 2. 3. Remove the disc from the tray 3. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remove it. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. 4. Close the media tray. 5. Place the disc in a protective case. Removing a CD or DVD from an optical drive when power is not available 412 Hardware Guide Drives Removing a CD or DVD from an optical drive when power is not available Hardware Guide 413 Drives Inserting a Diskette (Select Models) To insert a diskette into a diskette drive, gently push the diskette, label side up, into the drive until it clicks into place. The media eject button extends when the diskette is correctly inserted. Identifying the media eject button on a diskette drive Identifying the media eject button on a diskette drive 414 Hardware Guide Drives Removing a Diskette (Select Models) To remove a diskette from a diskette drive:
1. Press the media eject button on the drive to eject the diskette. 2. Pull the diskette from the drive. 3. Place the diskette in a protective case. Installing an Optional HP USB Digital Drive (Select Models) Optional HP USB Digital Drives are pocket-sized, SD (Secure Digital) memory drives for storing and transferring files such as digital pictures, music, video, or data files. An HP USB Digital Drive can be connected to the optional Digital Bay or to the USB port with the HP USB Digital Drive cable either retracted or extracted. An SD memory card must be installed in the HP USB Digital Drive before you can install the Digital Drive in your notebook. Depending on your notebook model, you may or may not have an SD memory card. You can purchase an SD card memory card from a computer or electronics retailer. Hardware Guide 415 Drives Installing an Optional SD Memory Card To install an SD memory card into the Digital Drive:
1. Remove the cap of the Digital Drive. Removing the cap 2. Insert an SD memory card into the SD slot of the Digital Drive. Inserting an SD memory card 416 Hardware Guide Drives Connecting an Optional Digital Drive to the USB Port The optional Digital Drive can be connected to the USB port with the USB cable either retracted or extended. To connect the Digital Drive with the USB cable retracted:
1. Ensure that you have installed an SD memory card into the Digital Drive. 2. Insert the USB connector on the Digital Drive into the USB port on your notebook. Connecting the Digital Drive to the USB port Hardware Guide 417 Drives Connecting the Digital Drive to the USB port 418 Hardware Guide Drives To connect the optional Digital Drive with the USB cable extended:
1. Rotate the USB cable until it is fully extended. Extending the USB Cable 2. Insert the connector on the USB cable into the USB port on your notebook. Hardware Guide 419 Drives Connecting the extended USB cable to the USB Port Connecting the extended USB cable to the USB Port 420 Hardware Guide Drives Inserting an Optional Digital Drive into an Optional Digital Bay To insert an optional Digital Drive into the optional Digital Bay:
1. Ensure that you have installed an SD memory card into the Digital Drive. 2. Gently insert the Digital Drive, label side up, into the Digital Bay until the drive clicks into place. Inserting the Digital Drive in the Digital Bay Hardware Guide 421 Drives Inserting the Digital Drive in the Digital Bay 422 Hardware Guide Drives Removing an Optional Digital Drive from an Optional Digital Bay To remove the optional Digital Drive from the optional Digital Bay:
1. Press the Digital Drive release button 1 to eject the Digital Drive. 2. Remove the Digital Drive from the bay 2. Removing the Digital Drive from the Digital Bay Hardware Guide 423 Drives Removing the Digital Drive from the Digital Bay Finding Optional Drive Software Information Software you need to play CDs and DVDs is available on the notebook. For more information, refer to the Multimedia chapter in the Software Guide on this CD. 424 Hardware Guide 5 Audio and Video Adjusting Volume Volume can be adjusted by using the volume buttons on the notebook or by accessing the volume control software. Volume adjustment is also available within some applications. Using the Volume Buttons To adjust volume using the volume buttons:
To decrease volume, press the left volume button 1. To increase volume, press the right volume button 1. To mute or restore volume, press the middle volume button 2. Identifying the volume buttons Hardware Guide 51 Audio and Video To decrease volume, press the left volume button 1. To increase volume, press the middle volume button 1. To mute or restore volume, press the right volume button 2. Identifying the volume buttons Using the Volume Control Icon To place the volume control icon on the taskbar, select Start >
Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices icon >
Volume tab. Select the Place Volume icon in the taskbar check box. To adjust volume, double-click on the icon. To increase or decrease volume, select the slide bar and drag it up or down. To mute or restore volume, select or clear the Mute check box. If you cannot see an icon you have placed on the taskbar, the icons may be hidden. Select the arrow or thick vertical bar on the taskbar and expand to view icons. 52 Hardware Guide Audio and Video Using the Internal Speakers The internal speakers play sound in stereo from applications, the operating system, games, drive media, the Internet, and other sources. If an external device, such as a headset, is connected to the audio-out jack, sometimes called the line-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled. Identifying the internal speakers I Identifying the internal speakers Hardware Guide 53 Audio and Video Connecting an Audio Device Identifying Audio Jacks The notebook has 2 audio jacks:
The audio-out jack 1, sometimes called the line-out jack, connects a headset, headphones, or external stereo speakers. The audio-out jack is also used to connect the audio functions of an audio/video device such as a television or VCR. The audio-in microphone jack 2 connects a monoaural or stereo external microphone. Identifying audio jacks 54 Hardware Guide Audio and Video The audio-in microphone jack 1 connects a monaural or stereo external microphone. The audio-out jack 2, sometimes called the line-out jack, connects a headset, headphones, or external stereo speakers. The audio-out jack is also used to connect the audio functions of an audio/video device such as a television or VCR. Identifying audio jacks Hardware Guide 55 Audio and Video Using the Microphone Jack Your notebook is equipped with a stereo microphone jack. Using sound recording application software with an external, stereo microphone allows for stereo (dual channel) recordings and stereo playbacks. Using sound recording application software with an external, monoaural microphone only allows for monoaural (single channel) recordings and stereo playbacks. As a result, the sound will be the same on both left and right channels. When connecting a microphone to the microphone jack, use a microphone with a 3.5-mm plug. Using the Audio-Out Jack WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones or a headset. CAUTION: To prevent possible damage to an external device, do not plug a monaural plug into the audio-out jack. When connecting a device to the audio-out jack:
Use only a 3.5-mm stereo plug. For best sound quality, use 24-ohm to 32-ohm headphones. When an external audio device is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled. 56 Hardware Guide Audio and Video Connecting an S-Video Device Connecting the Audio The S-Video-out jack supports video signals only. If you are setting up a configuration that combines audio and video functions, such as playing a DVD movie on your notebook and displaying it on your television screen, you will need a standard 3.5-mm audio cable available from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug the stereo end of the audio cable into the notebook audio-out jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the audio input jack on the external device. Connecting the Video To transmit video signals through the S-Video-out jack, you will need a standard S-Video cable available from most computer or electronics retailers. Hardware Guide 57 Audio and Video Plug either end of the S-Video cable into the notebook S-Video-out jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the S-Video input (not the video output) jack on the external device. Identifying the S-Video-out jack Identifying the S-Video-out jack 58 Hardware Guide Audio and Video Turning a Video Device On and Off When an S-Video device is turned on, an image is displayed. When the device is off, an image is not displayed. To turn on a video device, use one of the following methods:
Start or restart the notebook. Access the ATI Displays tab, select Start > Control Panel >
Appearance and Themes > Display icon > Settings tab. Select the Advanced button, then select the ATI Displays tab and select the TV Power button. To conserve power, turn off the device before disconnecting the device from the system. Hardware Guide 59 Audio and Video Changing the Color Television Format Color television formats are modes by which television video signals are sent and received. To send signals between the notebook and a television, both the notebook and the television must be using the same color television format. The NTSC format is common in the United States, Canada, Japan, and South Korea. The PAL format is common in Europe, China, Russia, and Africa, and the PAL-M format is common in Brazil. Other South American and Central American countries may use NTSC, PAL, or PAL-M. Region-specific formats are set at the factory for most notebooks, but the region setting can be changed on any notebook. To change the color television format:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes >
Display icon > Settings tab. Select the Advanced button >
ATI Displays tab. 2. Select the TV button, then select the Format tab. 3. Select a television format either by name or by Country/Region:
a. To select a format by name, select Format, select a format name in the list, and select the OK button. b. To select the default format for a region or country, select Country/Region, select a location from the list, and select the OK button. 4. At the prompt, restart the notebook. 510 Hardware Guide 6 External Device Connections Connecting a Standard Device The jacks, connectors, and ports described in this guide support standard external devices. For information about which jack, connector, or port to use, refer to the documentation included with the device. For information about installing or loading any software, such as drivers required by the device, refer to the device documentation, the operating system Help files, or the device manufacturers Web site. To connect a standard external device to the notebook:
1. If you are connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off. 2. Connect the device to the correct jack or connector on the notebook. 3. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. 4. Turn on the device. If a properly connected external monitor or other display device does not display an image, try pressing the fn+f4 hotkey to switch the image to the new device. To disconnect a standard external device from the notebook, turn off the device (if it is powered), then disconnect the device from the notebook. Hardware Guide 61 External Device Connections Connecting a USB Device USB (Universal Serial Bus) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect external devices such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub to the notebook. A hub is a connecting device that can be either powered or unpowered. Optional USB hubs can be connected to a USB connector on the notebook or on an optional port replicator or to other USB devices. Hubs can support several USB devices. Powered hubs must be connected to external power. Unpowered hubs must be connected either to a USB connector on the notebook or to a port on a powered hub. The USB connectors support USB 2.0 and earlier devices. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information and software installation instructions, refer to the documentation included with the device. Identifying the two USB connectors on the left side and the one USB connector on the right side 62 Hardware Guide External Device Connections Identifying the two USB connectors on the left side and one USB connector on the right side Using a USB Device USB devices function in the system the same way as comparable non-USB devices, with one exception: by default, USB devices do not function unless an operating system that supports USB is loaded. Windows XP Home and Windows XP Professional do support USB. To use a USB keyboard or hub connected to a USB connector on the notebook during startup (before Windows loads) or in a non-Windows application or utility, enable USB legacy support. Hardware Guide 63 External Device Connections Enabling USB Legacy Support USB legacy support, disabled by default, can be enabled in Setup, which is a non-Windows utility. For more information about using Setup, see the Software Guide, Setup and Diagnostics Utilities chapter, on this CD. 1. To open Setup, turn on or restart the notebook. 2. Press F10 while the To Change System Settings, Press F10 message is displayed. 3. Use the arrow key to select the Advanced menu > USB Legacy. For navigation help, refer to the instructions on the bar at the bottom of the screen. 4. Select Enable USB legacy support. 5. Press esc or select the Exit screen and select an exit option. 6. At the exit prompt, select Yes to exit the utility or No to return to the utility. Then press enter. When Setup closes, the notebook restarts. Linking to an Infrared Device
(Select Models) Some notebook models are IrDA-compliant and can communicate with another infrared-equipped device that is also IrDA-compliant. The IrDA connection speed standard is 4 megabits per second (Mbps). The infrared port supports low-speed connections up to 115 kilobits per second (Kbps) as well as high-speed connections up to 4 Mbps. Infrared performance may vary according to:
Performance of the infrared peripheral Distance and angle between infrared devices 64 Hardware Guide External Device Connections Software applications being used Interference or obstruction between devices Infrared signals are sent through an invisible beam of infrared light and must have an unobstructed line of sight. Linking to an infrared device Linking to an infrared device Hardware Guide 65 External Device Connections Setting Up an Infrared Transmission For information about using infrared software, refer to the operating system Help files. To set up infrared devices for optimal transmission:
Prepare the infrared ports on both devices for transmission. The notebook infrared port is fully enabled when the notebook is turned on. Position the devices so that their infrared ports face each other at a distance of no more than 1 meter (3.3 feet). Position the ports so that they face each other directly. The maximum capture angle is 30 degrees, so the ports must be aligned no more than 15 degrees off center. Shield the ports from direct sunlight, flashing incandescent light, and fluorescent light. Be sure that signals from a remote control or other wireless device (such as a cell phone, headphones, or audio device) do not aim at either port. During the transmission, do not move either device and do not allow objects or movement to disrupt the beam. Avoiding Standby While Using Infrared Standby is not compatible with infrared transmission. If the notebook is in Standby, an infrared transmission cannot be initiated. If Standby initiates during an infrared transmission, the transmission stops. To resume from Standby, briefly press the power button. When the notebook resumes from Standby, the transmission may resume. If the transmission does not resume, restart the notebook. 66 Hardware Guide External Device Connections Connecting an Optional Cable Lock The purpose of security solutions is to act as a deterrent. These solutions do not prevent the product from being mishandled or stolen. To install a security cable lock:
1. Loop the security cable 1 around a secured object. 2. Insert the key 2 into the cable lock. 3. Insert the cable lock (with the key inserted) into the security cable slot 3 on the notebook. 4. Turn the key counterclockwise and remove the key. Connecting a security lock Hardware Guide 67 External Device Connections Connecting a security lock For more information about notebook security features, refer to the Security chapter in the Software Guide on this CD. 68 Hardware Guide 7 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem (Select Models) Some notebook models include an RJ-11 telephone jack, modem cable, and a preinstalled V.92 modem. You can connect your modem to a telephone line and communicate throughout the world. You can explore the Internet, send and receive e-mail messages, and use your not ebook to send and receive faxes. Your notebook contains several software programs that work with your modem:
Internet Explorer, for browsing the World Wide Web Outlook Express, for sending and receiving e-mail messages Windows Fax Console, for sending and receiving faxes For best performance, you can connect to any Internet Service Provider (ISP) or modem network that has V.90 or V.92 interoperable modems. Check with your ISP for a list of telephone numbers that support V.90 or V.92. (V.92 enables modem on-hold technology that allows an Internet session to be interrupted to answer a phone call, then resumes the Internet session after the call is complete.) Hardware Guide 71 Modem and Network Connections A modem must be connected to an analog telephone line. The maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 Kbps, even though the modem is capable of downloading at higher speeds. CAUTION: Your built-in modem may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX), cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and does not work with party lines. Some of these connections may result in excess electrical voltage and could cause a malfunction in the internal modem. Check your telephone line type prior to connecting your phone line. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a telephone cable into the RJ-45 network jack. WARNING: Connecting the notebook to a digital line can permanently damage the modem. Immediately disconnect your modem cable if accidentally connected to a digital line. CAUTION: Jacks for digital PBX systems may resemble RJ-11 telephone jacks, but are not compatible with the modem. For more information on connecting and configuring your modem, refer to the Modem and Networking guide included on this CD. 72 Hardware Guide Modem and Network Connections Connecting the Modem to an RJ-11 Jack Refer to one of the following illustrations to connect an RJ-11 modem cable. Connecting the RJ-11 modem cable Connecting the RJ-11 modem cable Hardware Guide 73 Modem and Network Connections Connecting the Modem with an Adapter Telephone jacks vary by country. To use the modem and the RJ-11 cable outside the country in which you purchased the notebook, you must obtain a country-specific modem adapter. Refer on this CD to the Modem and Networking guide for more details about using your notebook internationally. To connect the modem to an analog telephone line that does not have an RJ-11 telephone jack:
1. Plug the modem cable into the RJ-11 jack on the notebook 1. 2. Plug the modem cable into the country-specific modem adapter 2. 3. Plug the country-specific modem adapter into the telephone jack 3. Connecting a modem cable using a modem adapter 74 Hardware Guide Modem and Network Connections Connecting a modem cable using a modem adapter Special Restrictions in Certain Countries Many countries impose a blackout period after a modem repeatedly fails to connect to a service provider. The number of failed attempts and the period you must wait before trying again differ from country to country. Check with your telephone company. When using a modem, an external surge protector can prevent notebook damage by lightning or other electrical surges. Connect any approved surge protector to the modem cable whenever you are using the modem. Changing Your Modem Settings The modem is already set up to be compatible with telephone systems and modems in most areas. However, in some situations, you may have to change modem settings to match local conditions. If you have questions about local requirements, contact your telephone company. Hardware Guide 75 Modem and Network Connections Control Panel. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel to change modem settings. On the Modems tab, select Properties to set connection speeds, or on the Dialing Rules tab, select Edit to set dialing options. Communications software. Many communications applications provide options for controlling modem settings. See the Help for your software. AT commands. You can control some conditions of the modem operation using modem AT commands. AT commands are special strings of characters sent to the modem to set up specific conditions. Those command strings normally start with AT. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel. On the Modems tab, select Properties. You can type AT commands on the Advanced tab in the space for extra settings. Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN) Your notebook has an RJ-45 network jack and preinstalled 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet circuity. The notebook supports network speeds up to 10 Mbps when connected to a 10BASE-T network and 100 Mbps when connected to a 100BASE-TX network. A network cable is optional. You can connect to local area networks (LANs) that give you access to shared network resources, such as printers and file servers on your corporate network, and possibly to the Internet. To connect to a LAN:
1. Check that the existing LAN supports Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connections. 76 Hardware Guide Modem and Network Connections 2. Plug the optional network cable into the notebook RJ-45 jack 1. 3. Plug the other end into the LAN network jack 2. 4. Windows automatically detects and sets up a LAN connection. To edit settings, open Network Connections in Control Panel. Two lights on the RJ-45 jack indicate the connection status 3:
The yellow light indicates network activity. The green light indicates a link is present. Connecting an RJ-45 network cable Hardware Guide 77 Modem and Network Connections Connecting an RJ-45 network cable See Windows Help for information about setting up and using LAN connections. Select Start > Help and Support. Contact your network administrator for network information. 78 Hardware Guide Modem and Network Connections Turning a Network Connection Off and On To conserve power, turn off a network connection you are not using. To turn off a network connection, log off the network, then disconnect the network cable. To turn on a network connection, connect the network cable, then log on to the network. Making Wireless Network Connections (Select Models) Some notebook models are equipped with a wireless network device that can connect by radio signals to an 802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11g wireless local area network (WLAN) and then access computers and other resources on the network. Hardware Guide 79 Modem and Network Connections A wireless network provides all the functions of a typical wired network, but also provides for roaming. A notebook that connects to the network by radio rather than through cables can allow you to move from place to place within the networkfrom your office to a conference room, for exampleand remain on the network the entire time. Identifying the wireless antenna Identifying the wireless antenna WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches) during normal operation, including when the notebook display is closed. 710 Hardware Guide Modem and Network Connections Turning Wireless Communication On and Off Wireless networks and cellular modems are examples of devices that use wireless communication. The use of some devices may be restricted in certain situations or environments, such as when traveling in an airplane. If in doubt, be sure to ask for authorization before turning on your notebook wireless networking. Certain countries, such as Italy and Singapore, may require you to purchase a license before using the wireless function. Press the wireless on-off button to turn wireless 802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11g communication on and off. This button also turns the optional Bluetooth wireless communication on and off. The wireless indicator light on the wireless on-off button or on the front-right corner turns on when any wireless communication device is turned on. The location of the light varies by model. Putting the notebook in Standby or Hibernation, or shutting it down also turns off the wireless function. Pressing the wireless on-off button Hardware Guide 711 Modem and Network Connections Pressing the wireless on-off button Connecting to a Wireless Network You can connect to an access point that gives you access to a local area network, or you can connect directly to other computers in an ad hoc network. Before you can connect your notebook to an existing 802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11g wireless network, you have to configure the notebook. For details on how to configure your notebook for wireless networking, open the Windows Help and Support Center and enter wireless as a search topic. This provides you with overviews, tutorials, articles, and step-by-step information on setting up your wireless device. To check the status of your wireless connection, select Start >
Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections, then select the connection. Checking the Wireless Connection Status If you are within range of your wireless network, your notebook automatically connects. To check the status of your wireless connection, open Network and Internet Connections in Control Panel, then select the connection. 712 Hardware Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections (Select Models) If your notebook includes Bluetooth wireless capabilities, you can use it to make short-range radio connections to a wireless personal area network (PAN) and access other Bluetooth-compatible devices, such as other notebooks, cell phones, and printers. For details on how to use your notebook for Bluetooth wireless networking, refer to the Bluetooth CD included in your shipping box. This CD will provide you with the overviews and step-by-step information on setting up and using your Bluetooth wireless device. WARNING: The FCC does not allow unauthorized mini PCI devices to be used in this notebook. Installing an unsupported mini PCI device can prevent your notebook from operating properly and may result in a warning message. To resume proper notebook operation, remove the unauthorized device. Contact your authorized dealer, reseller, or HP service provider if a warning message about your mini PCI device displays in error. Hardware Guide 713 Hardware Upgrades Using PC Cards An optional PC Card is a credit cardsized accessory designed to conform to the standard specifications of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA). The notebook supports both 32-bit CardBus and 16-bit PC Cards, which will vary by notebook model. PC Cards can be used to add modem, sound, memory, storage, and digital camera functions to the notebook. PC Smart Card Reader and biometric identification PC Cards can add security. Selecting a PC Card The type of PC card (Type I or Type II) to use in your notebook varies by model. Zoomed video cards are not supported. Configuring a PC Card CAUTION: If you install all of the software or any of the enablers provided by a PC Card manufacturer, you may not be able to use other PC Cards. If you are instructed by the documentation included with your PC Card to install device drivers:
Do not install other software, such as card services, socket services, or enablers, that may also be supplied by the PC Card manufacturer. Install only the device drivers for your operating system. Inserting a PC Card CAUTION: To prevent damage to the PC Card connectors, use minimal force when inserting a PC Card into a PC Card slot. 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 82 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades 2. Gently push the card into the slot until the card is seated. Inserting a PC Card Inserting a PC Card Hardware Guide 83 Hardware Upgrades Stopping and Removing a PC Card CAUTION: To prevent loss of work or an unresponsive system, stop the PC Card before removing it. Stopping a PC Card, even if it is not in use, conserves power. 1. To stop a PC Card, you may need to select the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar, then select the PC Card you want to stop. (To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, select the Show Hidden Icons icon on the taskbar.) 2. To release the PC Card, press the PC Card eject button 1. 3. Gently pull out the card 2. Removing a PC Card 84 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades Removing a PC Card Using Digital Media Cards
(Select Models) Optional digital media cards are removable storage devices that provide a convenient method of storing data and sharing it with other devices such as PDAs, cameras, and other memory card-equipped PCs. The 5-in-1 Digital Media slot supports the following digital media card formats:
Secure Digital (SD) Multimedia Card (MMC) Memory Stick (MS) Memory Stick Pro (MSP) SmartMedia (SM) Hardware Guide 85 Hardware Upgrades Inserting an Optional Digital Media Card CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital media card connectors, use minimal pressure when inserting a digital media card into a Digital Media slot. To insert a digital media card:
1. Hold the digital media card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Push the media card into the Digital Media slot until the card is seated. Inserting a digital media card 86 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades Inserting a digital media card Hardware Guide 87 Hardware Upgrades Removing an Optional Digital Media Card CAUTION: To prevent loss of work or system lockup, stop the digital media card before removing it. To remove an optional digital media card:
1. Close all files and applications using the digital media card.
(To stop a data transfer, select the cancel button in the operating system Copying window.) 2. Push the media card in fully, then release. The media card will eject 1. 3. Pull the media card out of the slot 2. Removing a digital media card 88 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades Removing a digital media card Disabling an Optional Digital Media Card A digital media card inserted in the Digital Media slot uses power even when the card is not in use. Disabling the card conserves power. To disable a media card, select Start > My Computer >
right-click the drive assigned to the card > Eject. (The card is stopped but is not released from the Digital Media slot.) Hardware Guide 89 Hardware Upgrades Increasing Memory You can increase the amount of RAM (random access memory) in the notebook with an optional HP-approved memory module. The notebook contains 2 memory slots, one of which is accessible for an optional 128-MB, 256-MB, 512-MB, or 1024-MB memory module upgrade. Depending on the notebook model, the notebook may ship with a vacant memory slot. On other models the memory slot contains a preinstalled memory module that can be replaced at any time. Displaying Memory Information When RAM is increased, the operating system increases the hard drive space reserved for the hibernation file. If you experience problems with Hibernation after increasing RAM, verify that your hard drive has enough free space for the larger hibernation file. To display the amount of RAM in the system:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon > General tab. To display both the amount of free space on your hard drive and the amount of space required by the hibernation file. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Hibernate tab. 810 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades Removing or Inserting a Memory Module WARNING: To prevent exposure to electrical shock, access only the memory compartment during this procedure. The hard drive bay and the memory compartment are the only user-accessible internal compartments on the notebook. All other areas that require a tool to access should be opened only by an authorized HP service provider. WARNING: To prevent exposure to electrical shock and damage to the notebook, shut down the notebook, unplug the power cord, and remove all battery packs before installing a memory module. CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components: Before beginning this procedure, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide on this CD. 1. Save your work and shut down the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is off or in Hibernation, briefly press the power button. If your work returns to the screen, save your work, exit all applications, then shut down the notebook. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the notebook. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. Hardware Guide 811 Hardware Upgrades 5. Turn the notebook bottom side up. 6. Loosen the screw that secures the memory compartment cover 1, then tilt and remove the cover 2. Opening the memory compartment Opening the memory compartment 812 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades 7. Remove or insert the memory module. To remove a memory module:
a. Pull away the retention clips on each side of the module 1. (The module tilts up.) b. Grasp the edges of the memory module and gently pull it out of the memory slot 2. c. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. Removing a memory module Hardware Guide 813 Hardware Upgrades Removing a memory module 814 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades To insert a memory module:
a. Align the keyed (notched) edge of the module with the keyed area in the expansion slot 1. b. From a 45-degree angle, press the module into the slot until it is seated 2. c. Push the module down until the retention clips snap into place. Inserting a memory module Inserting a memory module Hardware Guide 815 Hardware Upgrades 8. Align the tabs on the memory compartment cover with the cover slots on the notebook. 9. Tilt the cover down until it is seated 1. 10. Reinsert and tighten the screw that secures the cover to the notebook 2. 11. Replace the battery pack, reconnect AC power, and restart the notebook. Closing the memory compartment Closing the memory compartment 816 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades Replacing the Hard Drive Remove the hard drive only for replacement. To replace the primary hard drive:
1. Save your work, shut down the notebook, and close the display. To prevent an unresponsive system and loss of work:
Shut down the notebook before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the notebook is on, in Standby, or in Hibernation. To verify that the notebook is off and not in Hibernation, briefly press the power button. If your work returns to the screen, shut down the notebook. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the notebook. 3. Disconnect the power cord or other external power source. 4. Remove any battery packs in the notebook. Hardware Guide 817 Hardware Upgrades 5. Turn the notebook bottom side up. 6. Loosen the 2 hard drive assembly retaining screws 1, then tilt the hard drive 2. Loosening the hard drive assembly retaining screws Loosening the hard drive assembly retaining screws 818 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades 7. Remove the hard drive assembly out of the bay. 8. Remove the 4 hard drive bracket screws 1. 9. Remove the hard drive out of the bracket 2. Removing the hard drive from the hard drive bracket Removing the hard drive from the hard drive bracket Hardware Guide 819 Hardware Upgrades 10. Insert the new hard drive into the hard drive bracket 1. 11. Replace the 4 hard drive bracket screws 2. Inserting the hard drive into the hard drive bracket Inserting the hard drive into the hard drive bay 820 Hardware Guide Hardware Upgrades 12. Reinsert the hard drive assembly into the hard drive bay until it is seated 1. 13. Tighten the 2 hard drive assembly retaining screws 2. Inserting the hard drive assembly into the hard drive bay Inserting the hard drive assembly into the hard drive bay Hardware Guide 821 Hardware Upgrades Finding More Upgrade Information For information about installing, removing, or operating an optional device, refer to the documentation included with the device. 822 Hardware Guide 9 Specifications Notebook Dimensions Dimension Height Width Depth Metric 4.2 cm 36.2 cm U.S. 1.67 in 14.25 in 281.6 cm to 284 cm 11.09 in to 11.18 in Operating Environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 10 to 35 C
-20 to 60 C 50 to 95 F
-4 to 140 F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating 3,048 m 9,144 m 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
10,000 ft 30,000 ft Hardware Guide 91 Specifications Rated Input Power Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 100240 VAC RMS 1.5 A RMS Operating frequency range 50 to 60 Hz AC When powered by a DC source This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway 18.5 V MAX with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 Vrms. Notebook Dimensions Dimension Height Width Depth Metric 4.2 cm 36.2 cm 278.5cm U.S. 1.67 in 14.25 in 10.96 in Operating Environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 10 to 35 C
-20 to 60 C 50 to 95 F
-4 to 140 F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating 3,048 m 9,144 m 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
10,000 ft 30,000 ft 92 Hardware Guide Specifications Rated Input Power Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 100240 VAC RMS 1.5 A RMS Operating frequency range 50 to 60 Hz AC When powered by a DC source This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway 18.5 V MAX with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 Vrms. Hardware Guide 93 Index battery release latch 127, 128 blackout periods, modem 75 Bluetooth wireless 713 bottom components 127, 128 buttons PC Card eject 120, 122, 84 power 19, 110 Quick Launch 111 scroll 21, 22 TouchPad 21 volume 19, 110, 116, 125, 51, 52 wireless 112, 117 C cable lock 67 cables audio 57 DC power 119 modem 131, 73 power 118 security 67 S-Video 57 caps lock light 17, 18 CD-ROM drive cancelling AutoPlay 45 definition 41 A AC adapter disconnecting 31 identifying 131 adapter, modem 74 airport security devices 43 altitude specifications 91, 92 AT commands 76 audio devices, connecting 54 audio-out jack connecting devices 56 location 54, 55 AutoPlay/autorun 45 B battery bay 128 battery light 15, 16, 115, 117 battery packs calibrating 39 charge displays 35 charging 34 conserving power 311 disposing of 313 inserting/removing 32 low-battery condition 36 recycling 313 storing 312 switching power sources 31 Hardware Guide Index1 Index displaying contents 45 inserting/removing discs 48 Certificate of Authenticity label 129 connectors 1394 123, 126 DC power 119 docking 124, 126 drive 43 external monitor 118, 119 modem 72 parallel 118, 119 power 118 USB 121, 123, 126, 62 See also infrared port; jacks conserving power, tips 311 cords 131 country-specific modem cable adapter 74 D digital media cards 85 Memory Stick Pro 85 Multimedia 85 Secure Digital (SD) 85 SmartMedia (SM) 85 Digital Media slot 120, 89 Digital Media slot light 18 disc drive. See optical drive disc, definition 42 disk, diskette, defined 42 diskette drive identifying 121 inserting/removing diskettes 414 Index2 display, internal brightness 27, 28 component location 11, 12 display switch 19, 110, 116 switching image to or from 27 See also monitor, external
(optional) docking connector 126 drive light 17, 18 drive media affected by airport security 43 caring for 44 drives affected by airport security 43 caring for 42 CD-ROM 41 diskette 121, 122, 414 DVD+RW 41 DVD/CD-RW combo 41 DVD-ROM 41 hard drive 817 HP USB Digital Drive 121, 122, 42 optical 121 shipping 43 See also optical drive DVD-ROM drive definition 41 displaying contents 45 inserting/removing discs 48 E electrostatic discharge (ESD) 811 expansion port 124, 126 external devices (optional) connecting/disconnecting 61 Hardware Guide infrared 64 USB 62, 64 F fan, vents 120, 127, 128 floppy disk drive, floppy drive. See diskette drive Fn key, in hotkeys 24 function keys 113, 114, 24 H hard drive bay 127, 128 defined 41 replacing 817 hard drive, internal displaying amount of free space on 810 space on, required for Hibernation file 810 hardware cords and cables 131 display components 11, 12 front components 115, 117 left side components 120, 122 rear panel components 118, right side components 123, 119 124, 125 top components 15, 17, 18 upgrades 81 headphone jack 123, 125 headphones, headset (optional), connecting 54, 55 Help and Support Center 27 Index Hibernation avoiding when playing media 44 exiting 19, 110 initiating 19, 110 low-battery conditions 38 hotkeys adjusting display brightness 27, 28 entering on external keyboard 27 identifying 24 initiating Standby 28 media 29 Quick Reference 26 switching among displays 27 HP USB Digital Drives connecting to USB port 417 inserting into optional Digital Bay 421 inserting SD card 415 installing 415 hub, USB 62 I IDE light 17, 115, 117 Identifying 11 infrared port linking to 64 location 123, 126 See also connectors; jacks J jacks audio-out 54, 55 headphone 123, 125 Hardware Guide Index3 microphone jack 123, 126 microphone, external 54, 55, 56 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 129 modem approvals label 129 AT commands 76 blackout periods 75 cable 131, 73 configuring 75 connecting 72 country-specific adapter 131, 74 settings 75 modem cable 131 monitor, external (optional) connector 118, 119 switching display to or from 27 Multimedia Card (MMC) 85 N NTSC television format 510 num lock 213, 214 num lock light 17, 18 number Product Key 129 serial 129 numeric keypad switching key functions 214 turning on and off 213 O operating system Product Key number 129 Index optical drive AutoPlay 45 avoiding Standby and Hibernation with 44 cancelling AutoPlay 45 inserting/removing media 48 types available 41 using media hotkeys with 29 See also media, drive optical drive bay 121 optical drive bay configurations 121, 122 overhead projector (optional) external monitor connector 118, 119 switching display to or from 27 P PAL, PAL-M television formats parallel connector, identifying 510 118, 119 PC Card component locations 120, 122 configuring 82 functions 82 increasing RAM 810 inserting/removing 82 peripherals. See external devices
(optional) pointing devices setting preferences 23 TouchPad 21 Hardware Guide Index5 Index power features conserving power 311 light locations 15 power button 19, 110 power cord 131 Power Options window 36 power/standby light 15, 16, 115 rated input 92, 93 resolving low-battery conditions 38 switching between AC and battery 31 power/standby light 117 Product Key number 129 Q Quick Launch buttons assigning 211 function 111 R RAM (Random Access Memory) 810 regulatory information modem approvals label 129 system label 129 wireless certification label 129 right side components 123, 124, 125 RJ-11 telephone jack 118, 119, 131 modem cable 73 RJ-45 network jack 124, 126, 77 Index6 S scroll button 21, 22 security cable slot 120, 122 security features 67 security, PC Smart Card Reader
(optional) 82 serial number 129 Service Tag label 129 Setup, enabling USB support 64 sleep button. See Standby slot Digital Media 810 memory 810 software AutoPlay/Autorun/auto insert notification 45 infrared 64 USB support 63 speakers 53 external 55 external (optional) 54 internal stereo 116, 117 specifications 91, 92 Standby avoiding when playing media 44 avoiding with infrared 66 exiting 19, 110, 28 initiating 28 power/standby light 15, 16, 115 S-Video cable, connecting video 58 S-Video-out jack 124, 126, 57 system label 129 Hardware Guide Index vent 118, 119 vents, fan 127, 128 video device connecting audio 57 S-Video-out jack 58 turning on and off 59 volume, adjusting 51 W Windows 111 Windows application key 111 Windows logo key 111, 112 wireless antenna 710 wireless button 112, 117 wireless device certification label 129 LAN connecting 76 turning on and off 711 wireless indicator light 711 wireless LED 125 wireless on-off button 711 T television (optional) changing color format 510 connecting audio 54, 55 temperature, operating 91, 92 top components 15 TouchPad. See pointing devices traveling with notebook battery pack temperature 312 environmental specifications 91, 92 modem approvals label 129 serial number 129 wireless certification label 129 U USB connectors 121, 123, 126 USB devices (optional) connecting 62 enabling 63 V VCR (optional) audio-out jack function 54 55 Hardware Guide Index7
| 1 2 3 | CRN 10072 Q3 regulatory info | Users Manual | 793.99 KiB | / September 10 2003 |
316782-003.book Page i Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory and Safety Notices Document Part Number: 316782-003 December 2003 This guide includes all country-specific regulatory notices and compliance information for your computer except the notices concerning wireless communication. Additional wireless regulatory notices may be included with your computer. 316782-003.book Page iii Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Regulatory and Safety Notices Third Edition December 2003 First Edition February 2003 Document Part Number: 316782-003 316782-003.book Page iii Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Contents 1 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice. 11 Modifications. 12 Cables . 12 Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) . 12 Canadian Notice . 13 Avis Canadien . 13 European Union Notice . 13 Japanese Notice . 14 Korean Notice . 14 Airline Travel Notice . 14 Energy Star Compliance . 14 Battery Notices. 15 Power Cords Notice . 16 German Ergonomics Notice. 17 Macrovision Corporation Notice . 17 Laser Safety Notices . 18 CDRH Regulations. 18 Laser Information. 19 Modem Notices . 110 Important Safety Instructions . 110 Telecommunications Device Approvals . 111 U.S. Modem Statements . 111 Canadian Modem Statements . 113 New Zealand Modem Statements . 114 Regulatory and Safety Notices iii 316782-003.book Page iv Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Contents 2 Electrostatic Discharge Preventing Electrostatic Discharge . 21 Handling Drives. 21 Handling Internal Components . 21 Grounding Methods . 22 iv Regulatory and Safety Notices 316782-003.book Page 1 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM 1 Regulatory Notices This chapter provides all country-specific regulatory notices and compliance information for your computer except the notices concerning wireless communication. Additional wireless regulatory notices may be included with your computer. Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Regulatory and Safety Notices 11 316782-003.book Page 2 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo
(United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about your product that are not related to this declaration, refer to the printed Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your product for customer support information. Or write to:
Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to:
Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333. To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. 12 Regulatory and Safety Notices 316782-003.book Page 3 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply with the EMC Directive
(89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European Community and if this product has telecommunication functionality, the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC). Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms (in parentheses are the equivalent international standards and regulations):
EN 55022 (CISPR 22)Electromagnetic Interference EN 55024 (IEC61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11)Electromagnetic Immunity EN 61000-3-2 (IEC61000-3-2)Power Line Harmonics EN 61000-3-3 (IEC61000-3-3)Power Line Flicker EN 60950 (IEC 60950)Product Safety Regulatory and Safety Notices 13 316782-003.book Page 4 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Japanese Notice Korean Notice Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Energy Star Compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. 14 Regulatory and Safety Notices 316782-003.book Page 5 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Battery Notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short the external contacts on, or dispose of a computer battery pack in fire or water. Replace only with the HP battery pack for this computer. N In Europe, do not dispose of batteries with general household waste. Dispose of or recycle them by using the public collection system or returning them to HP, your authorized HP partners, or their agents. CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. For information about removing a battery pack, refer to your model-specific documentation. Regulatory and Safety Notices 15 316782-003.book Page 6 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Power Cords Notice If you were not provided with a power cord for your computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with your computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the products electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 feet) and 2 m (6 feet). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your HP authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Only an AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an option from HP should be used with the computer. 16 Regulatory and Safety Notices 316782-003.book Page 7 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices German Ergonomics Notice Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Macrovision Corporation Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Regulatory and Safety Notices 17 316782-003.book Page 8 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Laser Safety Notices All HP systems equipped with laser products comply with appropriate safety standards, including IEC 60825. With specific regard to the laser, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products. It does not emit hazardous light; the beam is totally enclosed during all modes of customer operation and maintenance. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This system is classified as a Class 1 laser product. This label appears on the laser product. 18 Regulatory and Safety Notices 316782-003.book Page 9 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Laser Information Laser Type: Semiconductor GaAlAs Wave Length: 780 35 nm Divergence Angle: 53.5 degrees 1.5 degrees Output Power: Less than 0.2mW or 10,869 Wm-2sr-1 Polarization: Circular Numerical Aperture: 0.45 0.04 Only authorized technicians trained by HP should attempt to repair this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed to allow only subassembly/module level repair. Because of the complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, no one should attempt to make repairs at the component level or to make modifications to any printed wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. Regulatory and Safety Notices 19 316782-003.book Page 10 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Modem Notices Important Safety Instructions WARNING: When using this device, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord in order to reduce the risk of fire. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the network
(RJ-45) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS 110 Regulatory and Safety Notices 316782-003.book Page 11 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Telecommunications Device Approvals The telecommunications device in your computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the documentation included with the product to ensure the product is configured for the country in which it is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause your modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, your modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when selecting a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. U.S. Modem Statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Regulatory and Safety Notices 111 316782-003.book Page 12 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this HP equipment, refer to the printed Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your computer for information about obtaining customer support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. 112 Regulatory and Safety Notices 316782-003.book Page 13 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.) In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian Modem Statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Regulatory and Safety Notices 113 316782-003.book Page 14 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices New Zealand Modem Statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms Specifications:
a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. 114 Regulatory and Safety Notices 316782-003.book Page 15 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Regulatory Notices Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (S0 set between 2 and 10). Voice Support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service. Regulatory and Safety Notices 115 316782-003.book Page 1 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM 2 Electrostatic Discharge A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. Before handling electrostatic-sensitive components, discharge static electricity by using one of the methods described in this chapter. Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Handling Drives Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching an exterior unpainted metal surface of a device that is connected to an electrical outlet by a grounding plug. Do not touch the connector pins on a drive or the computer. Handling Internal Components When you are removing or installing internal components, use the following precautions:
Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Have everything needed for the installation within reach so that you do not need to leave the area after beginning the procedure. Use nonmagnetic tools. Regulatory and Safety Notices 21 316782-003.book Page 2 Thursday, October 2, 2003 11:08 AM Electrostatic Discharge Before touching an electronic component, discharge static electricity by using one of the grounding methods described later in this chapter. If you must leave the area during the procedure, remember to reground yourself before resuming the procedure. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. Grounding Methods If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, unplug it after being properly grounded and before removing a cover. Use one or both of the following grounding methods:
Touch an exterior unpainted metal surface of a device that is connected to an electrical outlet by a grounding plug. Use a wrist strap connected by a ground cord to the computer chassis. Wrist straps are flexible grounding straps with a minimum of one megohm 10 percent resistance in the ground cords. To provide proper ground, wear the strap snugly against the skin. If you need more information about static electricity or assistance with component removal or installation, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your product for customer support information. 22 Regulatory and Safety Notices
| 1 2 3 | CRN 9475 Q1 notebook user manual | Users Manual | 1.38 MiB |
HP Notebook PC Reference Guide Notice This manual and any examples contained herein are provided as is and are subject to change without notice. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard Co. shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or the examples herein. Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 2003. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation of this manual is prohibited without prior written permission of Hewlett-Packard Company, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The programs that control this product are copyrighted and all rights are reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation of those programs without prior written permission of Hewlett-Packard Co. is also prohibited. Portions of the programs that control this product may also be copyrighted by Microsoft Corporation, Phoenix Technologies, Ltd., ATI Technologies Inc., Intel Corporation, and Adobe Systems Incorporated. See the individual programs for additional copyright notices. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Pentium and the Intel Inside logo are U.S. registered trademarks and Celeron and SpeedStep are U.S. trademarks of Intel Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Reference Guide Second Edition (March 2003) Part Number: 311074-002 ii Reference Guide Important Safety Information CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunications line cord to connect a modem to the telephone wall jack. In Australia, the computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. When using your notebook computer with a telephone connection, always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, and injury to persons:
Do not use this product with a telephone connection near water (for example, near a bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a wet basement). Avoid using a telephone connection (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning. Do not use a telephone connection to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this guide. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. Disconnect the modem cable before opening the computer case or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. Do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into the network (LAN) receptacle. Reference Guide iii HP Software Product License Agreement Your HP product contains software programs. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE PROCEEDING TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT. RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT THE CUSTOMER AGREES TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PROCEEDING TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT, YOU MUST NOW EITHER REMOVE THE SOFTWARE FROM YOUR HARD DRIVE AND DESTROY THE MASTER DISKETTES, OR RETURN THE COMPLETE HP PRODUCT AND SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND. PROCEEDING WITH CONFIGURATION SIGNIFIES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE LICENSE TERMS. UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED BELOW, THIS HP SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL GOVERN THE USE OF ALL SOFTWARE THAT IS PROVIDED TO YOU AS PART OF THE HP PRODUCT AND SHALL SUPERSEDE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE WARRANTY STATEMENT THAT MAY BE INCLUDED IN THIS HP PRODUCT OR MAY BE FOUND ONLINE. Operating system and software applications by Microsoft are licensed to you under the Microsoft License Agreement contained in the Microsoft documentation or displayed on your screen when Microsoft Software Products are launched. For a PC supplied with a Microsoft operating system: When you start the PC and accept the Microsoft End-user License Agreement (EULA), your license rights are valid only if a Certificate of Authenticity (COA) label corresponding to your Microsoft operating system is provided with your PC. The COA label can usually be found on the bottom of the computer. If the COA label does not correspond to your Microsoft operating system or is missing, contact your HP reseller for details. Other non-HP Software and Operating Systems are covered by the appropriate vendor license. The following License Terms govern the use of the HP software:
USE. Customer may use the software on any one HP product. Customer may not network the software or otherwise use it on more than one HP product. Customer may not reverse assemble or decompile the software unless authorized by law. COPIES AND ADAPTATIONS. Customer may make copies or adaptations of the software (a) for archival purposes or (b) when copying or adaptation is an essential step in the use of the software with an HP product so long as the copies and adaptations are used in no other manner. iv Reference Guide OWNERSHIP. Customer agrees that he/she does not have any title or ownership of the software, other than ownership of the physical media. Customer acknowledges and agrees that the software is copyrighted and protected under the copyright laws. Customer acknowledges and agrees that the software may have been developed by a third party software supplier named in the copyright notices included with the software, who shall be authorized to hold the Customer responsible for any copyright infringement or violation of this Agreement. PRODUCT RECOVERY CD-ROM OR DVD. If your HP product was shipped with a product recovery CD-ROM or DVD: (i) The product recovery CD-ROM or DVD and/or support utility software may only be used for restoring the hard disk of the HP product with which the product recovery CD-ROM or DVD was originally provided.
(ii) The use of any operating system software by Microsoft contained in any such product recovery CD-ROM or DVD shall be governed by the Microsoft License Agreement. TRANSFER OF RIGHTS IN SOFTWARE. Customer may transfer rights in the software to a third party only as part of the transfer of all rights and only if Customer obtains the prior agreement of the third party to be bound by the terms of this License Agreement. Upon such a transfer, Customer agrees that his/her rights in the software are terminated and that he/she will either destroy his/her copies and adaptations or deliver them to the third party. SUBLICENSING AND DISTRIBUTION. Customer may not lease, sublicense the software, or distribute copies or adaptations of the software to the public in physical media or by telecommunication without the prior written consent of Hewlett-
Packard. TERMINATION. Hewlett-Packard may terminate this software license for failure to comply with any of these terms provided Hewlett-Packard has requested Customer to cure the failure and Customer has failed to do so within thirty (30) days of such notice. UPDATES AND UPGRADES. Customer agrees that the software does not include updates and upgrades which may be available from Hewlett-Packard under a separate support agreement. EXPORT CLAUSE. Customer agrees not to export or re-export the software or any copy or adaptation in violation of the U.S. Export Administration regulations or other applicable regulation. Reference Guide v U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure is subject to HP standard commercial license terms and for non-DOD Departments and Agencies of the U.S. Government, the restrictions set forth in FAR 52.227-19(c)(1-2)
(June 1987) Hewlett-Packard Company, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304 U.S.A. Copyright (c) 2000 Hewlett-Packard Company. All Rights Reserved. Customer further agrees that Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252-227-7014 (June 1995) or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101(a), or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. The Customer agrees that it has only those rights provided for such Software by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved. SUPPORT POLICY FOR MICROSOFT OPERATING SYSTEMS SERVICE PACK. HP will provide end user support for HP PCs that use Microsoft Operating Systems, including its latest service packs. This support will be available 30 days after the service pack being released by Microsoft. vi Reference Guide Contents Getting Started with Your Notebook .......................................................................1 Identifying Parts of the Notebook ..........................................................................2 Front panel and right panel components...........................................................2 Left panel and back panel components.............................................................4 Bottom panel components ................................................................................6 Status lights.......................................................................................................8 Setting Up Your Notebook...................................................................................10 Step 1: Insert the battery.................................................................................10 Step 2: Connect AC power .............................................................................11 Step 3: Connect a phone line ..........................................................................12 Step 4: Turn on the notebook .........................................................................13 Step 5: Set up Windows..................................................................................13 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................15 Operating Your Notebook ....................................................................................16 Default power settings ....................................................................................16 To reset the notebook......................................................................................17 To change the boot device ..............................................................................17 To use the TouchPad ......................................................................................18 To use the function hot keys...........................................................................19 To use the One-Touch buttons........................................................................20 To use the Windows and Applications keys...................................................21 To use the ALT GR key .................................................................................21 Using CDs or DVDs.............................................................................................22 To insert or remove a CD or DVD .................................................................22 To play DVD movies......................................................................................23 To create or copy CDs ....................................................................................23 Securing Your Notebook......................................................................................24 To set up password protection ........................................................................24 To lock your notebook....................................................................................24 To attach a security cable ...............................................................................25 To protect against viruses ...............................................................................25 To lock the hard drive.....................................................................................26 Reference Guide vii Taking Care of Your Notebook............................................................................27 To protect your hard drive ..............................................................................27 To maintain your notebook.............................................................................27 To safeguard your data ...................................................................................28 To extend the life of the display .....................................................................28 To clean your notebook ..................................................................................28 Batteries and Power Management..........................................................................29 Managing Power Consumption ............................................................................30 How the notebook manages power automatically..........................................30 Using Battery Power.............................................................................................32 To check battery status ...................................................................................32 To respond to a low-battery warning..............................................................33 To recharge the battery ...................................................................................33 To get the most from your batteries................................................................34 Modem and Network Connections .........................................................................35 Using the Modem .................................................................................................36 To connect the modem....................................................................................37 To change your modem settings.....................................................................38 Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN).......................................................39 Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only).............................40 To prepare for connections .............................................................................40 To turn wireless communication on and off...................................................42 Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) ...........................44 To turn Bluetooth communication on and off ................................................44 To prepare for Bluetooth connections ............................................................45 To send or receive files using Bluetooth ........................................................46 Add-On Devices ........................................................................................................47 Connecting PC Cards ...........................................................................................48 To insert or remove a PC Card .......................................................................48 Connecting External Devices ...............................................................................50 To connect an audio device ............................................................................50 To use an external monitor .............................................................................52 To connect an IEEE 1394 device (select models only)..................................53 To connect an infrared device (select models only).......................................54 To use a port replicator (select models only) .................................................55 Installing Additional RAM (Memory) .................................................................58 To install a RAM expansion module..............................................................58 To remove a RAM expansion module............................................................60 viii Reference Guide Replacing the Hard Drive.....................................................................................62 To replace the hard drive ................................................................................62 To replace the hard drive holder.....................................................................63 To prepare a new hard drive ...........................................................................64 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.........................................................................65 Troubleshooting Your Notebook..........................................................................66 Audio problems ..............................................................................................66 CD-ROM and DVD problems........................................................................67 Display problems ............................................................................................68 Hard drive problems .......................................................................................69 Heat problems.................................................................................................70 Infrared problems............................................................................................70 Keyboard and pointing device problems ........................................................71 Local area network (LAN) problems..............................................................72 Memory problems...........................................................................................73 Modem problems ............................................................................................73 PC Card problems...........................................................................................76 Performance problems ....................................................................................76 Power and battery problems ...........................................................................77 Printing problems............................................................................................79 Serial, parallel, and USB problems ................................................................80 Startup problems.............................................................................................81 Wireless problems ..........................................................................................82 Configuring Your Notebook ................................................................................84 To run the BIOS Setup utility.........................................................................84 To change video memory settings using BIOS Setup utility .........................87 Reinstalling and Updating Software.....................................................................88 To replace a damaged QuickRestore System Recovery CD............................88 Reference Information.............................................................................................89 Modem Reference Information ............................................................................90 Modem Reference (Conexant)........................................................................90 Safety Information................................................................................................97 Power cords ....................................................................................................97 Battery safety ..................................................................................................98 Laser safety.....................................................................................................98 LED safety ......................................................................................................99 Mercury safety ................................................................................................99 Exposure to radio frequency radiation..........................................................100 Reference Guide ix Regulatory Information ......................................................................................101 U.S.A. ..........................................................................................................101 Canada ..........................................................................................................103 European Union ............................................................................................104 Japan .............................................................................................................106 New Zealand.................................................................................................107 Russia............................................................................................................108 International..................................................................................................108 Index ........................................................................................................................111 x Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Reference Guide 1 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Components included with the notebook vary by geographical region and features selected. The following illustrations identify the standard external components included with most notebook models. Find the illustrations that match your notebook to identify your components. Front panel and right panel components Hard drive Infrared port (select models only) 7 8 9 Wireless on-off button and indicator light
(select models only) 10 Battery 11 CD-ROM, DVD, or other drive 12 PS/2 port 1 Notebook open/close latch 2 One-Touch buttons 3 Keyboard status lights 4 Power button: turns the notebook on and off 5 TouchPad, scroll pad, Click buttons, and an on-off button 6 Main status lights (left to right): power mode, hard drive activity, and battery 2 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notebook open/close latch One-Touch buttons Keyboard status lights Power button: turns the notebook on and off TouchPad, scroll pad, Click buttons, plus on-off button Main status lights (left to right): power mode, hard drive activity, and battery Infrared port (select models only) 8 Wireless on-off button and indicator light
(select models only) Battery 9 10 Audio mute button, audio mute light, and volume control 11 Audio jacks (left to right): audio out
(headphones), external microphone 12 CD-ROM, DVD, or other drive 13 Universal serial bus port (USB) Reference Guide 3 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Left panel and back panel components 8 Cable lock slot (security connector) 9 RJ-11 jack: connects the modem cable 10 PC Card and CardBus slot and button 11 12 Audio jacks (left to right): external microphone, IEEE 1394 port (select models only) audio out (headphones) 13 Volume control 14 Audio mute button and audio mute light 15 Diskette drive (select models only) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AC adapter jack Universal serial bus ports (USB) RJ-45 jack: connects a network cable S-Video out jack Parallel port (LPT1): use this port for a parallel printer or other parallel device Serial port (COM1): use this port for a serial mouse, modem, printer, or other serial device External monitor port 4 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook 1 2 3 4 5 AC adapter jack Two USB ports RJ-45 network jack: connects a network cable PS/2 port Parallel port (LPT1): use this port for a parallel printer or other parallel device External monitor port S-Video out jack Cable lock slot (security connector) RJ-11 jack: connects a modem cable IEEE 1394 port (select models only) 6 7 8 9 10 11 PC Card and CardBus slot and buttons 12 Diskette drive (select models only) Reference Guide 5 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Bottom panel components 1 2 3 Hard drive Battery latch RAM (memory) cover 4 5 6 Reset button Docking port (select models only) Mini PCI cover (no user parts inside) 6 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook 1 2 3 Hard drive Battery latch Mini PCI cover (no user parts inside) 4 5 6 RAM (memory) cover Docking port (select models only) Reset button Reference Guide 7 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Status lights The notebook includes a number of status lights that report power and battery status, drive activity, and keyboard functions such as Caps Lock and Num Lock. The following diagram shows the main status lights on the front of the notebook. 1 Power mode Onnotebook is on (even if the display is off) Blinkingnotebook is in Standby Offnotebook is off or in Hibernation 2 Hard drive activity Onnotebook is accessing the hard drive 3 Battery status GreenAC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged AmberAC adapter is connected and the battery is charging BlinkingAC adapter is connected and the battery is missing or has a fault OffAC adapter is not connected 8 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook The keyboard status lights, located above the keyboard, indicate the states of the keyboard locks. 1 Caps Lock On. Caps Lock is active. 2 Num Lock On. Num Lock is active. (The Keypad Lock must also be on to use the embedded keypad.) 3 Keypad Lock On. The embedded keypad is active (Fn+F8). Num Lock must also be for the numeric keys. Otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). Reference Guide 9 Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook WARNING Improper use of keyboards and other input devices has been associated with ergonomic injury. If you are using your notebook as your primary computer, or using it for extended periods, you should use it with a full-sized keyboard, monitor, and mouse. Docking accessories offer quick, easy connections to these devices. This can reduce the risk of ergonomic injury. For information about reducing your risk, see the Safety & Comfort Guide on this CD included with your notebook. When you set up your notebook for the first time, you will charge the battery, connect the AC adapter, turn on the notebook, and run the Windows setup program. Step 1: Insert the battery WARNING Do not mutilate or puncture batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in fire, or they can burst or explode, releasing hazardous chemicals. Rechargeable batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly. Your notebook is shipped with the battery installed. If the battery has been removed, you should install it:
1. Turn the notebook upside down. 2. Insert the connector end of the battery into the battery compartment, then slide the battery in until it latches. 10 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Step 2: Connect AC power CAUTION Use only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Using the wrong AC adapter could damage the notebook or adapter or cause data loss and may void your warranty. 1. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. 2. Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 3. Plug the power cord into a wall outlet. The notebook battery starts charging. Important When unplugging the power cord, unplug it from the wall outlet before unplugging it from the AC adapter. While the battery is charging, you can continue with the Step 3: Connect a phone line section. Reference Guide 11 Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Step 3: Connect a phone line 1. Make sure the telephone line is an analog line, sometimes called a data line.
(Do not use a digital line.) 2. Connect the telephone cord (RJ-11) into a telephone jack. 3. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the RJ-11 modem jack on the notebook. For details about using the modem, see Using the Modem later in this guide. 12 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Step 4: Turn on the notebook Press the power button above the left side of the keyboard. The notebook boots up and Windows starts automatically. Hint If your notebook does not turn on when operating on battery power, the battery may be out of power. Plug in the AC adapter, then press the power button again. Leave the AC adapter plugged in for several hours to fully charge the battery. Charge times will vary. Step 5: Set up Windows Your notebook has the Microsoft Windows operating system preinstalled on its hard drive. The first time you turn on your notebook, the Windows Setup program runs automatically so you can customize your setup. 1. Follow the Setup program instructions on the screen. If the program prompts you to enter the Product ID code, locate the code on the bottom of the notebook. 2. Check the modem country or region settings. Select Start > Control Panel >
Printers and Other Hardware > Phone and Modem Options, then choose your country or region. Reference Guide 13 Basic Operation Reference Guide 15 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook Operating Your Notebook You can start and stop your notebook using its power button. However, at certain times you may want to use other methods to start or stop the notebookdepending on power considerations, types of active connections, and startup time. Power mode ONPower status light will turn on. OFFPower status light will turn off. StandbyPower status light will blink. Default power settings To enter this mode Briefly press the power button. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Stand By. or Allow the system to time out. Hibernation Power status light will turn off. If the unit is already on, briefly press the power button. or Press Fn+F12. or Allow the system to time out. Function Powers on the notebook. Powers off the notebook. Saves significant power. Turns off the display and other components. Maintains current session in RAM. Restarts quickly. Restores network connections. Saves maximum power. Saves current session to disk, then shuts down. Restores network connections. You can also customize the way these power modes work. See the Batteries and Power Management chapter in this guide. 16 Reference Guide Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To reset the notebook Occasionally, you may find that Windows or the notebook has stopped responding and will not let you turn the notebook off. If this happens, try the following procedures in this order:
If possible, shut down Windows. Press CTRL+ALT+DEL, then select Shut Down, Restart. or Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds until the display shuts down. Any unsaved data will be lost. Then press the power button again to restart. or Insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook, then press the power button to restart. To reset the notebook while it is docked in a port replicator, you can press the reset button on the left side of the port replicator. To change the boot device The notebook normally boots from its internal hard drive. You can also boot the notebook from a diskette drive, a CD-ROM drive, or an internal network interface card. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press ESC to display the Boot menu. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the boot device, then press ENTER. If you want to boot from a specific device whenever it is present, change the boot order using the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance chapter in this guide. Reference Guide 17 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the TouchPad The TouchPad includes an on-off button so you can turn off the TouchPad to avoid moving the pointer accidentally, such as by touching the pad while typing. The indicator light turns off when you turn off the TouchPad. 1 Click buttons. The Click buttons work like the left and right buttons on a standard mouse. 2 TouchPad (touch-sensitive pointing device). 3 TouchPad on-off button and indicator light. 4 Scroll pad. The scroll pad scrolls vertically to display the contents of the active window. 18 Reference Guide Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the function hot keys The combination of the Fn key plus another key creates a hot keya shortcut key sequencefor various system controls. To use a hot key, press and hold Fn, press the appropriate second key, then release both keys. This hot key Fn+F1 Fn+F2 Fn+F8 Fn+F12 Fn+NumLock Fn+Page Up Fn+Page Down Fn+Backspace Does this Decreases the display brightness. Increases the display brightness. Toggles the built-in keypad on and off. Does not affect an external keyboard. If Num Lock is on, then the numeric functions are active. Otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). Enters Hibernation. Toggles Scroll Lock on and off. Increases the audio volume and cancels the mute setting. Decreases the audio volume. Mutes/unmutes the audio output. Reference Guide 19 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the One-Touch buttons Your notebook includes five One-Touch buttons that can start any application or open a document or Web site with a single press. Press a One-Touch button to open the corresponding application, document, or Web site. To program a One-Touch button 1. Select Start > All Programs > Utilities > One Touch. 2. On the One-Touch tab, select the button you want to reprogram. 3. Type a label for the button, then select the application, document, folder, or Web site you want the button to open. 4. If you want a label to appear onscreen when you press a One-Touch button, select that option on the Onscreen Display tab. 20 Reference Guide Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the Windows and Applications keys The Windows key brings up the Windows Start menu. This is the same as selecting the Start button on the taskbar. The Applications key brings up the shortcut menu for the selected item. This is the same menu that appears when you right-click while pointing at the selected item. This key combination Windows key+E Windows key+F1 Windows key+F Windows key+M Shift+Windows key+M Windows key+R Does this Runs Windows Explorer Runs Windows Help Runs Windows Find: Search Minimizes all displayed windows Returns all minimized windows to original size Runs the Windows Run dialog box To use the ALT GR key Non-U.S. keyboards have an ALT GR key to the right of the spacebar. This is a shift key that provides access to certain special keyboard characters. For a character in the lower-left corner of a key, press and hold ALT GR to type the character. 1 Shifted 2 Unshifted 3 ALT GR Reference Guide 21 Basic Operation Using CDs or DVDs Using CDs or DVDs To insert or remove a CD or DVD CAUTION Do not remove a CD or DVD while the notebook is reading it. Otherwise, the notebook could stop responding and you could lose data. Press the CD or DVD gently, but firmly, onto the spindle to avoid damage to the disk or drive. 1. Press the button on the face of the CD or DVD drive. If you are using this drive for the first time, be sure to remove the cardboard packing insert if present. 2. Place the CD or DVD into the drive (label facing up), then gently press down to seat it on the spindle. or Remove the CD or DVD. 3. Slide the tray back into the module to close it. If your notebook loses power, you can manually open the drive to remove a CD. Insert a straightened paper clip into the recessed hole on the front of the drive to open it. The location of the CD or DVD drive varies by model. 22 Reference Guide Hint Important Basic Operation Using CDs or DVDs To play DVD movies If your notebook is equipped with a DVD or other DVD readable drive, it also includes a DVD player software that lets you play DVD movies. Select Start > All Programs > Multimedia > DVD Player > InterVideo WinDVD. For best performance while playing movies on battery power, set the Control Panel power scheme to Portable/Laptop. DVDs can have regional codes embedded in the disc data. These codes prevent DVD movies from being played outside the region of the world in which they are sold. If you get a region code error, you are trying to play a DVD intended for a different region. Most DVD drives let you change the region code only a limited number of times
(usually no more than four). When you reach this limit, your last change to the region code will be hard-coded on the DVD drive, and will be permanent. Your warranty does not cover the expense of correcting this situation. Refer to the Help for your DVD player software for details about setting region codes. To create or copy CDs If your notebook is equipped with a DVD/CD-RW combo drive, it also includes software such as Roxio Easy CD Creator that lets you copy or create CDs. Follow the instructions that are included with the software. Read and write quality may vary by media. Reference Guide 23 Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook Securing Your Notebook To set up password protection You can protect your notebook from access by another user when you set up password protection, which is available through Windows and through the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance chapter. For complete protection, set passwords in Windows as well as through BIOS Setup. To cancel password protection, set an empty password. Windows 1. Select Start > Control Panel > User Accounts, then select your account. 2. Select Create a Password, then set the password. 3. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 4. On the Advanced tab, select the option to prompt for a password when the notebook leaves Standby. To lock your notebook To protect against unauthorized access while your notebook is running, lock the notebook before leaving it unattended, or set up a screen saver with a Windows password. You can lock the notebook these ways:
If a One-Touch button is assigned to Quick Lock, press that button. or Press CTRL+ALT+DEL, then select Lock Computer. To unlock the notebook, follow your normal logon steps. 24 Reference Guide Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook To attach a security cable Your notebook includes a built-in connector to secure the notebook with a cable and a lock (such as the Kensington MicroSaver lock system, available at many computer stores). 1 Wrap the cable around a secure object, such as a table leg. 2 3 Insert the cable into the security cable slot on the notebook. Lock it with the cable lock key, then store the key in a safe place away from the notebook. To protect against viruses Virus-protection software can help protect the integrity of your data. This is especially important if you use the Web. Your notebook comes equipped with the Norton AntiVirus software. You can get detailed instructions from the Norton online Help. Because new viruses appear frequently, you will also want to update the program virus definitions periodically. Norton AntiVirus updates are on the Web at www.symantec.com. Reference Guide 25 Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook To lock the hard drive The notebook enables you to lock its internal hard drive to help keep your information secure. Hard drive lock does not protect a second hard drive installed in the module bay. CAUTION When you enable hard drive lock, the current BIOS user password (or administrator password if that is the only password set) is encoded on the hard drive. If you move the hard drive to another computer, you cant access the drive until you set the user (or administrator) password to match the drive password. After you match the drive password, you can change the computer (and drive) password. If you forget the password, you cannot recover your data. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press F2 to enter the BIOS Setup utility. 3. From the Security menu, enable Password Required to Boot. 4. From the Security menu, enable Internal hard drive lock. 5. Press F10 to save and exit BIOS Setup. 26 Reference Guide Taking Care of Your Notebook Basic Operation Taking Care of Your Notebook Use the following recommendations to maintain your notebook during everyday use and prevent potential physical damage or data loss. To protect your hard drive Hard drives, as well as other internal components, are not indestructible and can be damaged by inappropriate handling and operation. Avoid bumps or jolts. Do not operate the notebook while traveling over bumpy terrain. Put the notebook in standby or shut it down before transporting it. This turns off the hard drive. A drop of a few inches onto a rigid surface while the hard drive is operating could destroy data or damage the drive. Carry the notebook in a padded case to protect against bumps and jolts. Set down the notebook gently. To maintain your notebook Provide adequate ventilation around the notebook. Always set the notebook on a flat surface, so that air can flow freely around and underneath it. Always shut down the notebook or put it in Hibernation before putting it in a carrying case or other enclosed space. Do not pick up or carry the notebook by its display. Do not use the notebook outside in the rain or snow (inclement weather). If the notebook is cold, warm it gradually to avoid condensation. Maintain your battery for best performance. See the Batteries and Power Management chapter. Reference Guide 27 Basic Operation Taking Care of Your Notebook To safeguard your data Do not use a pointing device or activate any other device that interrupts operation while the system is starting or stopping. Back up your work regularly. Copy files to diskettes, CDs, DVDs, and other media or network drives. Use a virus-scanning program (such as the Norton AntiVirus program included with your notebook) to check the integrity of your files and operating system. Check your disk using the Tools tab in the disk Properties window. To extend the life of the display Set the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level (Fn+F1). When working at your desk, connect an external monitor and turn off the internal display (press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of the keyboard). If you are not using an external monitor, set the Turn off monitor timeouts (for both AC and battery operation) to the shortest comfortable interval. Avoid using a screen saver or other software that prevents the notebook from changing to Display-off or Standby after a timeout period. If you use a screen saver, enable the option to shut off the display after a time delay. Do not disable Display-off or Standby timeouts. If you are using AC power and have no external monitor attached, put the notebook in Standby when not in use. To clean your notebook You can clean the notebook with a soft cloth dampened with clean water or with water containing a mild detergent. Do not use an excessively wet cloth, and take care to keep water out of the case. Do not use abrasive cleaners, especially on the display. Do not apply any cleaner directly to the display. Instead, apply the cleaner to a soft cloth, then gently wipe the display. 28 Reference Guide Batteries and Power Management Reference Guide 29 Batteries and Power Management Managing Power Consumption Managing Power Consumption When you are running your notebook on battery power, you can maximize operating time without compromising performance. Your notebook is designed to help you reduce power consumption and extend battery life. During idle periods, the notebook automatically enters power-saving modes after specified timeout periods. You can adjust these timeouts to suit your working habits. How the notebook manages power automatically Your notebook enters Hibernation and Standby automatically, and turns off the hard drive and display based on values set in Windows. When this occurs No keyboard, pointing device, or other input activity occurs for the specified interval The hard drive is not accessed for a specified interval No pointing devices are used, no disk drive is accessed, and no port (serial, parallel, or infrared) is active for the specified interval The notebook stays in Standby for the specified interval The result is Display turns off. Turns off the display to conserve battery power and extend the life of the display. Hard drive turns off. This is usually set to occur shortly after the display is turned off. Standby is initiated. Maintains your current session in RAM, and turns off the display and other components to conserve battery power. Hibernation is initiated. Saves your current session to the hard drive, and turns off the notebook. To resume Briefly press any key or move a pointing device to turn on the display. Begin using the notebook, and the hard drive turns on. Briefly press the power button to return to your current session. Press the power button to return to your previous session. CAUTION Make a habit of saving your work before allowing your notebook to enter Standby. If power is interrupted while the notebook is in Standby, any information that was not saved will be lost. 30 Reference Guide Batteries and Power Management Managing Power Consumption The notebook can also enter Hibernation if battery power reaches a critically low level. If this happens, you will find on resuming that all your data has been saved, but some functions may be disabled. To resume normal operation, restore power by connecting an AC adapter or installing a charged battery, then shut the notebook off and restart it. Changing timeout settings and creating power schemes You can adjust the length of timeouts after which your notebook automatically shuts down components or enters a power-saving mode. You can also save these settings as a power scheme. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Select the Power Schemes tab, then enter the settings you want. If you do not want a particular timeout to occur, set the value to Never. See Windows Help for details. If you want to save the settings as a power scheme, select Save As and enter a name for the scheme. CAUTION Do not disable Hibernate support in the Power Options settings, or you will lose any unsaved data if the notebook battery runs down completely. Reference Guide 31 Batteries and Power Management Using Battery Power Using Battery Power To check battery status From the battery status light Check your notebook battery status light. From the Windows taskbar The Windows taskbar can display a power icon that provides detailed battery status information (see Windows Help for details). The icon resembles a battery when AC power is not connected. Place the pointer over the power icon to display the remaining battery charge. This value is shown as either a percentage of charge remaining, or as time remaining. Select the power icon to open the Battery Meter window. From the Windows Control Panel Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options, then select the Power Meter tab to see the battery status. The Alarms and Advanced tabs provide additional Windows power-information options. On the battery 1. Remove the battery from the notebook. See the Getting Started with Your Notebook chapter in this guide. 2. Press the contact pad on the side of the battery. The number of lights that turn on indicates the remaining charge (each light represents 20 percent of a full charge). 32 Reference Guide Batteries and Power Management Using Battery Power To respond to a low-battery warning The notebook automatically alerts you when the battery power drops to a critically low level. The notebook first emits a high-pitched beep or displays a warning message. Then, if you do not restore power within a short time, the notebook enters Hibernation. After the notebook enters Hibernation in this way, you will not be able to turn it on again until you restore power by doing one of the following procedures:
Replace the battery with a charged one. Plug in the AC adapter. Note If you plug in the AC adapter, you can continue to work while your battery recharges. To recharge the battery CAUTION The AC adapter is normally warm whenever plugged into an AC outlet. The notebook is normally warm while recharging. Do not recharge the notebook in a briefcase or other confined space, or the battery could overheat. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. To get the longest operating time, wait until the battery charge is below 50 percent before recharging, then charge it fully (100 percent). Charging can take up to several hours. If you continue working while the battery charges, the charging time may increase. The operating time for a fully charged battery depends on the notebook model, power management settings, and level of use. Reference Guide 33 Batteries and Power Management Using Battery Power To get the most from your batteries Follow these suggestions to make your battery power last as long as possible:
Plug in the AC adapter, especially when using a CD-ROM or DVD drive, or any external connections such as a PC Card or a modem. Set the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level (Fn+F1). Put the notebook in Standby whenever you are not using it for a short while. Put the notebook in Hibernation whenever you want to save your current session, but will not be using the notebook for a day or more. Set the automatic timeout settings to emphasize saving power. If your notebook has a multispeed processor, use the lower speed on battery power (the default settings conserve battery power). If your notebook has a wireless on-off button, turn off the wireless function when you are not using it. Press the wireless on-off button so that the light turns off. If you have a PC Card such as a network card, remove it when you are not using it. Some PC Cards use significant power even while they are inactive. If you work with an application that uses the serial port or a PC Card, exit the application when you finish using it. Do not leave batteries unused for long periods. If you have more than one, rotate them. If you normally use AC power, make a practice of using the battery as your power source at least once a week. Unplug the AC adapter when the notebook is not in use. To preserve the life of a battery, be sure to charge it regularly. For long-term storage, the battery must be charged 20 percent to 50 percent to minimize capacity loss by self-discharge and to avoid deterioration of battery performance. Avoid using or charging batteries at high temperatures. 34 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Reference Guide 35 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem Using the Modem Internet Explorer, for browsing the World Wide Web You can connect your modem to a telephone line and communicate with other computers throughout the world. You can explore the Internet, send and receive e-mail messages, and use your notebook to send and receive faxes. Your notebook contains several software programs that work with your modem:
Outlook Express, for sending and receiving e-mail messages Windows Fax Console software for sending and receiving faxes For best performance, you can connect to any Internet Service Provider (ISP) or modem network that has V.90 or V.92 interoperable modems. Check with your ISP for a list of telephone numbers that support V.90 or V.92. (V.92 enables modem on-hold technology that allows an Internet session to be interrupted to answer a phone call, then resumes the Internet session once the call is complete.) The maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 Kbps, even though the modem is capable of downloading at higher speeds. 36 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem To connect the modem CAUTION Your built-in modem may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX), cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and does not work with party lines. Some of these connections may result in excess electrical voltage and could cause a malfunction in the internal modem. Check your telephone line type prior to connecting your phone line. Special restrictions in certain countries Many countries impose a blackout period after a modem repeatedly fails to connect to a service provider. The number of failed attempts and the period you must wait before trying again differ from country to country. Check with your telephone company. For example, if you are dialing from Italy and fail to connect to your server or cancel the connection, you must wait one minute before dialing that number again. If you dial before then, you will get an error message that says delay. After the fourth failed connection, you must wait one hour before trying the number again. If you dial before the hour is up, you will get a message that says black list. When using a modem, an external surge protector can prevent damage to your notebook from lightning or other electrical surges. Connect any approved surge protector to the modem cable when you are using the modem. Reference Guide 37 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem To change your modem settings The modem is already set up to be compatible with telephone systems and modems in most areas. However, in some situations, you may have to change modem settings to match local conditions. If you have questions about local requirements, contact your telephone company. Control Panel. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel to change many modem settings. On the Modems tab, select Properties to set connection speeds, or on the Dialing Rules tab select Edit to set dialing options. Communications software. Many communications applications provide options for controlling modem settings. See the Help for your software. AT commands. You can control many aspects of modem operation using modem AT commands. AT commands are special strings of characters sent to the modem to set up specific conditions. Those command strings normally start with AT. For a list of AT commands for the built-in modem, see the Reference Information chapter. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel. On the Modems tab, select Properties. You can type AT commands on the Advanced tab in the space for extra settings. 38 Reference Guide Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN) Modem and Network Connections Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN) LANs give you access to network resources, such as printers and file servers on your corporate network, and possibly to the Internet. To connect to a LAN:
1. Check that the existing LAN supports Ethernet 10Base-T (10 Mbps) or 100Base-TX (100 Mbps) connections. 2. Plug the LAN cable (not supplied) into the built-in LAN port. The cable must have an RJ-45 connector. 3. Windows automatically detects and sets up a LAN connection. To edit settings, open Network and Dial-up Connections in Control Panel. See Windows Help for information about setting up and using LAN connections. Select Start > Help and Support. Contact your network administrator for network information. Two lights next to the LAN port indicate the status of the connection:
The yellow light indicates network activity. The green light indicates a 100 Mbps link. Reference Guide 39 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) If your notebook includes a wireless on-off button, you can connect by radio to an 802.11 wireless local area network (LAN) and access computers and other resources on the network. A wireless network provides all the functions of a typical wired network, but also provides for roaming. Since your notebook connects to the network by radio rather than through cables, you can move from place to place within the networkfrom your office to a conference room, for exampleand remain on the network the entire time. To prepare for connections Before you can connect your notebook to a particular 802.11 wireless network, you have to configure the notebook for the specific wireless connection. Connecting to an existing wireless network You can connect to an access point that gives you access to a local area network, or you can connect directly to other computers in an ad hoc network. 1. Right-click the wireless network connection icon in the taskbar, then select View Available Wireless Networks from the pop-up menu. 40 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) 2. A list of available networks appears. Select the network you want, enter the encryption key if required, then select Connect. If the network you want is not on the list, select Advanced > Configure, and enter the required network parameters. If the network is not using 802.1x authentication protocol, clear the automatic key option. 3. On the General tab, edit network settings as needed for your local network. See your network administrator. You can also display an icon in the taskbar when connected to a network. 4. On the Wireless Networks tab, view the wireless networks available within range. Each network SSID is listed. Select the network you want, then select Configure. 5. If the wireless network uses standard encrypted communication, uncheck the automatic key option, then select the following parameters:
Key: ASCII passphrase or hexadecimal key string. Key format: ASCII for passphrase, hexadecimal for key string. Key length: smaller number for 64-bit encryption, larger number for 128-bit. See your network administrator for the required settings. 6. Select OK to save the configuration. This network is added to your list of preferred networks. The notebook automatically connects to the first preferred network within range if wireless communication is turned on. Creating a New Computer-to-Computer Network (Ad Hoc) You can set up a new network available to other local computers. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections. 2. Select the wireless connection to show its status, then select Properties. 3. On the Wireless Networks tab, select Add to create a new network. 4. Type a name for the new network. Reference Guide 41 Important Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) 5. If you want to use encrypted communication, uncheck the automatic key option, then select the following parameters:
Key: ASCII passphrase or hexadecimal key string Key format: ASCII for passphrase, hexadecimal for key string Key length: smaller number for 64-bit encryption, larger number for 128-bit 6. Mark the option to make this a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network. 7. Select OK to save the configuration. This network is added to your list of preferred networks and becomes available to other computers. To turn wireless communication on and off Wireless networks and cellular modems are examples of devices that use wireless communication. Such devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as when traveling in an airplane. If in doubt, be sure to ask for authorization before turning on your notebook wireless networking. In Italy, Singapore, and possibly other countries, you may be required to purchase a license before using the wireless function. Turning on communication and making a connection If your notebook has both wireless 802.11 and Bluetooth capabilities, the wireless indicator light on the front of the notebook turns on when Bluetooth or 802.11 communication is turned on, but it does not show whether Bluetooth, 802.11, or both functions are active. You must use the Wireless Configuration software to control the individual wireless functions. 1. If the notebook is not on, turn it on. 2. If you normally press the wireless on-off button on the front of the notebook to turn wireless 802.11 communication on and off, press the button so the indicator light turns on. This restores your previous wireless configuration. or Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections, then select the wireless network connection icon. If you are within range of your wireless network, your notebook automatically connects. To check the status of your wireless connection, open Network Connections in Control Panel, then select the connection. 42 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) Turning off communication and ending a connection 1. Important: close any files that reside on other network computers. 2. To turn off the wireless 802.11 communication without turning off the notebook, press the wireless on-off button. This also turns off Bluetooth communication if it was enabled. or Right-click the wireless network connection icon in the taskbar, then select Disable. Putting the notebook in Standby or shutting it down also turns off the wireless function. Reference Guide 43 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections
(select models only) If your notebook includes Bluetooth wireless capabilities, you can use it to make short-range radio connections to a wireless personal area network (PAN) and access other Bluetooth-compatible devices, such as other computers, cell phones, and printers. Since the Bluetooth function connects your notebook by radio rather than through cables, you can move around and remain connected, and you can detect new Bluetooth devices automatically when they enter your area. To turn Bluetooth communication on and off Important Wireless communication may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as when traveling in an airplane. If in doubt, be sure to ask for authorization before turning on your notebook wireless networking. In Italy, Singapore, and possibly other countries, you may be required to purchase a license from the responsible authority before using the wireless function. Turning on Bluetooth communication The wireless indicator light on the front of the notebook turns on when Bluetooth or 802.11 communication is turned on, but it doesnt show whether Bluetooth, 802.11, or both functions are active. You must use the Wireless Configuration software to control the individual wireless functions. If your notebook isnt on, turn it on. 1. 2. If you normally press the wireless on-off button on the front of the notebook to turn Bluetooth communication on and off, press the button so the indicator light turns on. This restores your previous wireless configuration. or If the Wireless Configuration icon is present in the taskbar, select the icon, then select the Bluetooth button to turn on Bluetooth communication. 44 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) Turning off Bluetooth communication Turning off communication ends any connection you have open. 1. Important: close any files that reside on other network computers. 2. To turn off Bluetooth communication without turning off your notebook, press the wireless on-off button. This also turns off 802.11 communication if it was enabled. or If the Wireless Configuration icon is present in the taskbar, select the icon, then select the Bluetooth button to turn off Bluetooth communication, without affecting 802.11 communication. Turning off the notebook or putting it into Hibernation also turns off the Bluetooth function. To prepare for Bluetooth connections Before you use your notebook to access other Bluetooth devices, you should configure some basic settings. 1. Make sure Bluetooth communication is turned on. 2. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. 3. In the menu bar, select Bluetooth > Device Configuration. (This menu is available only while Bluetooth folders are selected.) 4. On the General tab, check the following settings:
Give your notebook a unique name that will identify it to other Bluetooth users. Set the computer type to Laptop. Select the security mode you want to use. 5. On the Information Exchange tab, check the following settings:
Check the directory you want to make available to other Bluetooth users for sharing files, both sent and received. Check the directory where you want to store your business card file so you can easily send it to other Bluetooth users. Check the inbox directory where you want delivered files from other Bluetooth users to be stored automatically. Detailed information about these and other advanced settings are included in the online help. Reference Guide 45 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) To create your business card, you can open Microsoft Outlook, then open the address book and create a new contact. After entering your personal information, select File, Export To vCard File and store the file in your business card directory. To send or receive files using Bluetooth If your notebook includes Bluetooth wireless capabilities, it supports the following common protocols for transferring data. To use either protocol, both computers must support that protocol. Check the other computers Bluetooth documentation. FTP: files can be copied into and out of shared directories (folders) by both computers. This service is equivalent to common network file sharing. OPP (object push profile): both computers can send certain types of Microsoft Outlook data to the other computers Bluetooth inbox, but cannot retrieve files from the other computer. Sharing files with another Bluetooth device (FTP) 1. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. 2. In My Bluetooth Places, select and open the other device to view files in its shared directory. 3. Use Windows Explorer or other software to copy or move files between your notebook and the other device. Sending Outlook data to another Bluetooth device (OPP) 1. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. 2. In My Bluetooth Places, select and open the other device. 3. To send a calendar item, note, or message, select the device inbox, select the option you want, then select the file to send. The file arrives in the device inbox directory. or To send your business card, select the device inbox, then select the option to send your business card. 46 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Reference Guide 47 Add-On Devices Connecting PC Cards Connecting PC Cards The notebook PC Card slot is available for storing data and expanding the communication capabilities of the notebook. The notebook supports standard Type II and III PC Cards (PCMCIA and CardBus). To insert or remove a PC Card Note The location and number of the PC Card slots vary by model series. Inserting a PC Card 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with its connectors facing the card slot. 2. Slide the PC Card all the way into the bottom of the slot. Most cards are properly seated when the outer edge is flush with the casing of the notebook, but some cards are designed to protrude from the case. 48 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting PC Cards Removing a PC Card CAUTION Before removing a PC Card, you must use the Eject Hardware or Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar, or shut down the notebook. Otherwise, you could lose data. 1. Before removing the card, select the Eject Hardware or Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar, then select the card you want to remove. This protects your data and helps avoid unexpected problems. If needed, you can restart the card by removing and then reinserting it. 2. Press the eject button to pop the button out, then press it in to eject the PC Card. Reference Guide 49 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices Connecting External Devices To connect an audio device You can plug in an external microphone, external speakers, or headphones. In addition, if you connect your notebook to the port replicator, you can plug in a stereo source (such as a CD player) or a device that accepts digital audio (such as a digital audio recorder). CAUTION The headphone and line-in jacks are three-terminal stereo jacks. They are not compatible with two-terminal mono plugs. Connecting a mono plug into either of these jacks may damage the notebook. Attach the audio cable to the corresponding audio port on the notebook or port replicator. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations to locate the audio connectors on your notebook. 1 2 External microphone connector (pink) Audio out (headphones) connector (green) 50 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices 1 2 Audio out (headphones) connector (green) External microphone connector (pink) Note When you plug a device into the headphone port, the built-in speakers automatically turn off. When you plug a device into either audio port on the notebook, any device connected to the corresponding port on the port replicator is ignored. Reference Guide 51 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To use an external monitor Connecting an external monitor 1. Plug a standard 4-pin S-Video cable to the S-Video out jack on your notebook
(yellow connector on the back panel) to the S-Video in jack on your television. Restart your notebook. Note Although your notebook has a 7-pin S-Video out jack, the notebook accepts either a 7-pin or 4-pin cable connection. 2. Using your mouse, right-click in an empty area of the desktop. 3. Select Properties, select the Settings tab, then select the Advanced button.
-or-
Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. Then, select the Settings tab, select the Advanced button, and select the Displays tab. 4. To enable the TV, select the red button next to TV. Note If the S-Video cable is not plugged into your notebook and TV, the red button will not be displayed. 5. Select Apply to accept the changes. 6. If you are prompted to restart Windows, select Yes. Switching the display to the external monitor Press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of your keyboard to switch the display to the external monitor. With the default display settings, the external monitor uses the same settings as the internal display. The external monitor displays the same image as the internal display, regardless of the screen area, colors, and other settings, and the refresh rate is the same as the internal display (60 Hz). If you use only the external monitor, you can select different settings that arent limited by the internal display. 52 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices Adjusting monitor resolution and other settings 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. 2. On the Settings tab, adjust the Screen area. Other settings are also available. If you need to increase the refresh rate on the external monitor, you can switch to only the external monitor. An alternative is to make one display a secondary display so you can select independent refresh rates:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. 2. On the Settings tab, select the Advanced button, then the Displays or Monitor tab. Set the refresh rate on the Monitor tab. Using dual display mode You can extend your desktop by connecting an external monitor to your notebook. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. 2. Select the Settings tab. 3. Select the second display, then select the option to extend the desktop. You can set different resolutions and numbers of colors for each display. However, using the Extended Desktop requires video memory for each display. For this reason, higher resolutions and higher numbers of colors may cause unexpected behavior on the displays. Try starting with 1024 768 resolution on the external display and 64 K colors (16-bit) on both displays. You can then try higher settings to see whether they work for your applications. In addition, certain operations such as playing DVDs and running 3D graphics require extra video memory, so you may have to adjust display settings. If youre playing a DVD movie, the movie will show only on the primary display. To change the primary display, go to the Settings tab of Display Properties (see the steps above), right-click the display you want, and select Primary. To connect an IEEE 1394 device (select models only) If your notebook has an IEEE 1394 port, you can use it to connect devices such as audio and video equipment, disk drives, printers, and other notebooks. Attach the device cable to the IEEE 1394 port. Windows automatically recognizes the device. Reference Guide 53 Note Note Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices The IEEE 1394 port is a 4-wire port. If you want to connect a device that has a 6-wire plug, you can purchase a simple adapter if the device is unpowered, or a hub if the device requires power. If you have problems making this connection, contact the device manufacturer Web site for the latest version of the driver for the device. To connect an infrared device (select models only) Select models include an infrared port. By default, the infrared port is not enabled, so you must first enable it before you can use it. If your model has an infrared port (a small, rectangular lens located on the front of the notebook), then your notebook has wireless, serial communication capability. That is, your notebook and other infrared devices, such as printers or other notebooks, can communicate wirelessly using this port. Using the infrared port Make sure the infrared port of your notebook and the infrared port of the device with which you want to communicate lie in a straight line facing each other. The two ports should be no more than one meter apart with no obstructions in between. Noise from nearby equipment can cause transmission errors. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select the Hardware tab. 3. Select the Device Manager button. 4. Select the ALI fast infrared controller, then the Enable Device button. 5. Select Next > Finish > Close. Then close all open dialog boxes. To check the status of communications, open Wireless Link by selecting Start >
Control Panel > Printers & Other Hardware > Wireless Link. Printing to an infrared printer Install your printer and assign it to the notebook infrared port. You can then print from your applications as you would to any other printer. Transferring files through an infrared connection You can use your notebook infrared port to transfer files by using Wireless Link. See the Windows online Help for instructions on using Wireless Link. 54 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To use a port replicator (select models only) A port replicator provides your notebook with external connections that you can leave in place whenever you remove the notebook from your desk. Instead of disconnecting and reconnecting peripheral devices, you can simply undock and dock the notebook. CAUTION Use only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Do not use a 60-watt, 3.16-amp adapter, and do not use DC adapter accessories F1455A and F2297A. Using the wrong AC adapter could damage the notebook or adapter and cause data loss, and may void your warranty. You can dock or undock the notebook in any power state: on, off, Standby, or Hibernation. Make sure, however, that the notebook is not entering into or resuming from Standby or Hibernation when you dock or undock, or the notebook could lock up. Hint Before docking or undocking your notebook, save your data and close any applications associated with external connections that might be affected. Do this as a precaution against an unlikely docking problem. Reference Guide 55 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To dock to the port replicator 1. Plug in the AC adapter, then connect it to the back of the port replicator. You can also operate the port replicator using power from the notebook battery. 2. Remove the rubber cover from the docking connector on the bottom of the notebook. 3. Align the notebook with the locator posts on the port replicator. 4. Press the notebook down until both sides snap into place. 5. If the notebook is off, open it and press the power button to turn it on. The lights on the port replicator turn on. When the notebook is docked, you can use its security connector to secure it. To secure both the notebook and port replicator, install the cable lock in the security connector next to the undock button. This will also lock the undock button. Note If a device is connected to an audio port on the notebook, any device connected to the corresponding port on the port replicator is ignored. 56 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To undock from the port replicator 1. Press down the undock button on the right side of the port replicator. 2. Lift the notebook out of the port replicator. Reference Guide 57 Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) Installing Additional RAM (Memory) The notebook has two slots that hold two RAM modules. At least one slot contains a RAM module installed at the factory. You can use both slots to expand your RAM. To install a RAM expansion module Use PC2100 DDR-266 MHz or higher RAM only. Youll need a small Phillips screwdriver for these steps. CAUTION The internal components of your notebook are extremely sensitive to static electricity and can be permanently damaged by it. Handle the RAM module only by its edges. Before installing the memory module, discharge your bodys static electricity by touching the metal shielding around the connectors on the back of the notebook. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. 2. Important: unplug the AC adapter, if present, and remove the battery. 3. Turn the unit bottom-side up, loosen the screws holding the RAM cover, and remove the cover. 58 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) 4. Insert the RAM board into the connector at about a 30 degree angle until it is fully inserted. Then press down at both sides until both latches snap closed. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations. 5. Replace the cover. 6. Insert the battery. To remove the RAM module, release the two latches at the sides of the module. Reference Guide 59 Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) To remove a RAM expansion module You may want to remove a RAM module so you can install a larger one. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for these steps. CAUTION The internal components of your notebook are extremely sensitive to static electricity and can be permanently damaged by it. Handle the RAM module only by its edges. Before installing the memory module, discharge your bodys static electricity by touching the metal shielding around the connectors on the back of the notebook. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. 2. Important: unplug the AC adapter, if present, and remove the battery. 3. Turn the unit bottom-side up, loosen the screws holding the RAM cover, and remove the cover. 60 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) 4. Release the two latches at the sides of the RAM board, so the free edge of the board pops up. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations. 5. Pull the board out of the connector. 6. Replace the cover. 7. Insert the battery. Reference Guide 61 Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive Replacing the Hard Drive To replace the hard drive You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this procedure. 1. Unplug the AC adapter, if connected. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Turn the unit bottom side up. 4. Use a pointed tool to remove the plugs from the two screw holes, then remove the two screws. 5. Gently pull the hard drive out of the notebook. 6. Gently slide the new drive into the hard drive compartment. Press firmly to make sure the connector seats properly. 7. Reinstall the hard drive screws and plugs. Important If you are installing a new hard drive, you should create a Utility partition on the drive before loading any software. 62 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive To replace the hard drive holder If you are installing a new hard drive that does not have a holder, you can remove the holder parts from the old hard drive. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this procedure. 1. Remove the four screws from the sides of the holder and drive case, then slide the drive out of the holder. 2. Notice that the hard drive has a pin connector attachment at one end. Carefully remove this connector from the end of the drive. Work alternately at each end so that the connector slides off evenly without bending the connector pins. 3. Carefully put the pin connector attachment back onto the pins on the end of the new hard drive. Work alternately at each end so that the connector slides on evenly without bending the connector pins. 4. Insert the drive into the holder. 5. Reinstall the screws into the holder and drive case. Reference Guide 63 Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive To prepare a new hard drive When you install a new hard drive, you also need to prepare it to be able to work with your notebook. If you want to restore the Windows software and operating system that were originally installed on your notebook, use the QuickRestore System Recovery CD included with your notebook. 64 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Reference Guide 65 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Troubleshooting Your Notebook This chapter contains solutions to many types of problems you might have with your notebook. Try the solutions one at a time, in the order in which they are presented. Here are some other sources of information for troubleshooting:
Use the Windows troubleshooters. Select Start > Help and Support. See the Microsoft Windows manual shipped with the notebook. Select the question mark on the One-Touch key located at the top of the keyboard. Refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet to contact a Customer Care Center for help and support. Audio problems If no sound is audible Select the speaker icon on the taskbar (if present), then clear the Mute All If your model has a volume control, press the + (plus) button to increase volume. checkbox if selected. If your model has an audio mute button, press it so the indicator light goes off. When you are operating your notebook in MS-DOS mode (for example, when running MS-DOS games), you may find that the sound does not operate properly. Use Windows applications for full use of sound capabilities. If sound does not record Plug in an external microphone. The notebook does not have a built-in microphone. Check the software controls for recording sound. Select Start > All Programs >
Accessories > Multimedia (or Entertainment) > Sound Recorder. In Volume Control, select Options > Properties, then make sure the microphone is enabled in the recording controls. 66 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If you hear loud, high-pitched feedback from the speakers In the Volume Control, try reducing the Master volume by selecting the speaker icon in the taskbar. In Volume Control, select Options > Properties, then select the microphone option for the playback settings. Also in Volume Control, make sure the microphone is muted. CD-ROM and DVD problems If you cant boot from a CD or DVD Make sure the CD or DVD is bootable, such as the QuickRestore System Recovery CD included with your notebook. Make sure the CD-ROM/DVD drive is selected as the boot device. See the Basic Operation chapter for directions. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If a DVD plays erratically Dirt or smudges can cause a disc to skip. Clean the disc with a soft cloth. If the disc is badly scratched, it will probably have to be replaced. If you are playing the DVD on battery power, try changing the power scheme. If you get a Region Code error when playing a DVD movie DVDs can have regional codes embedded in the disc data. These codes prevent DVD movies from being played outside the region of the world in which they are sold. If you get a Region Code error, you are trying to play a DVD intended for a different region. If the notebook cannot read a CD or DVD For a single-sided CD or DVD, make sure the disc is placed in the drive with the label facing up. Clean the disc. Wait 5 to 10 seconds after closing the tray to give the notebook time to recognize the disc. Reference Guide 67 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Restart the system. Remove the disc from the drive, then select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If you created the CD on a CD/DVD RW combo drive, try using a different media brand. Read and write quality may vary by media. If a DVD movie doesnt fill the screen Each side of a double-sided DVD has a different format (standard or widescreen). In widescreen format, black bands appear at the top and bottom of the screen. To view the standard format, flip the disc over and play the other side. If a DVD doesnt play with two displays If you are using the Extended Desktop (dual displays), move the player window to the display selected as primary. If youre not using Extended Desktop and both displays are active, press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of the keyboard to switch to one display. If the notebook cant find Wordpad.exe after inserting a CD The system is trying to open a .doc file in WordPad, but cannot find the Wordpad.exe program file. Type C:\Program Files\Accessories in the error message box. Display problems If the notebook is on, but the screen is blank Move the mouse or tap the TouchPad. This will wake the display if it is off. If the notebook is cold, allow it to warm up. If the screen is difficult to read Try setting the display resolution to its default setting of 1024 768 or higher, depending on your model: select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. Try adjusting the size of the desktop icons and labels. 68 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If an external display does not work Check the connections. The external monitor may not be detected. In the BIOS Setup utility, try setting Video Display Device to Both in the System Devices menu. Hard drive problems If the notebook hard drive doesnt spin Make sure the notebook has power. If necessary, connect the AC adapter, then make sure it is fully plugged into a power source and into the back of the notebook. Remove and reinsert the hard drive. If the hard drive makes a buzzing or whining noise Back up the drive immediately. See whether the noise is coming from elsewhere, such as from the fan or a PC Card drive. If files are corrupted Open My Computer, select the disk you want to scan, then select File >
Properties. Select the Check Now box under the Error-checking section of the Tools Tab. Run the virus-scanning program. If necessary, you can format the hard disk and reinstall the original factory software using the QuickRestore System Recovery CD included with your notebook. Reference Guide 69 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Heat problems Your notebook normally gets warm during routine operation. If the notebook gets abnormally hot Always set the notebook on a flat surface, so that air can flow freely around and underneath it. Make sure the air vents on the bottom and sides of the notebook are clear. Keep in mind that games and other programs that drive CPU usage toward 100 percent can increase the notebook temperature. Infrared problems By default, the infrared port is not enabled, so you must enable it before you can use it. If you have problems with infrared communications Make sure the line between the two infrared ports is not blocked, and that the ports face each other as squarely as possible. (The notebook infrared port is located on the front of the notebook.) The ports should be no more than 1 meter apart. Check settings in the Device Manager:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. On the Hardware tab, select Device Manager and expand the infrared devices. Select the infrared port and make sure that the device is enabled. Make sure only one application is using the infrared port. 70 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Keyboard and pointing device problems Use these suggestions for built-in or external devices. If the pointer is difficult to control Adjust the pointer controls. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. If the TouchPad doesnt work Press the TouchPad on-off button to turn on the light. Dont touch the TouchPad while the notebook is rebooting or resuming from Standby mode. If this happens, try the following: press a key on the keyboard to restore normal operation. If an external mouse is connected, the built-in pointing devices are normally disabled. You can change this setting with the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in this chapter. Restart the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If the TouchPad moves the pointer or cursor while you type Press the TouchPad on-off button to turn off the TouchPad while you type. If a PS/2 scroll mouse doesnt work The TouchPad must be disabled for the mouse scroll feature to work. In the BIOS Setup utility, make sure the External Pointing Devices option in the System Devices menu is set to Auto. See Configuring Your Notebook in this chapter. Put the notebook into Standby or shut it down before you attach the scroll mouse, so that it will be detected properly. If you want to use the TouchPad again, you must put the notebook into Standby or shut it down before you detach the scroll mouse. Reference Guide 71 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Local area network (LAN) problems If the built-in network adapter doesnt connect to the LAN Check all cables and connections. Try connecting at a different network station, if available. If the yellow light next to the LAN port does not light, the LAN cable may not be connected to the network or the network may be down. Try connecting a different computer to the cable. Make sure the LAN cable is Category 3, 4, or 5 for 10Base-T operation, or Category 5 for 100Base-TX operation. Maximum cable length is 100 meters
(330 feet). Select Start > Help and Support, then use the Networking troubleshooter. Open the hardware Device Manager. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. If the network interface is disabled, try to enable it. If it has a conflict, try disabling another device. If you cant browse the Network Neighborhood or My Network Places Select Start > Search > Computers or People to look for a computer. If you cant log in to Netware servers If a Netware server is using IPX/SPX protocol, you may need to force your frame type to match the server frame type. Check with your network administrator. If a network connection responds slowly If your network connection uses a proxy server, try enabling the option for bypassing the proxy server for local addresses. You can do this in Control Panel under your network connection properties. 72 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Memory problems If a message says you are out of memory Make sure drive C is not running low on free space. If you are having memory problems while running MS-DOS programs, use the MS-DOS or Application and Software troubleshooter in Windows Help: select Start > Help and Support. The full amount of RAM in your notebook is not available for running applications. A certain amount of RAM is used for display memory. The amount of display memory is shown in the BIOS Setup utility. If memory doesnt increase after adding RAM Make sure your notebook is using only PC2100 DDR-266 or higher memory (RAM) modules. If the notebook beeps but doesnt start after adding RAM You installed an incompatible type of RAM. Remove the module. Modem problems If the modem seems slow Excess static or noise on a line reduces the overall transmission speed of the modem connection. If necessary, contact your telephone company about fixing this type of problem. If youre dialing internationally, line noise is often a problem thats difficult or impossible to eliminate. If you have call-waiting, disable it. Your telephone company can provide instructions. It can cause symptoms similar to static. Eliminate extra connections in the line. If possible, connect directly to the wall jack. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. Reference Guide 73 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the modem doesnt dial or no dial tone is detected Check all cables and connections. Connect a standard telephone to the phone line and make sure the line is working. Make sure someone else isnt using the same phone line. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. If youre in a foreign country, the dial tone may not be recognized by the modem. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Try disabling the option that waits for a dial tone. If the modem dials incorrectly Check the telephone number you entered, including any digits required for outside access or long distance. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Check the dialing options look for duplicate digits for outside access or long distance. Make sure the number youre calling isnt busy. If youre in a foreign country, the dial tone may not be recognized by the modem. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Try disabling the option that waits for a dial tone. If you have call-waiting, disable ityour telephone company can provide instructions. If the modem dials but doesnt connect Make sure youre using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. The modem at the other end may have a problem. Try dialing to a different modem. If the modem isnt detected Check the modem setup. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Check the COM port. 74 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. If the modem is disabled, try to enable it. If it has a conflict, try disabling another device. If youre running fax software using fax Class 2, try using Class 1. If the modem dials but you cant hear it If your model has an audio mute light, make sure it is turned off. If its on, press the audio mute button. Check the speaker volume setting. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Select the modem and select Properties, then check the volume setting on the General tab. If the modem connects, but transferred data is bad In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Make sure the parity, speed, word length, and stop bits match on sending and receiving modems. Try a different telephone line, or dial a different server number. If the modem causes an ERROR message A string of AT commands may contain an incorrect command. If you entered commands as extra settings for the modem in Control Panel or in your communications software, check the commands. If youre using fax Class 2 in the fax software, try using Class 1. If the modem doesnt fax Close any other communications programs. If youre faxing by printing from an application, make sure youve selected the fax printer. Try turning off power management features temporarily. If excessive line current is detected Make sure youre using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. If the modem clicks repeatedly but does not connect Make sure you are using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. Check all cables and connections. Reference Guide 75 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook PC Card problems If the notebook doesnt recognize a PC Card Remove and reinsert the PC Card. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. Try the card in another computer to see whether the card functions properly. Zoomed Video is not supported. If the card requires an IRQ, make sure one is available. Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance >
System. If a network PC Card stops communicating properly The card may have been reset if the notebook entered Standby or shut off. Exit any applications, then remove and reinsert the card. Check settings in Control Panel. If a PC Card modem is not working Disable the internal modem:
1. Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select Modem to list the current modem devices. 3. Select the internal modem, then select the option to disable the modem. Performance problems For best performance, your notebook should have at least 128 MB of memory (RAM). If the notebook pauses or runs sluggishly This may be normal Windows behavior. Background processing can affect response time. Certain background operations (such as a virus-scanning program) can affect performance. 76 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Press CTRL+ALT+DEL and use Task Manager to see if an application is not responding. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. Some file browsers respond slowly while processing graphics or waiting for broken network connections to time out. If the notebook hard drive frequently runs (as indicated by the hard drive light on the front of the notebook) while the notebook appears to be paused or running slowly, Windows is likely spending excess time writing to its swap file on the notebook hard disk. If this occurs frequently, consider installing additional memory. Check the amount of available free disk space. Delete temporary and unneeded files. If the notebook stops responding Press CTRL+ALT+DEL and use Task Manager to end the application that is not responding. Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off and reset the notebook. Any unsaved data will be lost. Then press the power button again to turn the notebook back on. If nothing happens, insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn the notebook back on. To avoid lockup problems, avoid pressing the TV Now! One-Touch button to switch display devices while graphic-intensive applications are running. Also avoid turning the notebook off or putting it into Standby while such applications are running. Power and battery problems If the notebook turns off immediately after it turns on Battery power is probably extremely low. Plug in the AC adapter or insert a charged battery. If the notebook keeps beeping The notebook beeps repeatedly or displays a warning when battery power is low. Save your work, shut down Windows immediately, and insert a charged battery or plug in the AC adapter. Reference Guide 77 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the battery doesnt charge Make sure the AC adapter is fully plugged into the power source and the notebook, and that the light on the Adapter is on. If youre using a power strip, remove the AC adapter from the power strip and plug it directly into a wall outlet. Make sure the battery is fully installed and locked in place. Make sure youre using only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Do not use a 60-watt, 3.16-amp adapter. Move the notebook away from any nearby heat source. Unplug the AC adapter and allow the battery to cool down. If the battery gets too hot, it will not charge properly. If available, try another battery and AC adapter. If the notebook has a short operating time Conserve power using any of the suggestions listed in the Batteries and Power Management chapter in this guide. If you are running an application that has an automatic save feature (such as MS Word), disable this feature or increase the specified save time to reduce hard drive access. If the operating time has gradually become shorter and the battery is more than a year or two old, you may need to replace the battery. Heavy modem use can affect battery operating time. PC Card use can affect battery operating time. Test and recondition the battery every 3 months. If the Time Remaining for the battery is not correct The Time Remaining is an estimate, not a precise value, and is based on the rate at which the notebook is using power at the moment. This value therefore depends on your current task, and assumes that you will continue using power at the same rate until the battery runs out. So, if you check the Time Remaining while the notebook is performing a task requiring a good deal of power (such as reading from a CD or DVD), the value will probably show less time remaining than you really have, since you will probably later switch to tasks that require less power. 78 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the notebook doesnt enter Standby as expected If you have a connection to another computer, the notebook wont enter Standby if the connection is active. If the notebook is performing an operation, it normally waits for the operation to finish before entering Standby. If the notebook doesnt automatically enter Hibernation as expected Make sure Hibernation support is enabled. From Control Panel, open Power Options, then select the Hibernate tab. Check the Power Schemes tab. Make sure the Hibernate timeouts for both AC power and battery power are not set to Never. Printing problems Hint You will usually be able to solve most printing problems by using the Print troubleshooter in Windows Help: select Start > Help and Support. If a serial or parallel printer doesnt print Make sure the printer is on and has paper in it. Make sure you are using the correct printer cable or cable adapter, and that the cable is secure at both ends. Check for printer errors. If the left edge of printed output is missing Certain applications may not work properly with 600-dpi printers. If youre using such a printer, try selecting a compatible printer driver for a 300-dpi printer. If an infrared printer doesnt print Make sure the line between the two infrared ports is not blocked, and that the ports face each other as squarely as possible. (The notebook infrared port is located on the front of the notebook.) The ports should be no more than 1 meter apart. Make sure the printer is on and has paper in it. Check for printer errors. Make sure Windows is running; otherwise infrared printing is not available. Reference Guide 79 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Serial, parallel, and USB problems If a serial mouse doesnt work Make sure you followed the manufacturers installation instructions completely and have installed the mouse properly. If not, repeat the procedure. Make sure the port connection is secure. Press the power button to enter Standby, and again to resume. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. Check mouse settings in Control Panel: select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. Use a mouse that connects to the USB or PS/2 port. If you have a PS/2 keyboard connected, use a PS/2 Y adapter (HP accessory F1469A). Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). If a serial modem doesnt work properly Make sure the port connection is secure. Use the Modem troubleshooter in Windows Help: select Start > Help and Support. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options, and check the modem settings. Disable the internal modem:
1. Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select Modem to list the current modem devices. 3. Select the internal modem, then select the option to disable the modem. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). If the serial or parallel port is not working Make sure the port connection is secure. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). 80 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the USB port is not working Contact the vendor of the peripheral device for the latest USB drivers. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Universal Serial Bus Controller. Startup problems If the notebook does not respond when you turn it on Connect the AC adapter. Reset the notebook by inserting the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn it on. If the notebook still doesnt respond, remove the battery and AC adapter, remove any PC Cards, and undock the notebook if docked. Then plug in the AC adapter again, and reset the notebook using the reset button. If the notebook wont boot from battery power Make sure the battery is properly inserted and fully charged. Check the battery charge by removing it and pressing the pad on the side of the battery. The lights show the charge level. If available, try another battery. If the notebook will not boot from the diskette drive Make sure the diskette drive is selected as the boot device. See the Basic Operation chapter in this guide for directions. If youre using a USB diskette drive, use the BIOS Setup utility to make sure Legacy USB Support is enabled. If your notebook also has a built-in diskette drive, use the BIOS Setup utility Boot menu to make sure the USB diskette drive is the first device under Removable Drive. If the notebook stops responding after booting Check whether you are connected to a TCP/IP network with no DHCP server. This can cause a long delay at startup because DHCP is enabled. Contact your network administrator to determine the proper TCP/IP configuration. Reference Guide 81 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the notebook takes a long time to resume after entering Standby The notebook can routinely take a minute or more to resume if it has a network card installed. While the operating system is loading drivers and checking hardware and network connections, you will see a blinking cursor on your display. As soon as the hardware has been re-initialized, the Windows desktop will appear. Wireless problems If you have problems with wireless 802.11 communication Make sure the wireless indicator light is on. If your notebook includes Bluetooth capabilities, make sure wireless 802.11 communication is turned on. Select Start > All Programs > Utilities > Wireless Configuration, then select the 802.11 button if its not turned on. Make sure you are using the correct SSID and channel settings. Make sure you are in range of an access point (for an infrastructure connection) or other wireless computer (for an Ad Hoc connection). When you log on to an 802.11 network via an access point, yet your notebook cannot connect to network resources, your notebook may not have been assigned an IP address. If the subnet mask for your wireless connection is 255.255.000.000, the network server did not assign an IP address to your notebook, and you may have to release and renew your network IP address. If this does not fix the problem, the access point may need to be rebooted. If you want to change the SSID to a different value to connect to a different access point, or if you want to change from Infrastructure mode to Ad Hoc mode, you may first have to release and renew the Internet IP address. See Local area network (LAN) problems in this chapter. If you have trouble connecting to another computer in the Network Neighborhood or My Network Places Wait a few minutes, then press F5 to refresh the list of computers on the network. Select Start > Search > Computers or People to locate the computer. If you cannot connect to a particular computer on the network Make sure the computer is properly connected to the network. Make sure your TCP/IP setup is correct for your network: in Control Panel, open Network Connections. 82 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If you can connect, but the network is slow Check whether you might be in an area served by more than one wireless LAN. If so, the LANs could be interfering with each other. Move closer to the access point (for an infrastructure connection) or other wireless computer (for an Ad Hoc connection). You could be too far away for high-speed communication. If your notebook cannot detect any Bluetooth devices Make sure the wireless indicator light is on. Make sure Bluetooth communication is turned on. Select Start > All Programs >
Utilities > Wireless Configuration, then select the Bluetooth button if its not turned on. If no Bluetooth button is shown, your notebook does not support Bluetooth communication. Make sure the Bluetooth devices are turned on. Some Bluetooth phones must be set for detection and may be detectable by other devices for only a short time. If your notebook cannot detect a certain Bluetooth device Make sure the Bluetooth device is turned on. Some Bluetooth phones must be set for detection and may be detectable by other devices for only a short time. Refresh the list of Bluetooth devices. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar, then select Bluetooth > Search For Devices in the menu bar. Reference Guide 83 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Configuring Your Notebook The BIOS Setup utility helps you configure your notebook operation. To run the BIOS Setup utility The BIOS (basic input and output system) Setup utility enables you to make changes to the notebook system configuration, and to tailor the operation of your notebook to your individual work needs. The settings made in BIOS Setup generally control the notebook hardware, and so greatly affect how the notebook operates. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press F2 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. The pointing devices are not active in BIOS Setup, so you will need to use the keyboard to navigate:
Press the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to move among menus. Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move among parameters in a menu. Press + or to move through values for the current parameter, or press ENTER to change a setting. 4. After you select the options you want, press F10 or use the Exit menu to exit BIOS Setup. 5. If the settings cause a conflict between devices during reboot, the system prompts you to run BIOS Setup, and marks the conflicting settings. The following tables describe BIOS settings for the BIOS version at publication. If your BIOS is a different version, some settings may differ from those shown. 84 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Setting BIOS Revision System Time System Date Language Main Menu Description Shows the current BIOS version. Sets the time using 24-hour format. Values set take effect immediately. Sets the date using dd/mm/yy format (except English, which uses mm/dd/yy format). Sets the language for BIOS Setup. Internal Hard Disk Sets the hard drive type and various parameters. UMA Video Memory Memory Serial Number Service ID UUID MAC Address Sets the video memory size allocated from total installed memory (RAM). Shows the extended memory size. Displays the serial number as shown on the back of the unit. Displays an identifier used for repair service. Displays the value of the 16-byte UUID (Universally Unique ID) as 32 hex characters. Displays the MAC network address of the internal
(wired) LAN. Default Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Auto Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Reference Guide 85 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Setting Video Display Device External Pointing Device Legacy USB Support Wake On LAN from Power Off Setting User Password is Administrator Password is Set User Password Set Administrator Password Require Password on Boot Internal hard drive lock System Devices Menu Description Sets whether the built-in display automatically switches to an external display, if one is detected. Disables the internal pointing devices when an external pointing device is connected. Enables BIOS support for USB mouse, keyboard, and diskette disk drive during startup. Lets the notebook be turned on via the LAN port. If this option is enabled, the notebook uses increased power while it is shut down. Security Menu Description Shows if a user password is set. Shows if an administrator password is set. Press ENTER to set, change, or clear the user password. The password can have no more than 8 characters (0-9, A-Z), and cannot include special or accented characters. Press ENTER to set, change, or clear the administrator password, which protects BIOS Setup settings. The password can have no more than 8 characters (0-9, A-Z), and cannot include special or accented characters. Sets whether a user password is required when the notebook boots. Requires the administrator password for changes. Only if the Boot password option is enabled, encodes the current user password (or administrator password if that is the only password set) on the hard drive. Default Auto Auto Enabled Disabled Default Clear Clear Enter Enter Disabled Disabled 86 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Setting Hard Drive
+Removable Devices CD-ROM Drive Built-in LAN Boot Menu Description Shows the order of boot devices. Move the entries to change the order. If the notebook has more than one device in a + category, you can select the one scanned. Built-in LAN provides diskless boot from a network server. Default 1. Hard Drive 2. Removable Devices 3. CD-ROM Drive 4. Built-in LAN Setting Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Get Default Values Exit Menu Description Saves Setup changes, then exits and reboots. Discards any Setup changes made since last save, then exits and reboots. Does not affect password, date, or time changes. Restores default settings, and remains in Setup. Does not affect password, date, or time changes. Default To change video memory settings using BIOS Setup utility The notebook comes with either 32MB or 16MB of video memory. Note Changing your video memory to 8MB, 16MB, 32MB, or 64MB may change the performance of your notebook, depending on your selection. To change your video memory:
1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. Press F2 when the splash screen appears. 3. Move the down arrow key until UMA Video Memory is highlighted. Press Enter to bring up a list of memory settings. Selections include 8 MB, 16MB, 64MB, or Auto. 4. Press F10 to save configuration changes and exit BIOS screen. Reference Guide 87 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Reinstalling and Updating Software Reinstalling and Updating Software Your notebook includes two features that allow you to install individual software applications or to restore the entire original contents of your hard drive:
QuickRestore System Recovery CD, included with your notebook, allows you to restore your hard drive to its original factory contents. Application Recovery utility allows you to restore or install one or more applications. Select Start > Software Setup, then follow the installation wizard on the screen. To replace a damaged QuickRestore System Recovery CD If you lose or damage the QuickRestore System Recovery CD, refer to the service telephone numbers in the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet to contact a Customer Care Center for help and support. 88 Reference Guide Reference Information Reference Guide 89 Reference Information Modem Reference Information Modem Reference Information You can customize the operation of the modem using AT commands and S-registers. You can do this from Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel, from most communications software, or by using terminal mode in your software. Note You should have a good understanding of modems and how they operate before you change default settings. This section contains summary information about AT commands, S-registers, and selected result codes for the built-in modem. Modem Reference (Conexant) All listed AT commands must be preceded by the characters AT (except for the command A/). The commands can be entered in upper or lower case. Many commands can be used as queries by entering ? as the argument. Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Go off-hook and attempt to answer a call. Re-execute command (not preceded by AT). Dial modifier: 09, AD =DTMF digits; L=redial last number; P=pulse dialing; T=tone dialing;
W=wait for dial tone; * (star); # (pound sign); +; !=flash; @=wait for silence; $ or &=wait for credit card dialing tone; ,=return to command state; =dial pause; ^=toggle calling tone. Parentheses, hyphens, and spaces can be used to format dial string and have no other effect. Turn off command echo. Turn on command echo (default). Initiate hang-up sequence. If on-hook, go off-hook and enter command mode. Report product code. Report LSB of stored checksum. Report OK. Report identification codes. Report product description. Report country code parameter. Report modem data pump model and internal code revision. Report modem data pump model and internal code revision. Report OK. Report country. Set speaker volume: 0=off, 1=low (default), 2=medium, 3=high. Activate speaker: 0=off, 1=on during handshaking and off when receiving carrier (default), 2=always on, 3=off when dialing and receiving carrier, on when answering. 90 Reference Guide Command A A/
Dn E0 E1 H0 H1 I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 Ln Mn Command N0 or N1 On P Qn Sn Sn=v T Vn W0 W1 W2 W3 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 Z
+DR: a
+DR=n
+DS=a,b,c,d
+DS44=a,b,c,d, e,f,g,h,i Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Included for compatibility only; returns result code. 0=go on-line, 1=go on-line and initiate retrain sequence. Force pulse dialing. 0=enable result codes to DTE (default), 1=disable. Select S-register n as default. Set default S-register n to value v. Force DTMF dialing. Report result codes: 0=short form (terse), 1=long form (verbose) (default). Report DTE speed (default). Report line speed, error correction protocol, and DTE speed. Report DCE speed. Report DCE speed and error correction protocol. Report CONNECT result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy detection not reported. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy detection not reported. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy detection not reported. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone not reported, busy signal reported if detected. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy signal reported if detected (default). Reset to default configuration. Select error control protocol: NONE=no data compression, V42B=42bis in both directions, ALT=MNP 5 compression. 0=disables extended format "+DR:" intermediate result code, 1=enables. Controls V.42bis data compression function (b, c, and d are optional):
a sets direction(s) of data compression function, seen by DTE: 0=negotiated, no compression;
3=both directions (default). b=0 specifies modem does not disconnect if V.42bis is not negotiated by remote modem as specified by a. c sets maximum number of dictionary entries (2048) that should be negotiated. d sets maximum string length (32 bytes) to be negotiated. Controls V.44 data compression function (b, c, d, e, f, g, h, and i are optional):
a sets direction(s) of data compression function, seen by DTE: 0=negotiated, no compression;
1=transmit only; 2=receive only; 3=both directions (default). b specifies whether modem disconnects if V.44 not negotiated remote DCE as specified in a:
0=do not disconnect (default), 1=disconnect. c: 0=stream method (default), 1=packet method, 2=multi=packet method. d (256 to 2048) sets maximum codewords to be negotiated in transmit direction (default=2048). e (256 to 2048) sets maximum codewords to be negotiated in receive direction (default=2048). f (32 to 255) sets maximum string length to be negotiated in transmit direction (default=32). g (32 to 255) sets maximum string length to be negotiated in receive direction (default=32). h (2048 to 4096) sets maximum size of history buffer to be negotiated in transmit direction
(default=4096). i (2048 to 4096) sets maximum size of history buffer to be negotiated in receive direction
(default=4096). Reference Guide 91 Command
+ESA=a,b,c,d,e, f,g,h
+GCAP
+GCI=n
+GMI
+GMM
+GMR
+GOI
+GSN
+IFC=n,m
+ILRR=n
+IPR=n
+ITF=a,b,c
+PCW=n
+PIG=n
+PMH=n
+PMHF
+PMHR=n
+PMHT=n
+PQC=n
+PSS=n
+VCID=n Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Controls operation of synchronous access mode:
a=0 specifies in transparent sub-mode, modem transmits 8-bit SYN sequence on idle. b=0 specified in framed sub-mode, modem transmits HDLC flags on idle (default and fixed). c=0 specifies in framed sub-mode, modem transmits abort on underrun in middle of frame
(default); c=1 specifies in framed sub-mode, modem transmits flag on underrun in middle of frame, notifies DTE. d: not to be commanded. e=0 specifies CRC generation and checking disabled (default and fixed). f=0 specifies NZRI encoding and decoding disabled (default and fixed). g=255 sets the octet value used in character-oriented framing. h: not to be commanded. Transmit text listing commands that provide additional modem capabilities. Set country of installation using 8-bit country code from Annex A of T.35. Report modem manufacturer. Report modem model. Report modem version, revision, or date. Transmit text identifying the device. Report modem model serial number. Set operation of local flow control between DTE and modem. n =method DTE uses to control data flow from modem: 0=none, 1=XON/XOFF on transmitted data, 2=Circuit 133 (Ready for Receiving) (default). m =method modem uses to control data flow from DTE: 0=none, 1=XON/XOFF on received data, 2=CTS/RTS (default). Report local port rate: 0=disable, 1=enable. Set data rate at which the modem accepts commands when connected: 0 (allows operation only at rates automatically detectable by modem), 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200. Sets transmit flow control thresholds (b and c are optional):
a (20 to 7000) sets threshold (octets) above which modem generates flow-off signal in synchronous access mode (default=128). b (10 to 5000) sets threshold (octets) below which modem generates flow-on signal in synchronous access mode (default=64). c=0 (fixed). Set modem behavior with call waiting: 1=request modem-on-hold and collect caller ID information, 2=hang up, 3=ignore call waiting. 0=enable PCM upstream negotiation, 1=disable (default). Set modem-on-hold: 0=enabled in V.92 mode (default), 1=disabled. Initiate flash hook sequence when in modem-on-hold procedure. Request modem to initiate or confirm modem-on-hold (MOH) procedure and timeout: 0=V.92 modem-on-hold request denied or unavailable, 1 to 13 grant MOH with timeout (1=10 sec, 2=20 sec, 3=30 sec, 4=40 sec, 5=1 min, 6=2 min, 7=3 min, 8=4 min, 9=6 min, 10=8 min, 11=12 min, 12=16 min, 13=indefinite). Set whether modem grants modem-on-hold (MOH) request, and MOH timeout: 0=deny V.92 modem-on-hold request (default), 1 to 13=grant MOH with timeout (1=10 sec, 2=20 sec, 3=30 sec, 4=40 sec, 5=1 min, 6=2 min, 7=3 min, 8=4 min, 9=6 min, 10=8 min, 11=12 min, 12=16 min, 13=indefinite). Use Short Phase startup procedures: 0=enable V.92 Short Phase 1 and 2 (default), 1=enable Short Phase 1 only, 3=disable. 0=modems decide whether to use short startup procedures, 2=use full startup procedures on all subsequent connections. Set caller ID reporting: 0=disable (default), 1=enable with formatted presentation, 2=enable with unformatted presentation. 92 Reference Guide Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Report caller ID: 0=use formatted presentation, 1=use unformatted presentation. Use full startup procedures on next connection, then select startup procedure defined by
+PQC. 0=do not allow modem to save generated quick-connect profile, 1=allow (default). Set RLSD: 0=always on, 1=follow carrier state (default). 0=ignore DTR; 1=upon on-to-off transition, enter online command state and issue OK result code; call remains connected; 2=upon on-to-off transition clear call, discard untransmitted data according to +ETBM. 0=disable line quality monitor, auto-retrain, and auto-rate renegotiation;1=enable line quality monitor, auto-retrain, and auto-rate renegotiation (default). Restore factory configuration. Included for compatibility only; no effect (returns OK). Set DTE/DCE flow control: 0=disable, 3=enable RTS/CTS DTE/DCE flow control (default), 4=enable XON/XOFF DTE/DCE flow control, 5 and 6 included for compatibility only (no effect, returns OK). Included for compatibility only; no effect (returns result code). Set pulse dial (pps) with make/break: 0=10 pps with 39%61% make/break (default), 1=10 pps with 33%67% make/break, 2=20 pps with 39%61% make/break, 3=20 pps with 33%67%
make/break. Select asynchronous operation in error correction mode.
(n=03, 6) Select asynchronous operation in normal mode (speed buffering). Terminate any test in progress. Initiate local analog loopback. Display current configuration and stored profiles. PTT testing of signal level: 0009=DTMF dial 09, 0A=DTMF *, 0B=DTMF #, 0C=DTMF A, 0D=DTMF B, 0E=DTMF C, 0F=DTMF D, 10=V.21 Channel 1mark symbol, 11=V.21 Channel 2mark symbol, 12=V.23 Channel 1mark symbol, 13=V.23 Channel 2mark symbol, 14=Bell103 Channel 1mark symbol, 15=Bell103 Channel 2mark symbol, 20=V22Org, 21=V22Ans, 22=Bell212Org, 23=Bell212Ans, 24=V22BisOrg, 25=V22BisAns, 26=V32@4800, 27=V32@7200, 28=V32@9600, 29=V.32Bis@12000, 2A=V32Bis@14400, 30=Silence, 31=2100Hz MISC, 33=1300Hz MISC, 34=1100Hz MISC, 40=Reserved, 41=V27@2400 FAX, 42=V27@4800 FAX, 43=V29@7200 FAX, 44=V29@9600 FAX, 45=V17@7200LT FAX, 46=V17@7200ST FAX, 47=V17@9600LT FAX, 48=V17@9600ST FAX, 49=V17@12000LT FAX, 4A=V17@12000ST FAX, 4B=V17@14400LT FAX, 4C=V17@14400ST FAX. 5abc: a=bit rate (0=2400, D=33600), b=V.34 symbol rate (0=2400, 5=3429), c=pre-emphasis filter (0 to A). Select normal speed buffered mode. Select normal speed buffered mode. Select reliable (error-correction) mode. Select auto reliable mode. Force LAPM mode. Force MNP mode. Report carrier. Report transmit and receive rates. Disable reporting of modulation connection. Enable reporting of modulation connection (+MCR: and +MRR: are transmitted) (default). Enable reporting of modulation connection (+MCR: and Receive Rate Only: are transmitted). Command
+VRID=n
-QCPC
-QCPS=n
&Cn
&Dn
&En
&F0
&Gn
&Kn
&Mn
&Pn
&Q5
&Qn
&T0
&T1
&V
%TTn
\N0
\N1
\N2
\N3
\N4
\N5
+MCR
+MMR
+MR=0
+MR=1
+MR=2 Reference Guide 93 Command
+MS=a,b,c,d,e,f
+WS=n
%Cn
+EB=a,b,c
+EFCS=0
+ER: a
+ER=n
+ES=a,b,c
+ESR=0
+ETBM=a,b,c
+FAE=n
+FAR=n
+FCL=n
+FCLASS=n
+FIT=n,a Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Select modulation (b, c, d, e, and f are optional). a is the carrier (allowable rates in parentheses): B103 (300), B212 (1200 Rx/75 Tx or 75 Rx/1200 Tx), V21 (300), V22 (1200), V22B (1200/2400), V23C (1200), V32 (4800/9600), V32B
(480014400), V34 (240033600), K56 (3200056000), V90 (2800056000), V92 (downstream: 28000 56000; upstream: 2400048000). b is automode: 0=disabled, 1=enabled (default). c is minimum transmit (Tx) rate (bps). d is maximum transmit rate (bps). e is minimum receive (Rx) rate. f is maximum receive rate (bps). Set PDC mode: 1=disable (default), 20=enable. ECC Commands Set data compression: 0=disable, 1=enable V.42 bis and MNP 5, 2=enable V.42 bis and MNP 5, 3=enable V.42 bis and MNP 5 (default). Select break handling (b and c are optional):
a=0 break is ignored. b=0 transmitted V.42 L-SIGNAL will not indicate break signal length. c=0 break is not delivered to DTE. Select 16-bit FCS specified in V.42. Select error control protocol: NONE=error control not in use, LAPM=V.42 LAPM protocol, ALT=MNP. Error control reporting: 0=disable, 1=enable. Select error control and synchronous mode (b and c are optional). a is requested mode when modem is originator: 0=initiate call with direct mode, 1=initiate call with normal mode, 2=initiate V.42 without detection phase, 3=initiate V.42 with detection phase
(default), 4=initiate MNP, 6=initiate V.80 synchronous access mode when connection is completed. b specifies fallback mode when modem is originator: 0=LAPM, MNP, or normal mode error control optional (default); 1=LAPM, MNP, or direct mode error control optional; 2=LAPM or MNP error control required; 3=LAPM error control required; 4=MNP error control required. c specifies fallback mode when modem is answerer or specifies V.80 synchronous access mode: 1=error control disabled, use normal mode; 2=LAPM, MNP, or normal mode error control optional (default); 3=LAPM, MNP, or direct mode error control optional; 4=LAPM or MNP error control required; 5=LAPM error control required; 6=MNP error control required;
8=initiate V.80 synchronous access mode when connection complete. Disable selective repeat option in V.42. Handle data remaining in modem buffers on call termination (b and c are optional):
a=0 disconnect occurs immediately and buffered transmit data is discarded. b=0 disconnect occurs immediately and buffered receive data is discarded. c=0 modem does not attempt to deliver buffered data and discards data. FAX Class 1 Data/fax auto answer: 0=disable (default), 1=enable. 0=disable adaptive reception (default), 1=enable. Set loss-of-carrier delay in units of 100 ms (n=0 to 255). Set active service class: 0=data mode (default), 1=Fax Class 1, 1.0=Fax Class 1.0 mode, 8=voice mode. Set DTE inactivity timeout n seconds after which modem goes on-hook (a=0) or DCE goes on hook (a=1). 94 Reference Guide Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Set flow control type: 0=XON/XOFF and RTS/CTS flow control turned off; 1=XON/XOFF flow control in either direction; 2=RTS for flow control of modem by DTE, and CTS for flow control of DTE by modem. Report modem manufacturer. Report modem model. Report modem version, revision, or date. Set DTE/modem interface rate in bits/sec: 0=automatic detection (default). Receive data with HDLC framing. Receive data. Receive silence, n 10 ms. Transmit data with HDLC framing. Transmit data. Stop transmission and wait, n 10 ms. Voice Commands Select voice mode. Set report ring cadence and timing of RING event code:
a=0 disables ring cadence reporting, a=1 enables. b sets report content: 0=DROF and DRON messages only. Set report control tone cadence:
a=0 disables ring cadence reporting, a=1 enables. b=0 reports CPOF and CPON messages only. Select speakerphone half-duplex (a=0) or full duplex (a=1). Set microphone gain of speakerphone function (0 to 255). Set gain for received voice samples (0 to 255). Set speaker gain of speakerphone function (0 to 255). Set volume (120 to 135). Initialize all voice parameters to defaults. Set initial value for DTE/modem inactivity timer (0 to 255 seconds). Select sources/destinations for analog data. Set automatic hangups: 0=enable, 1=disable, 2=disable automatic hangups in non-voice modes. Set DTE/modem interface rate (0=autobaud). Set delay between ringbacks before modem assumes remote station is off hook (0 to 255 x 0.1 sec). Set delay between ringbacks before modem assumes remote station is off hook (0 to 60 sec). Start voice reception: 0=start without periodic tone production, 1=start with periodic tone production. Set silence detection sensitivity and required period of silence before modem reports silence at end of voice receive. Set voice and silence compression methods, and voice sampling rate. Disable (a=0) or enable (a=1) speakerphone. Set beep duration (1 to 500 x 0.01 sec). Start voice transmission and reception. Send voice tones. Start voice transmission. Command
+FLO=a
+FMI
+FMM
+FMR
+FPR=n
+FRH=n
+FRM=n
+FRS=n
+FTH=n
+FTM=n
+FTS=n
+FCLASS=8
+VDR=a,b
+VDT=a,b
+VDX=a
+VGM=n
+VGR=n
+VGS=n
+VGT=n
+VIP
+VIT=n
+VLS=n
+VNH=n
+VPR=n
+VRA=n
+VRN=n
+VRXn
+VSD=a,b
+VSM=a,b,c,d
+VSP=a
+VTD=n
+VTR
+VTS=string
+VTX
*B
*D Display black-listed numbers. Display delayed numbers. AT* Commands Reference Guide 95 Register S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S10 S11 S12 S18 S29 S30 S46 S95 Reference Information Modem Reference Information S-Registers (Conexant) Function (Conexant) Number of rings to auto-answer. Ring counter. Escape character. Line termination character. Response formatting character. Command line editing character. Wait time for dial tone. Wait time for carrier. Pause time for dial delay modifier. Carrier loss disconnect time. DTMF tone duration. Escape prompt delay. Test timer. Flash dial modifier time. Disconnect inactivity timer. Data compression control. Range/units 0255/rings 0255/rings 0255/ASCII 0127/ASCII 0127/ASCII 032/ASCII 2255/sec 1255/sec 0255/sec 1255/.1 sec 50255/.001 sec 0255/.02 sec 0255/sec 0255/10 msec 0255/10 sec 136 (error correction w/o compression) or 138 (error correction
& compression) Default 0 0 43 13 10 (line feed) 8
(backspace) 2 50 2 14 (1.4 sec) 95 (95 msec) 50 (1 sec) 0 70 (700 msec) 0 138 Extended result code messages control. 0 Selected Result Codes (Conexant) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 24 32 33 35 83 Meaning OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR CONNECT 1200 NO DIAL TONE BUSY NO ANSWER DELAYED BLACKLISTED FAX DATA LINE IN USE 96 Reference Guide Reference Information Safety Information Safety Information Power cords The power cord supplied with the notebook AC adapter should match the plug and voltage requirements for your local area. Regulatory approval for the AC adapter has been obtained using the power cord for the local area. However, if you travel to a different area or need to connect to a different outlet or voltage, you should use one of the power cords listed below. To purchase a power cord (including one for an area not listed below) or a replacement AC adapter, contact your local authorized dealer or Sales and Service office. For any power cord with a fused plug, if you have to replace the fuse, be sure to install an approved fuse. Country or Region Canada Mexico Philippines Taiwan United States East and West Europe Egypt Saudi Arabia Hong Kong Singapore United Kingdom Australia New Zealand Japan India South Africa Argentina Chile China South Korea Rated Voltage and Current 125 Vac (3 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 125 Vac (3 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) Reference Guide 97 Reference Information Safety Information Battery safety To avoid risk of fire, burns, or damage to your battery pack, do not allow a metal object to touch the battery contacts. Do not disassemble the battery. There are no serviceable parts inside. Do not dispose of the battery pack in fire or water. Handle a damaged or leaking battery with extreme care. If you come in contact with the electrolyte, wash the exposed area with soap and water. If it contacts the eye, flush the eye with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not expose the battery pack to storage temperatures above 60 C (140 F). When discarding a battery pack, contact your local waste disposal provider regarding local restrictions on the disposal or recycling of batteries. To obtain a replacement battery, contact your local dealer or sales office. Do not charge the battery pack if the ambient temperature exceeds 45 C
(113 F). Replace only with the same or equivalent type battery pack recommended by the manufacturer. This product contains a lithium-ion or nickel-metal-hydride battery and may require special handling at end-of-life. Laser safety The CD-ROM and DVD drives used with the computer are certified as a Class 1 laser devices according to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard and International Standards IEC 825 /
IEC 825-1 (EN60825 / EN60825-1). These devices are not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Ensure proper use by reading and following the instructions carefully. 98 Reference Guide Reference Information Safety Information If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center. Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beamdo not open the unit. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LED safety The infrared port located on the front of certain models is classified as a Class 1 LED (light-emitting diode) device according to International Standard IEC 825-1
(EN60825-1). This device is not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit. Avoid direct eye exposure to the infrared LED beam. Be aware that the beam is If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center. invisible light and cannot be seen. Do not attempt to view the infrared LED beam with any type of optical device. CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT LEDSCHTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT Mercury safety This product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the liquid-crystal display, and may require special handling at end-of-life. Reference Guide 99 Reference Information Safety Information Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of the IEEE 802.11 and Bluetooth internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. We therefore believe the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. 100 Reference Guide Regulatory Information Reference Information Regulatory Information This section presents information that shows how your computer complies with regulations in certain regions. Any modifications to your computer not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the authority to operate the computer in these regions. U.S.A. This computer has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This computer generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this computer does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by removing the units batteries and AC adapter), try the following:
Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna. Relocating the computer with respect to the receiver. Connecting the computers AC adapter to another power outlet. Connections to Peripheral Devices To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, use properly shielded cables with this device. For more information, consult your dealer, an experienced radio/television technician, or the following booklet, prepared by the Federal Communications Commission: How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402, Stock Number 004-000-00345-4. At the first printing of this manual, the telephone number was (202) 512-1800. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. Reference Guide 101 Reference Information Regulatory Information Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 means the REN is 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call 1-800-652-6672. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should only perform repairs to the equipment specifically discussed in the troubleshooting section of the user guide. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this computer equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. 102 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.) Declaration of Conformity (U.S.A.) Responsible Party:
Hewlett-Packard Company Manager of Corporate Product Regulations 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto, CA 94304
+1 (650) 857-1501 declares that the product(s) Hewlett-Packard Company Pavilion ZE4... and XT... series CRVSA-02T1-75/90 Trade name:
Product name:
Regulatory Model Number:
Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed five. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Reference Guide 103 Reference Information Regulatory Information The internal wireless radio complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limites applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par le Ministre des Communications du Canada. Le composant RF interne est conforme la norme CNR-210 dIndustrie Canada. Lutilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) lutilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. European Union The equipment has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) and to a radio-frequency wireless network. However, due to differences between the individual PSTs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work in all of the countries of the European Economic Area (Public Switched Telephone Networks). Network compatibility is dependent on internal software settings. Contact your equipment supplier if it is necessary to use the equipment on a different telephone network. Belgium: For outdoor usage only channels 10 (2457 MHz) through 13 (2472 MHz) are allowed. For private usage outside buildings across public grounds over less than 300m, no special registration with IBPT/BIPT is required. Registration to IBPT/BIPT is required for private usage outside buildings across public grounds over more than 300m. An IBPT/BIPT license is required for public usage outside building. For registration and license please contact IBPT/BIPT. France: Restricted frequency band: only channels 10 through 13 (2457 MHz through 2472 MHz respectively) may be used in France. License required for every installation, indoor and outdoor installations. Please contact ART for the procedure to follow. Use with outdoor installations not allowed. 104 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information Germany: License required for outdoor installations. Check with reseller for procedure to follow. Netherlands: License required for outdoor installations. Check with reseller for procedure to follow. Italy: Indoor or outdoor use in a public area requires a user license. Die Gerte wurden gem Ratsentscheidung 98/482/EC fr den Anschluss an eine einzelne Telefonbuchse im europischen Raum (Public Switched Telephone Network) und drahtlose Funknetzwerke zertifiziert. In Anbetracht der Unterschiede zwischen den einzelnen Telefonnetzen bietet die Zertifizierung fr sich genommen keine absolute Sicherheit, dass die Gerte bei Anschluss an jeder beliebigen Telefonbuchse funktionieren. Sollten Probleme auftreten, wenden Sie sich zunchst an den Gertehersteller. Diese Gerte wurden zum Betrieb in allen Lndern der europischen Wirtschaftsgemein-
schaft entwickelt (Public Switched Telephone Networks). Die Kompatibilitt zum Netz ist von internen Software-Einstellungen abhngig. Wenden Sie sich an den Gertehersteller, wenn Sie die Gerte in einem anderen Telefonnetz einsetzen mssen. Cet quipement a t reconnu conforme aux dcisions du Conseil 98/482/EC relatives la connexion pan-europenne de terminal simple au rseau tlphonique public commut (RTPC) et un rseau sans fil RF. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les RTPC nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du rseau tlphonique public commut. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. Cet quipement a t conu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays membres de la zone d'change europenne (Rseaux Tlphoniques Public Commuts). La compatibilit entre rseaux dpend des paramtres internes du logiciel. Prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement pour savoir s'il est prfrable d'utiliser ce dernier sur un autre rseau tlphonique. Questa apparecchiatura stata approvata in conformit alla Decisione del Consiglio 98/482/EC che regolamenta, in seno allUnione Europea, la connessione di singoli terminali alla rete telefonica pubblica commutata (PSTN) e alla rete wireless in radio frequenza. Tuttavia, a causa delle differenze esistenti tra i singoli servizi PSTN forniti nei diversi paesi, lapprovazione in s stessa non rappresenta una garanzia assoluta di funzionamento su ogni singolo punto di terminazione della rete PSTN. Reference Guide 105 Reference Information Regulatory Information In caso di problemi, per prima cosa rivolgersi al fornitore dellapparecchiatura. Questa apparecchiatura stata progettata per funzionare in tutti i paesi dellArea Economica Europea (reti telefoniche pubbliche commutate). La compatibilit della rete dipende dalle impostazioni interne del software. Rivolgersi al fornitore dellapparecchiatura qualora sia necessario utilizzare questultima su una rete telefonica diversa. Japan Japan Telecommunications Approval Name of Equipment: AMC20493-001-KT5 TELEC approval number: D02-0005JP Name of Equipment: T60H424 106 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information New Zealand Conexant AMC20493 Data Fax Modem PTC 211/02/071 PTC200 General Warning The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. PTC200 2.11.1 (6) & (7) Compliance Testing (Functional tests) This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. This condition typically applies to 56 kbit/s modems. PTC200 4.5.1 (4) Off-hook Line Impedance This equipment does not fully meet Telecoms impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. PTC200 5.6.1 (3) General Requirements (automatic dialing devices) This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to Telecoms 111 Emergency Service. PTC200 7.5.2 (3) (4) Ringer Sensitivity This device may be subject to ringing or bell tinkle when certain other devices are connected to the same line. If this occurs, the problem should not be referred to the Telecom Faults Service. Associated Software Limits of Compliance Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the application software or PC equipment associated with this device. The application software shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms specifications:
The S0 register must contain a value of 0 for no auto-answer or a value of 2 for auto-answer. The S6 register must contain a value of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7. The factory default of 2 is recommended. The S7 register must contain a value less than 90. The factory default of 72 is recommended. The S10 register must contain a value less than 150. The factory default of 14 is recommended. The S11 register must contain a value greater than 60. The factory default of 95 is recommended. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of the next attempt to the same number. Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 2 seconds apart. Failure to set these parameters correctly could negate the User Rights under the Telecom Terms of Service. Reference Guide 107 Reference Information Regulatory Information Russia International Note Products sold internationally by the manufacturer and its authorized dealers meet the specifications listed on the following page. For regulatory identification purposes, your product is assigned a Regulatory Model Number. The Regulatory Model Number for your product is listed in the declaration below. This regulatory number is different from the marketing name and product number. 108 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information Hewlett-Packard Company, Personal Systems Group 19310 Pruneridge Ave., Cupertino, CA 95014, U.S.A. Declaration of Conformity (according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014) Manufacturers Name:
Manufacturers Address:
declares that the following product Product Name:
Regulatory Model Number:
Product Options:
conforms to the following product specifications Safety:
HP Notebook PCs CRVSA-02T1-75 Includes all options for analog modems (Conexant) and 802.11b RF devices (Ambit) IEC 60950: 1991 +A1,A2,A3,A4 / EN 60950: 1992 +A1,A2,A3,A4,A11 IEC 60825-1: 1993 +A1 / EN 60825-1: 1994 +A11 Class 1 LED GB4943-1995 EN 55022: 1994 +A1: 1995 +A2: 1997, Class B [1]
CISPR 24: 1997 / EN 55024: 1998 IEC 61000-3-2: 1995 / EN 61000-3-2:1995 +A1: 1998 +A2: 1998 IEC 61000-3-3: 1994 / EN 61000-3-3:1995 GB9254-1998 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B/ANSI C63.4: 1992 AS/NZS 3548: 1995 Rules and Regulations of Class B TBR 21: 1998, EG 201 121: 1998 EN 301 489-17: 2000 Specific conditions for wideband data HYPERLAN equipment EN 300 328-2: 2000 Technical requirements for Radio equipment Notified Body Number: 0682 Notified Body Address: CETECOM ICT Services GmbH, Untertuerkheimer Str. 6-10, D-
66117 Saarbruecken The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and carries the CE marking accordingly.
[1] The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer peripherals. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The HP F1454, F1781, F4600, F4814, F4813, F5104, 5950-4334, and 5950-4359 ac/dc adapters used with this product are designed to operate on all power systems, other than IT power systems. EMC:
Telecom:
Radio:
Equipment Class 2 Supplementary Information:
Corvallis, OR, July 17, 2002 European Contact for regulatory topics only: Hewlett Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany. Fax: +49 7031 143143. USA Contact: Hewlett Packard Co., Corporate Product Regulations Manager, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (650) 857-1501. Reference Guide 109 Index A AC adapter compatibility, 11, 55 connecting, 11 AC adapter jack, location, 5 AdHoc wireless network setup, 41 adjusting brightness, 19 volume, 19 airplanes, wireless communication in, 42, 44 ALT GR key, 21 antistatic precautions, 58, 60 Applications key, 21 AT commands, 38 audio adjusting volume, 66 troubleshooting, 66 volume, 19 audio jacks, 3 audio mute button, 3 B battery best use of, 34 checking status, 32 extending life of, 34 installing, 10 location, 2, 3 low power warning, 33 operating time, 34, 78 release latch, 6, 7 safety, 98 saving power, 34 status lights, 32 troubleshooting, 77 BIOS password, 24 BIOS Setup utility Boot menu, 87 Exit menu, 87 external display settings, 86 Main menu, 85 Security menu, 86 using, 84 black list (modem), 37 blackout periods, modem, 37 Bluetooth business cards, 46 configuring, 45 sending files, 46 troubleshooting, 82 tuning on, 44 turning off, 45 wireless, 44 boot device order, 17, 87 Boot menu (BIOS), 87 brightness, adjusting, 19 business cards, 46 C Cable lock, 25 Caps Lock, 9 Cardbus cards, 48 cards, PCMCIA, 48 CD-ROM drive creating or copying CDs, 23 inserting CD, 20, 22 location, 2, 3 removing CD, 20, 22 CDs copying/creating, 23 recommended media, 23 cleaning the notebook, 28 configuring BIOS settings, 84 modem, 38 connecting IEEE 1394 devices, 53 LAN, 39 wireless network, 40 D data protection, 28 DDR-266 RAM, 58, 73 default BIOS settings, 85 devices boot order, 87 temporary boot order, 17 diskette drive location, 5 USB, 81 display BIOS settings, 86 brightness, 19, 28, 34 dual display, 53 dual monitor, 53 extending life, 28 memory, 85 port, 5 secondary, 53 troubleshooting, 68 docking port, 6, 7 drives hard drive holder, 63 replacing hard drive, 62 DVD drive location, 2, 3 setting region code, 23 troubleshooting, 67 E encryption, 40 ergonomics, 10 Exit menu (BIOS), 87 extended memory, 85 external monitor port, 5 F Fn key
+ Back Space (mute), 19
+ F1 (decrease brightness), 19
+ F12 (hibernation), 19
+ F2 (increase brightness), 19
+ F8 (keypad), 19
+ NumLock (scroll lock), 19
+ Page Down (decrease audio), 19
+ Page Up (increase audio), 19 H hard drive caring for, 28 Hibernation partition, 62, 87 holder, 63 location, 6, 7 protecting, 27 replacing, 62 troubleshooting, 69 Hibernation status lights, 8 Reference Guide 111 Hibernation mode definition, 16 Hibernation partition, 62, 87 hot keys, 19 hot notebook, 70 I IEEE 1394 port connecting devices, 53 location, 5 infrared communication troubleshooting, 70 infrared port location, 2, 3 printing, 54 safety, 99 troubleshooting, 70 inserting CD, 20, 22 DVD, 20, 22 PC card, 48 installing battery, 10 hard drive, 62 hard drive holder, 63 Internet Service Provider, 36 K keyboard ergonomic precautions, 10 non US, 21 status lights, 2, 3, 9 troubleshooting, 71 Keypad Lock, 2, 3, 9 L LAN connecting to, 39 troubleshooting, 72 wireless, 40 LAN port indicator lights, 39 location, 5 laser safety, 98 lights LAN port, 39 status, 2, 3, 8, 9 locking notebook, 24 LPT1 port, 5 M Main menu (BIOS), 85 maintenance notebook configuration, 84 software installation, 88 memory extended, 85 PC2100 DDR-266, 58, 73 troubleshooting, 73 video, 85 Mini PCI location, 6, 7 modem AT commands, 38 black list, 37 blackout periods, 37 built-in, 12 port location, 5 settings, 38 software, 36 troubleshooting, 73 monitor BIOS settings, 86 port, 5 resolution, 53 mouse, troubleshooting, 71 mute button location, 3 N network connecting to, 39 LAN, See LAN wireless, See wireless network Norton AntiVirus, 25 notebook caring for, 27 changing BIOS settings, 84 cleaning, 28 opening/closing, 2, 3 protecting, 27, 70 resetting, 17 timeouts, 31 turning on, 13 Num Lock, 9 O off button location, 2, 3 status lights, 8 turning off, 16 on button, location, 2, 3 One-Touch buttons location, 2, 3 using, 20 overheating, 70 P parallel port location, 5 troubleshooting, 80 password, 24 PC card slot, location, 5 PC cards installing, 48 saving power, 34 stopping, 49 troubleshooting, 76 PC2100 DDR-266 RAM, 58, 73 PCMCIA cards, 48 phone cord, connecting, 12 plug requirements, 97 port locations, 5 power connecting AC, 11 saving, 34 troubleshooting, 77 power button location, 2, 3 resetting with, 17 power cords, 97 power management automated, 30 schemes, 31 printing infrared printers, 54 troubleshooting, 79 protection Cable lock, 25 Norton AntiVirus, 25 PS/2 port, 2, 5 Q Quick Lock, 24 QuickRestore System Recovery CD using, 88 R RAM location, 6, 7 PC2100 DDR-266, 58, 73 112 Reference Guide rebooting boot device, 87 temporary boot device, 17 region code, 23 regulatory information, 101 removing CD, 20, 22 DVD, 20, 22 hard drive, 62 hard drive holder, 63 PC card, 49 reset button, 17 resetting, 17 S safety battery use, 98 infrared port, 99 laser, 98 power cords, 97 wireless communication, 42, 44 safety information, iii saving battery power, 34 scroll pad, 3 scroll pad, 2 secondary display, 53 security cable lock, 5 Cable lock, 25 Norton AntiVirus, 25 Security menu (BIOS), 86 serial port troubleshooting, 80 setting up, 10 Standby and display life, 28 resuming and, 82 saving power, 34 status lights, 8 troubleshooting, 82 Standby mode definition, 16 timeout, 16 startup, troubleshooting, 81 static electricity, 58, 60 status lights battery charge, 32 keyboard, 2, 3, 9 location, 2, 3 meanings, 8 S-Video port, 5 T temperature, overheating, 70 1394 devices, connecting, 53 1394 port, 53 timeouts, notebook, 31 TouchPad location, 2, 3 troubleshooting, 71 troubleshooting audio, 66 battery, 77 CD/DVD drive, 67 display, 68 hard drive, 69 infrared communications, 70 keyboard, 71 LAN, 72 memory, 73 modem, 73 overheating, 70 parallel port, 80 PC card, 76 performance, 76 pointing devices, 71 power, 77 printing, 79 resuming, 82 serial port, 80 Standby, 82 startup, 81 USB, 80 wireless communication, 82 turning on notebook, 13 typing special characters, 21 U USB diskette drive, 81 port location, 5 third port location, 3 troubleshooting, 80 V ventilation, 27, 70 video memory, 85 virus protection, 25 voltage requirements, 97 volume adjusting, 19 troubleshooting, 66 volume control, 3 W Windows key, 21 password, 24 setting up, 13 wireless communication Bluetooth, 44 configuring (Bluetooth), 45 indicator light, 2, 3, 42, 44 on-off button, 40 restrictions on use, 42, 44 status, 42 troubleshooting, 82 turning off (Bluetooth), 45 turning on, 42 turning on (Bluetooth), 44 wireless network AdHoc, 41 connecting to, 40 Reference Guide 113
| 1 2 3 | User Manual | Users Manual | 1.18 MiB | May 08 2003 |
Contents: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card User's Guide Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card User's Guide Introduction Completing the Setup Using the Broadcom BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility Specifications Regulatory Information Troubleshooting Glossary Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Copyright 2002 Broadcom Corporation. All rights reserved. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Broadcom Corporation. Documentation is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of non-infringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Broadcom Corporation reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products or data herein to improve reliability, function, or design. Information furnished by Broadcom Corporation is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, Broadcom Corporation does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of this information, nor the application or use of any product or circuit described herein, neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Broadcom, the pulse logo, and Connecting Everything are trademarks of Broadcom Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in the United States and certain other countries. Microsoft, Windows XP, and Windows 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Broadcom Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Restrictions and Disclaimers The information contained in this document, including all instructions, cautions, and regulatory approvals and certifications, is provided by the supplier and has not been independently verified or tested by Broadcom. Broadcom cannot be responsible for damage caused as a result of either following or failing to follow these instructions. All statements or claims regarding the properties, capabilities, speeds or qualifications of the part referenced in this document are made by the supplier and not by Broadcom. Broadcom specifically disclaims knowledge of the accuracy, completeness or substantiation for any such statements. All questions or comments relating to such statements or claims should be directed to the supplier. Preliminary Release: November 2002 94306MP-UM100-D1 file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/Index.htm [11/22/2002 2:16:03 PM]
Introduction: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Back to Contents Introduction: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Before you begin Things you should know BCM94301MPL network Before you begin Obtain the following information from your network administrator (if you are a home user, obtain this information from the person that installed your wireless access point):
l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks that you want to connect to. l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks you want to connect to. l For Microsoft Windows networking, your customer name and workgroup name. l For your network account, your user name and password. l Your IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Things you should know When you start your computer, your Broadcom BCM94301MPL internal 802.11b Mini PCI card detects certain wireless networks that are within range. Before you can connect to these and other wireless networks, you must configure a profile for each network using the information you obtained from your network administrator. Instructions for configuring a network profile are provided in Completing the setup. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in the IEEE 802.11b standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network you are connecting to has enabled WEP, you must also enable WEP in the network profile and set the WEP key to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, you cannot connect to the network. Broadcom BCM94301MPL network The Broadcom BCM94301MPL solution allows you to make a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated below. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/intro.htm (1 of 2) [11/22/2002 2:16:04 PM]
Introduction: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Back to top Back to Contents Please read copyright and trademark information. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/intro.htm (2 of 2) [11/22/2002 2:16:04 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Back to Contents Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide NOTEBefore you begin, be sure you have the required network information from your network administrator (see Before you begin in the Introduction section). Configuring a network profile (Windows 2000 environment) Configuring a network profile (Windows XP environment) Configuring a network profile (Windows 2000 environment) Before you can connect to a wireless network, you must configure a network profile for that network on your computer using the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. If you purchased your portable computer with the Broadcom BCM94301MPL internal 802.11b Mini PCI card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. If this is not the case, first verify that the Broadcom BCM94301MPL card has been properly installed in your computer according to the installation instructions. Then proceed with the following instructions for configuring your network profiles. The instructions explain how to open the utility and how to use it to configure a network profile. Opening the utility 1. From the desktop, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility icon 3. If the Wireless Networks tab in the Wireless Configuration box is not on top, click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (1 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed in the Available networks list as well as networks that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Your computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the Preferred networks list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires a WEP key (check with your network administrator to see if a WEP key is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive. l Configuring a profile for a listed network that does not require a WEP key l Configuring a profile for a listed network that requires a WEP key l Configuring a profile for an network that is not listed and does not require a WEP key l Configuring a profile for an network that is not listed and requires a WEP key Configuring a profile for a listed network that does not require a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) 1. After opening the utility, select the network from the Available networks list and click Configure. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (2 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 2. Click OK in the Wireless Network Properties box. 3. The network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the selected network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (3 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Configuring a profile for a listed network that requires a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) 1. After opening the utility, select the network from the Available networks list and click Configure. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (4 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 2. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 3. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 4. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEYou do not need to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as you type the network key. 5. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (5 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 6. The network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the selected network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (6 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Configuring a profile for a network that is not listed and does not require a WEP key
(Windows 2000 environment) 1. After opening the utility, click Add. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (7 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 2. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 3. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (8 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 4. The network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the added network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (9 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Configuring a profile for a network that is not listed and requires a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) 1. After opening the utility, click Add. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (10 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 2. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 3. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 4. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 5. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEYou do not need to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as you type the network key. 6. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (11 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 7. The network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the added network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (12 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Configuring a network profile (Windows XP environment) Before you can connect to a wireless network, you must configure a network profile for that network on your computer using the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. If you purchased your portable computer with the Broadcom BCM94301MPL internal 802.11b Mini PCI card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. If this is not the case, first verify that the Broadcom BCM94301MPL card has been properly installed in your computer according to the installation instructions. Then proceed with the following instructions for configuring your network profiles. The instructions explain how to open the utility and how to use it to configure a network profile. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration at the bottom of the Wireless Networks tab of the utility. Opening the utility 1. From the desktop, click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. If you are looking at the Category View of Control Panel, click Switch to Classic View. If you are looking at the Classic View of Control Panel, go to the next step. 3. Double-click the Network Connections icon. 4. Right-click Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card in the LAN or High-Speed Internet area and click Properties. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (13 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 5. If the Wireless Networks tab is not on top, Click the Wireless Networks tab. 6. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed in the Available networks list as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Your computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the Preferred networks list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires a WEP key (check with your network administrator to see if a WEP key is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive. l Configuring a profile for a listed network that does not require a WEP key l Configuring a profile for a listed network that requires a WEP key l Configuring a profile for an network that is not listed and does not require a WEP key l Configuring a profile for an network that is not listed and requires a WEP key Configuring a profile for a listed network that does not require a WEP key (Windows XP environment) 1. After opening the utility, select the network from the Available networks list and click Configure. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (14 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 2. Click OK in the Wireless Network Properties box. 3. The network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the selected network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (15 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Configuring a profile for a listed network that requires a WEP key (Windows XP environment) 1. After opening the utility, select the network from the Available networks list and click Configure. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (16 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 2. In the Wireless Network Properties box, select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 3. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 4. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEYou do not need to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as you type the network key. 5. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (17 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 6. The network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the selected network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (18 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Configuring a profile for a network that is not listed and does not require a WEP key
(Windows XP environment) 1. After opening the utility, click Add. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (19 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 2. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 3. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (20 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 4. The network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the added network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (21 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Configuring a profile for a network that is not listed and requires a WEP key (Windows XP environment) 1. After opening the utility, click Add. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (22 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 2. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 3. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 4. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 5. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEYou do not need to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as you type the network key. 6. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (23 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 7. The network name and icon appear at the top of the Preferred networks list. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the added network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that you are connected to the Internet. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (24 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Completing the Setup: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Back to top Back to Contents Please read copyright and trademark information. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/setup.htm (25 of 25) [11/22/2002 2:16:07 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Back to Contents Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Opening the utility Adding a new network to the list of preferred networks Viewing the link status of your wireless connection Viewing or modifying the wireless network properties Setting up an ad hoc (peer-to-peer) group network for connecting to the Internet Adding an ad hoc network Disabling the radio Diagnostics Opening the utility The BCM94301MPL wireless utility starts automatically every time you start your computer. When the system startup process is complete, the utility icon is not in the system tray, you can have it appear by selecting Show wireless configuration icon in systray from the Wireless Networks tab in the Wireless Configuration box that appears when the utility is open. appears in the system tray of the Windows task bar at the bottom right of your screen. If the utility icon To open the utility in the Windows 2000 environment 1. From the desktop, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the BCM94301MPL wireless utility icon
. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (1 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:10 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide To open the utility in the Windows XP environment 1. From the desktop, click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. If you are looking at the Category View of Control Panel, click Switch to Classic View. If you are looking at the Classic View of Control Panel, go to the next step. 3. Double-click the Network Connections icon. 4. Right-click Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card in the LAN or High-Speed Internet area and click Properties. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (2 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:10 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Adding a new network to the list of preferred networks Your computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the Preferred networks list. You must configure a network profile for each network that you want to add to the Preferred networks list. To add a new network to the list of preferred networks in the Windows 2000 environment, first check to see if the new network is listed in the Available networks list of the Wireless Networks tab of the utility. If it is, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system your computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. l See Configuring a profile for a listed network that does not require a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) in Completing the setup. l See Configuring a profile for a listed network that requires a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) in Completing the setup. l See Configuring a profile for a listed network that does not require a WEP key (Windows XP environment) in Completing the setup l See Configuring a profile for a listed network that requires a WEP key (Windows XP environment) in the Completing the setup. If the network you want to add to the Preferred networks list is not listed in the Available networks list, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system your computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. l See Configuring a profile for a network that is not listed and does not require a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) in file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (3 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:10 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Completing the setup. l See Configuring a profile for a network that is not listed and requires a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) in Completing the setup. l See Configuring a profile for a network that is not listed and does not require a WEP key (Windows XP environment) in Completing the setup l See Configuring a profile for a network that is not on listed and requires a WEP key (Windows XP environment) in the Completing the setup. Viewing the link status of your wireless connection To view the link status (Windows 2000 environment) 1. Open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. a. From the desktop, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. b. Double-click the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility icon. 2. Click the Link Status tab in the Wireless Configuration box. To view the link status (Windows XP environment) file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (4 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:10 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 1. Open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility a. From the desktop, click the Start button and click Control Panel. b. If you are looking at the Category View of Control Panel, click Switch to Classic View. If you are looking at the Classic View of Control Panel, go to the next step. c. Double-click the Network Connections icon. d. Double-click Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card in the LAN or High-Speed Internet area. 2. Click the Link Status tab in the Wireless Configuration box. The quality of the connection (signal strength) is indicated graphically by the color of the vertical bars in the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility icon and is indicated verbally by the description (in this case, Excellent). Three vertical green bars indicate that the signal strength is very good or excellent. Two vertical green bars indicate that the signal is good. Two vertical yellow bars indicate that the signal strength is marginal. Suggested action: move closer to the access point. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (5 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:10 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide A single vertical red bar indicates that the signal strength is very weak Suggested action: save your files and move closer to the access point. Uncolored vertical bars indicate that there is no signal being received. Probable causes:
l The computer is trying to establish an initial connection. l You have moved out of range of the network. l You have disabled the radio. These graphical link status indicators are also shown on the BCM94301MPL icon in the system tray. The verbal description of the signal strength appears when you hover the cursor over the icon. If the signal strength indications are anything other than very good or excellent, you should take the appropriate suggested action. Viewing or modifying the wireless network properties To view or modify the wireless network properties (Windows 2000 environment) 1. Open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. a. From the desktop, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. b. Double-click the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility icon
. 2. If it is not already on top, click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Select the network from the Preferred networks list and click Properties. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (6 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:10 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 4. From the Wireless Network Properties box, you can enable or disable WEP data encryption and change the network name and network key (see the Completing the setup section for instructions). file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (7 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:10 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide To view or modify the wireless network properties (Windows XP environment) 1. Open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. Panel, click Switch to Classic View. a. From the desktop, click the Start button and click Control Panel. If you are looking at the Category View of Control b. Double-click the Network Connections icon. c. Right-click Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card in the LAN or High-Speed Internet area and click Properties. 2. If it is not already on top, click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Select the network from the Preferred networks list and click Properties. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (8 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 4. From the Wireless Networks Properties box, you can enable or disable WEP data encryption and change the network name and the network key (see the Completing the setup section for instructions). file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (9 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Setting up an ad hoc (peer-to-peer) group network for connecting to the Internet To connect the computers in an an-hoc group network to the Internet, you must install the Windows Internet connection sharing (ICS) component. ICS installation is not required, however, for communication among a group of computers that have a Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI card installed in each computer. You must also add an ad hoc network to the Preferred networks list on the Wireless Networks tab of the Wireless Configuration box that appears when the BCM94301MPL wireless utility is open. Select one of your desktop computers to serve as the host computer (all other computers are called clients). The host computer must be running either the Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system. The host computer is the only computer that connects directly to the Internet. Broadcom recommends that the host computer be the desktop computer having the fastest microprocessor and the most memory. NOTEInternet connection sharing requires that the host computer have either a modem or another network adapter in addition to a wireless network adapter. The modem or the additional network adapter is used to access the Internet. Your Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI card is used to share the Internet connections with other clients. Setting up Internet connection sharing (ICS) on the host computer To set up ICS in the Windows XP environment 1. Connect the host computer to the Internet. 2. From the host computer, click the Start button. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (10 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 3. Click Help and Support. 4. Perform a search on Internet Connection Sharing. 5. From the Pick a task list, click Enable Internet Connection Sharing on a Network Connection. 6. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete setting up ICS. To set up ICS in the Windows 2000 environment 1. Connect the host computer to the Internet. 2. From the host computer, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 3. Double-click Network and Dial-up Connections. 4. If the host computer is connected to the Internet using a dial-up connection, double-click Dial-up Connection, click Properties, click Sharing, and then ensure that both Enabled Internet Connection Sharing for this connection and Enabled on-demand dialing are selected. 5. If the host computer is connected to the Internet using a cable or DSL modem, double-click Local Area Connection. 6. In the Local Area Connection Status box, click Properties. 7. Click the Sharing tab and select Enable Internet Connection Sharing for this connection. 8. Click OK Adding an ad hoc network You can add an ad hoc network (for peer-to-peer communicating) that either requires a WEP key or does not. Instructions for adding and configuring an ad hoc network for both types of ad hoc networks are provided below:
l Adding an ad hoc network that does not require a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) l Adding an ad hoc network that requires a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) l Adding an ad hoc network that does not require a WEP key (Windows XP environment) l Adding an ad hoc network that requires a WEP key (Windows XP environment) Adding an ad hoc network that does not require a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) 1. To add an ad hoc network to the Preferred networks list, open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. a. From the desktop, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. b. Double-click the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility icon
. 2. If the Wireless Networks tab is not already on top, click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (11 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 5. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network: wireless access points are not used box. 6. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (12 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 7. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the added network when you see a bubble on top of the icon for that network. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (13 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Adding an ad hoc network that requires a WEP key (Windows 2000 environment) 1. To add an ad hoc network to the Preferred networks list, open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. a. From the desktop, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. b. Double-click the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility icon
. 2. If the Wireless Networks tab is not already on top, click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (14 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 5. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 6. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 7. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEYou do not need to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as you type the network key. 8. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network: wireless access points are not used box. 9. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (15 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 10. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the added network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (16 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Adding an ad hoc network that does not require a WEP key (Windows XP environment) 1. To add an ad hoc network to the Preferred networks list, open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. a. From the desktop, click the Start button and click Control Panel. If you are looking at the Category View of Control Panel, click Switch to Classic View. b. Double-click the Network Connections icon. c. Right-click Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card in the LAN or High-Speed Internet area and click Properties. 2. If the Wireless Networks tab is not already on top, click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 4. Click Add. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (17 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 5. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 6. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network: wireless access points are not used box. 7. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (18 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 8. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the added network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. Adding an ad hoc network that requires a WEP key (Windows XP environment) 1. To add an ad hoc network to the Preferred networks list, open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. a. From the desktop, click the Start button and click Control Panel. If you are looking at the Category View of Control Panel, click Switch to Classic View. b. Double-click the Network Connections icon. c. Right-click Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card in the LAN or High-Speed Internet area and click Properties. 2. If the Wireless Networks tab is not already on top, click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 4. Click Add. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (19 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 5. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 6. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 7. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 8. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEYou do not need to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as you type the network key. 9. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network: wireless access points are not used box. 10. Click OK. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (20 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 11. Wait up to one minute for the network connection to be made. Your computer is connected to the added network when you see a blue bubble on top of the icon for that network. Disabling the radio To disable the radio on your Broadcom BCM94301MPL internal 802.11b Mini PCI card, right-click the BCM94301MPL wireless utility icon in the system tray and click Disable Radio. To enable the radio, right-click the utility icon and click Enable Radio. Diagnostics You can run a number of diagnostics on your Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless device to verify its operational and functional status. NOTEYour network connection is lost when you run the diagnostics. When the test run is over, your network connection is automatically reestablished. Diagnostics (Windows 2000 environment) 1. To begin running the diagnostics, open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. a. From the desktop, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (21 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide b. Double-click the BCM94301MPL wireless utility icon
. 2. Click the Diagnostics tab. 3. To see a description of the test, click each test and look in the Status area. 4. All tests are selected by default. To run an individual test or some but not all of the tests, clear the check box for those tests that you do not want to run. 5. Click Run. 6. If your Broadcom BCM94301MPL internal 802.11b Mini PCI card fails any of the diagnostics tests, see the Troubleshooting section. Diagnostics (Windows XP environment) 1. To begin running the diagnostics, open the BCM94301MPL wireless utility. a. From the desktop, click the Start button and click Control Panel. If you are looking at the Category View of Control Panel, click Switch to Classic View. b. Double-click the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility icon. 2. Click the Diagnostics tab. 3. To see a description of the test, click each test and look in the Status area. 4. All tests are selected by default. To run an individual test or some but not all of the tests, clear the check box for those tests that you do not want to run. 5. Click Run Tests. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (22 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Using the BCM94301MPL Wireless Utility: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide 6. If your Broadcom BCM94301MPL internal 802.11b Mini PCI card fails any of the diagnostics tests, see the Troubleshooting section. Back to top Back to Contents Please read copyright and trademark information. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/utility.htm (23 of 23) [11/22/2002 2:16:11 PM]
Troubleshooting: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Back to Contents Troubleshooting: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Cannot connect to the network Performance and connectivity problems Getting help Cannot connect to the network If your Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless device appears to be functioning properly but you cannot connect to the network, the problem may be that there is a mismatch between the Network name (SSID) and Wireless network key (WEP) settings in your Wireless Network Properties and the name and WEP key of the network you are trying to connect to. As explained in Completing the setup, the network name and WEP key are case sensitive. Verify that the spelling and case of these parameters are correct and that the settings are exactly the same on all computers on the network. If you have verified that the spelling and case of these parameters are correct and that the settings are exactly the same on all computers on the network and you are still unable to connect to the network, see Performance and connectivity problems. Performance and connectivity problems Problem or symptom The computers seem to be communicating, but they do not appear in the My Computer window or in the My Network Places window. Possible solution Windows 2000 environment Windows XP environment file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/trouble.htm (1 of 3) [11/22/2002 2:16:12 PM]
Troubleshooting: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Verify that File and Printer Sharing is enabled on all the computers on your network. Verify that File and Printer Sharing is enabled on all the computers on your network. 1. From the desktop, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. In Control Panel, double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon. 3. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, double-click the Local Area Connection icon. 4. In the Local Area Connection Status box, click Properties. 5. In the Local Area Connection Properties box, verify that the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks check box is selected. If the check box is cleared, select it. If the check box is not present, click Install. In the Select Network Component Type box, select Service and click Add. In the Select Network Service box, select File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks and click OK. Close the Local Area Connection Properties box. 6. Close the Local Area Connection Status box. 7. Close the Network and Dial-up Connections window. 1. From the desktop, click the Start button and click Control Panel (if you are looking at Category View, slick Switch to Classic View). 2. In Control Panel, double-click the Network Connections icon. 3. In the LAN or High-Speed Internet area, right-click Wireless Network Connection and click Properties. 4. In the Wireless Network Connection Properties box, if the General tab is not on top, click the General tab. 5. In the This connection uses the following items list, verify that the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks check box is selected. If the check box is cleared, select it. If this item is not present, click Install. In the Select Network Component Type box, select Service and click Add. In the Select Network Service box, select File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks and click OK. Close the Wireless Network Connection Properties box. 6. Close the Network Connections window. Data transfer is sometimes very slow. Data transfer is always very slow. Computers are not communicating with the network. In Microsoft Windows 2000, I get the following error message: Medium cable disconnected. Also, there is a red X on my network icon in the system tray. Network performance is really slow when the system is docked to a docking station that has an active Ethernet port. NOTEFor Windows 2000 only. Microwave ovens and some cordless phones operate at the same radio frequency as the BCM94301MPL Mini PCI cards. When the microwave oven or cordless phone is in use, it interferes with the wireless network. Therefore, keep computers having the BCM94301MPL Mini PCI card at least 20 feet away from your microwave oven and any cordless telephone that operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. Some homes and most offices are steel-framed structures. The steel in such buildings may interfere with your network's radio signals, thus causing a slowdown in the data transmission rate. Try moving your computers to different locations in the building to see if performance improves. If your network has an AP1100 access point, check all cables and make sure the power LED on the front of the AP1100 is green. This indicates that your computer is not properly configured to connect to the network. Verify that all of the wireless network properties settings are correct (see Viewing or modifying the wireless network properties). Also, make sure that your computer is receiving a good signal from the access point. See Viewing the link status of your wireless connection. This condition occurs if you dock your system into a docking station that has an active Ethernet port while your Broadcom BCM94301MPL internal Mini PCI card is still active and connected to an access point. This happens because Windows 2000 must now handle two active network connections. You need to either disconnect the Ethernet cable from your docking station, or disable the radio on your Mini PCI Card. To disable the radio on your Mini PCI Card, right click on the Broadcom BCM94301MPL utility icon icon in the system tray and click Disable Radio. NOTEThe radio is not automatically enabled when you computer next starts. To enable the radio, right-click on the Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless utility icon and click Enable Radio. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/trouble.htm (2 of 3) [11/22/2002 2:16:12 PM]
Troubleshooting: Broadcom BCM94301MP: Mini PCI Card User's Guide Getting help Technical support is available online from Broadcom at http://support.Broadcom.com Back to top Back to Contents Please read copyright and trademark information. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/trouble.htm (3 of 3) [11/22/2002 2:16:12 PM]
Regulatory Information: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Back to Contents Regulatory Information: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide Information for the user Regulatory information Information for the user Wireless interoperability The Broadcom BCM94301MPL products are designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:
l IEEE Std. 802.1b-1999. Standard on Wireless LAN. l Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification, as defined by the WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance). The Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI card and your health The Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI card, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless devices may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:
l Using the Broadcom BCM94301MPL equipment on board airplanes, or l Using the Broadcom BCM94301MPL equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless device before you turn it on. Regulatory information file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/regs.htm (1 of 4) [11/22/2002 2:16:14 PM]
Regulatory Information: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide The Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Broadcom Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Broadcom BCM94301MPL kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Broadcom Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Broadcom Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Cet quipement est conforme aux principales caractristiques dfinies dans la Directive europenne RTTE 1999/5/CE. Die Gerte erfllen die grundlegenden Anforderungen der RTTE-Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. Questa apparecchiatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali della Direttiva Europea R&TTE 1999/5/CE. Este equipo cumple los requisitos principales de la Directiva 1999/5/CE de la UE, "Equipos de Terminales de Radio y Telecomunicaciones". Este equipamento cumpre os requisitos essenciais da Directiva 1999/5/CE do Parlamento Europeu e do Conselho (Directiva RTT). O exoplismos autos plhroi tis basikes apaits ths koinotikhs odhgias EU R&TTE 1999/5/E. Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de noodzakelijke vereisten van EU-richtlijn betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-
eindapparatuur 1999/5/EG. Dette udstyr opfylder de Vsentlige krav i EU's direktiv 1999/5/EC om Radio- og teleterminaludstyr. Dette utstyret er i overensstemmelse med hovedkravene i R&TTE-direktivet (1999/5/EC) fra EU. Utrustningen uppfyller kraven fr EU-direktivet 1999/5/EC om ansluten teleutrustning och msesidigt erknnande av utrustningens verensstmmelse (R&TTE). Tm laite vastaa EU:n radio- ja teleptelaitedirektiivin (EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC) vaatimuksia. France Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorised power indoors is:
10 mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz2483.5 MHz) 100 mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz (NOTEChannels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band 2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz) file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/regs.htm (2 of 4) [11/22/2002 2:16:14 PM]
Regulatory Information: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide There are few possibilities for outdoor use: On private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a preliminary authorisation procedure by the Ministry of Defence, with maximum authorised power of 100 mW in the 2446.52483.5 MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted. In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz band:
l Maximum authorized power indoors is 100 mW l Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10 mW Departements in which the use of the 24002483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than 100 mW indoors and less than 10 mW outdoors:
01 Ain Orientales 36 Indre 66 Pyrnes 02 Aisne 03 Allier 37 Indre et Loire 67 Bas Rhin 41 Loir et Cher 68 Haut Rhin 05 Hautes Alpes 42 Loire 08 Ardennes 45 Loiret 50 Manche 55 Meuse 58 Nivre 59 Nord 60 Oise 61 Orne 09 Arige 11 Aude 12 Aveyron 16 Charente 24 Dordogne 25 Doubs 26 Drme 32 Gers 70 Haute Sane 71 Sane et Loire 75 Paris 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 88 Vosges 89 Yonne 90 Territoire de Belfort 63 Puy du Dme 94 Val de Marne 64 Pyrnes Atlantique This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please check with ART for the latest information (www.art-telecom.fr) NOTEYour Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless LAN Mini PCI card transmits less than 100 mW, but more than 10 mW. Italia A license is required for indoor use. Outdoor use is prohibited. E' necessaria la concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso interno. Verificare con i rivenditori la procedura da seguire. L'uso per installazione in esterni non e' permessa. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:
l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTEThe radiated output power of this Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless network device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm (8 inches) between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/regs.htm (3 of 4) [11/22/2002 2:16:14 PM]
Regulatory Information: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Mini PCI Card User's Guide antenna. Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTEThis Broadcom BCM94301MPL wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed on the radio approval list posted on the general Broadcom support site. Back to the top Back to Contents Please read copyright and trademark information. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/regs.htm (4 of 4) [11/22/2002 2:16:14 PM]
Glossary: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card User's Guide Back to Contents Glossary: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card User's Guide access point available network BER client computer dBm DBPSK DQPSK DSSS A stand-alone wireless hub that allows any computer that has a wireless network adapter to communicate with another computer and to connect to the Internet. One of the networks listed in the Available networks list on the Wireless Networks tab of the Wireless Configuration box that appears when the BCM94301MPL wireless utility is open. Any wireless network that is broadcasting and is within receiving range of the Broadcom BCM94301MPL internal 802.11b Mini PCI card appears on the list. Bit error rate. The ratio of errors to the total number of bits being sent in a data transmission from one location to another. The computer that gets its Internet connection by sharing either the host computer's connection or the access point's connection. A unit for expression of power level in decibels with reference to a power of 1 milliwatt. differential-binary-phase-shift keying. differential-quadrature-phase-shift keying. A compression technique that transmits only the differences between the values of the phase of the sine wave rather than the full absolute value. direct sequence spread spectrum. A type of radio technology. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) A mechanism for allocating IP addresses dynamically so that addresses can be reused when hosts no longer need them. file and printer sharing A capability that allows a number of people to view, modify, and print the same file(s) from different computers. GHz host computer IEEE gigahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1 000 000 000 cycles per second. The computer that is directly connected to the Internet via a modem or network adapter. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering Internet Protocol (IP) address The address of a computer that is attached to a network. Part of the address designates which network the computer is on, and the other part represents the host identification. LAN m MHz Mbps ns local area network meter megahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1 000 000 cycles per second. megabits per second. Transmission speed of 1 000 000 bits per second. nanosecond. 1 billionth (1/1 000 000 000) of a second. file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/glossary.htm (1 of 2) [11/22/2002 2:16:14 PM]
Glossary: Broadcom BCM94301MPL Internal 802.11b Mini PCI Card User's Guide peer-to-peer network preferred network Service Set Identifier (SSID) Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities and any computer can initiate a communication session. One of the networks that you have configured. Such networks appear in the Preferred networks list on the Wireless Networks tab of the Wireless Configuration box when the BCM94301MPL wireless utility is open. A value that controls access to a wireless network. The SSID for your wireless network card must match the SSID for any access point that you want to connect with. If the value does not match, you are not granted access to the network. You can have up to three SSIDs. Each SSID can be up to 32 characters long and is case-sensitive. A form of data encryption. You must set the WEP key information in the client to match the WEP key used by the access point. The WEP key can be enabled or disabled. The WEP key is case-sensitive. Back to top Back to Contents Please read copyright and trademark information file:///P|/pc/My%20Documents/Working/User%20Guides/94306MP/glossary.htm (2 of 2) [11/22/2002 2:16:14 PM]
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2003-10-09 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
| 2 | 2003-08-26 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 3 | 2003-08-05 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 | Effective |
2003-10-09
|
||||
| 1 2 3 |
2003-08-26
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 |
2003-08-05
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Broadcom Corporation
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0007091952
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | Physical Address |
270 Innovation Drive
|
||||
| 1 2 3 |
San Jose, California 95134
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 | TCB Application Email Address |
m******@ccsemc.com
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
QDS
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
BRCM1002-H
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 2 3 | Name |
A****** L******
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | Title |
Manager, Compliance Engineering
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
40892********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | Fax Number |
408-5********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 |
a******@broadcom.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Yes | |||||
| 1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | 802.11b WLAN Mini-PCI Module | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Limited Single Modular Approval | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Original Equipment | |||||
| 1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Grant Comments | In this Class II permissive change filing, two alternate antennas installed in the specific notebook computer as mobile configuration have been evaluated as documented in this filing. Limited modular approval. Output power listed is conducted. the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. User installed in prohibited. The transmitter and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The highest reported SAR value for all filings approved under this FCC ID is: 0.982 W/kg. | ||||
| 1 2 3 | Class II permissive change filing. Limited modular approval. Output power listed is conducted. For portable configuration, this device is approved to be installed in specific computers as indicated in the Certification filing. The highest reported SAR value for all filings approved under this FCC ID is: 0.986 W/kg. For mobile configuration, the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. User installation is prohibited. The transmitter and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. | |||||
| 1 2 3 | Limited modular approval. Output power listed is conducted. For portable configuration, this device is approved to be installed in specific computers as indicated in the Certification filing. The highest reported SAR value is 0.857 W/kg. For mobile configuration, the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. End user installation is prohibited. The transmitter and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. | |||||
| 1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Compliance Certification Services Inc
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | Name |
S**** C****
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
408-4******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 3 | Fax Number |
408-4********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 |
s******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.0860000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.0860000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.0860000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC